%0 Journal Article

%A Adams, W.M.

%D 1974

%T First strong-motion instrumentation in Hawaii: with results from the earthquake of April 26, 1973

%J Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America

%V v. 64

%N no. 6

%P p. 1909-1918

%K hc.mk, seismology.instrument, eq.1973/04/26.mk.os, hazard mitigation.earthquake, damage.earthquake

%X On April 26, 1973, an earthquake with magnitude of 61/4 occurred at a depth of 40 km below Honomu (north of Hilo). Serendipitously, in the preceding February, one SMA-1 accelerograph and one Wilmot seismoscope were installed near Waikiki on the island of Oahu. Also, one SMA-1 accelerograph and three Wilmot seismoscopes were installed on the island of Hawaii. The records from these instruments provided the first strong-motion data for the State of Hawaii. The motion was dominantly horizontal. This finding explains the extensive damage to the Hilo area, reported to be about 6 million dollars.





%0 Journal Article

%A Agassiz, Alexander

%D 1889

%T The coral reefs of the Hawaiian Islands

%J Harvard College Museum of Comparative Zoology Bulletin

%V v. 17

%N no. 3

%P p. 121-170

%K ha.tectonics, mech.subsidence.uplift, eq.1868/04/02.hil, tsu.1868.photo, west maui, hc.kl, eustatic, mech.coral reef.review, oahu.honolulu series.diamond head

%X Agassiz gives a thorough review of previous ideas of coral reef formation in the Pacific, beginning with observations by Chamisso on Kotzubue's voyage of 1821 (Kotzubue, 1821, v. 3, p. 331). Few of the early references, including Chamisso, mention Hawaii but provide background information for evaluating the formation of reefs in the Hawaiian islands. Agassiz' purpose in providing background is to demonstrate alternatives to Darwin's (1842) theory of subsidence. Beginning on p. 144, Agassiz describes his own observations on the Hawaiian Islands while summarizing the work of others. He notes the different kinds of coral rock, i.e., compact reef rock, "pudding-stone" (volcanic beach pebbles cemented by calcium carbonate), and coral sands. He gives data for wells that have penetrated coral and describes charred wood recovered from one well  as evidence of material washed down from shore and not necessarily as evidence for subsidence. He then describes alternation of coral and lava in the drill holes as indicating " . . . the gradual extension seaward of the shore line as fast as lava detritus was washed down or flowed over from successive eruptions, while the growth of the layers of coral indicates the period of rest during which the coral beds were deposited, each in its own turn being overwhelmed by a layer of lava or laval detritus, until we reach the existing condition of things."  He concludes that, from the evidence of coral deposition, "there appears to be no evidence that there has been any considerable elevation of the Hawaiian islands, twenty to twenty-five feet being probably the extreme; while the presence of cinder cones with their base close to the present sea level would indicate also that there had been no special subsidence."  He continues "there have yet been no sunken reefs discovered in any of the channels between the islands . . .". [Agassiz, as others, were hampered by lack of bathymetric data which later (e.g., Moore, 1970) revealed the existence of submerged reef terraces as definite evidence of subsidence. Agassiz also appears not to have recognized the possibility of changes in sea level as an alternative to uplift to explain the emergent reef deposits.]

  Agassiz does, however, recognize subsidence of the coastline at Kalapana and Kaimu on the island of Hawaii, illustrated by a photograph entitled "the sunken coral sand beach at Kaimu."  [This plate depicts the effects of the 1868 earthquake and accompanying land subsidence and tsunami. the foreground shows drowned palm trees, broken off near the water's surface. On the beach, the lower trunks of palm trees stand at a 45-degree angle to the horizontal, indicating that the local tsunami arrived from the east (opposite to the direction toward the earthquake epicenter but similar to present surf patterns), whereas the upper parts of the palms are vertical, perhaps recording growth between 1868 and the date of the photograph (unknown, but earlier than 1889). The raised coral reef described by Brigham (1868) was mostly lost in the subsidence accompanying the earthquake. It is possible that destruction of the reef contributed enough coral detritus to temporarily convert what had been a black sand beach (from 18th century eruptions from Kilauea's east rift zone entering the ocean to the east) into a beach white enough to be designated a coral sand beach.]

  Agassiz describes coral formations on islands other than Oahu, including a patch of elevated coral on the edge of the sunken plain of Kalapana. [This is no longer visible; whether its disapearance is due to erosion or further subsidence is not clear]. On Maui, he interprets the occurrence of coral sands 500-800 above sea level on West Maui volcano as follows: "The existence of coral sandstone on the east slope of West Maui at a considerable height, over extensive tracts, does not indicate any elevation, but is due merely to the aeolian deposits which have found their way to certain favorably situated places under the action of the prevailing trade winds. Nowhere in the district I have examined on Maui have I succeeded in finding any trace of corals beyond the height to which fragments might be carried by the action of the waves or wind and tides of unusually severe storms. The bedding of the sandstones at considerable heights was evidently entirely due, as has been shown by Dana, to the successive deposits of sand cemented together by interrupted rain fall, forming the delicate crusts which separate the various thin layers of coral sandstone which have accumulated at certain points."  He similarly interprets the elevated deposits of 200 feet on one side of Diamond Head and near Wailuku, Maui.





%0 Journal Article

%A Alexander, W.D.

%A Graton, Louis Caryl

%D 1871

%T On the earthquake at Oahu, Hawaiian Islands on February 18, 1871

%J American Journal of Science

%V v. 1

%P p. 469-471

%K oahu, ha, eq.1871/02/18.lanai, damage.earthquake

%X Alexander describes an earthquake on Feb. 18, 1871, as the strongest ever experienced on Oahu, being as strong on Oahu as on Hawaii, and felt most seriously at Lahaina, Maui. The shock lasted about a minute, with the motion "chiefly vertical with a rocking movement northeast and southwest."  The earthquake was accompanied by a flash of light. At Lahaina damage was severe, the ground cracked open in many places, and the direction of vibration was south to north. The shock was less severe on the east side of west Maui but quite severe on Molokai and was felt on the south side of Kauai. On the west and north coasts of Hawaii, the shock knocked down stone walls with the impetus coming from the west. He guesses that the shock was centered leeward of the island chain at a great depth. [Wyss and Koyanagi (1992) locate the epicenter on the island of Maui and assign it a depth of less than 15 km.]





%0 Map (Book)

%A Alexander, W.D.

%D 1886

%T Map of the island of Hawaii, Hawaiian Islands (preliminary ed.)

%I Hawaii Government Survey

%C Honolulu

%F 1:240,000

%K eq.1868/04/02.hil, hc.map

%X This map, in shaded relief, is the only map of the Island of Hawaii published in the 19th century. The map's importance lies in the identification of the fractures produced on Kilauea by the 1868 earthquake. [The fractures follow Kilauea's southwest rift zone, then turn seaward along the onshore trace of a submarine structure identified by bathymetric surveys conducted in the 1990s.]  Lava flows on the southeast side of the island are mismapped.

%O Map by W.A. Wall; Primary triangulation by W.D. Alexander, C.J. Lyons, and J.S. Emerson; Kau and Puna surveys not completed



%0 Book

%A Alexander, W.D.

%D 1891

%T A brief history of the Hawaiian people

%I American Book Co.

%C New York

%P 347 p

%K ha, WT, kl.cal.1790, kl.erz.1840, eqs.1886.kl, tsu.1819.1837.1841.1868.1877, ml.ner.1855-1856.1880-1881, ml.swr.1868.1887, ml.nf.1859, hu.1800-1801

%X A general description of the Hawaiian Islands and brief accounts of the 1790 eruption of Kilauea; the 1801 eruption of Hualalai; the  tsunamis of 1819, 1837, 1841, 1868, and 1877; the Kilauea eruption of 1840; and the Mauna Loa eruptions of 1855, 1859, 1868, 1880,  and 1887. The paper includes an excellent drawing from a photograph of Kilauea Crater in 1885 and a brief description of the Kilauea earthquake swarm of 1886.

%O Pages 14-15, 131, 151, 222-223, 231-232, 287, 292-294, 305-306 contain references to the active volcanoes.  Reprinted in 1899



%0 Conf. Proc. (book)

%A Algermissen, S. Theodore

%D 1986

%T Seismicity and design zonation in Hawaii

%B Outline of lecture

%I s.n.]

%C [s.l.]

%P 33 p

%8 Oct. 16-17, 1986

%1 EERI Regional Seminar on Earthquake Fundamentals

%2 Honolulu, HI

%K hc.ml, hazard.earthquake, hazard mitigation, eq.1868/04/02.hil, eq.1938/01/22.maui, eq.1951/08/21.kfz, eq.1975/11/29.ksf, eq.1983/11/16.kao, damage.earthquake, mech.earthquake

%X Introduction

Hawaii has a known history (since 1834) of moderate seismic activity with a number of shocks causing damage in the intensity VII-VIII range. The seismicity appears to be related to the well known volcanic activity of the islands in a complex and as yet not completely understood way. The purpose of this presentation is to present a discussion of the seismicity and suggest techniques for the definition of seismic hazard. An outline of the presentation follows together with illustrations and selected references.

Seismicity

Characteristics of earthquakes

  Spatial distribution

  Depths

  Focal mechanism of a large earthquake

  Maximum magnitudes

Description of the seismic hazard

  Observed Modified Mercalli Intensity (MMI)

  Strong ground motion

  Probabilistic hazard analysis

An example of a probabilistic hazard assessment

  Concept of probabilistic hazard assessment

Probabilistic hazard Analysis for Hawaii  Sesimic source zones

  Magnitude distribution of earthquakes

  Maximum and minimum magnitudes

  Atenuation

  Probabilistic acceleration map

Discussion

  The acceleration map

  Seismicity

  Attenuation

References





%0 Book

%A Anderson, R.

%D 1870

%T History of the Sandwich Islands mission

%I Congregational Publishing Society

%C Boston

%P 408 p

%K hc.ml, WT, eq.1868/04/02.hil, ml.swr.1868

%X Anderson briefly refers (p. 307-309) to the events of 1868, quoting from Titus Coan. He also recounts (p. 187-190) Queen Kapiolani's defiance of Pele in 1825





%0 Journal Article

%A Ando, M.

%D 1976

%T A source model of the M = 7.2 Kalapana earthquake of November 29, 1975 [abs.]

%J Eos, Transactions, American Geophysical Union

%V v. 57

%N no. 12

%P p. 954

%K hc.kl, eq.1975/11/29.ksf, tectonics.kilauea south flank, mech.earthquake.tsunami

%X Seismic wave, tsunami, and crustal deformation data were used to study the Kalapana earthquake. The source process can be divided into three stages: 1) During the first 2O seconds, a small event occurred close to the largest foreshock. The fault plane is taken with a dip direction of N15OÁE and dip of 10Á, the hanging wall side down to the south. The seismic moment is about one-tenth of the next stage. 2) Thirty to 40 seconds after the onset, a large rupture started west of the epicenter. The 100-sec seismic moment is 1.2 x 1027 dyne cm. The radiation pattern is quite similar to that expected from the body wave first motions. Thus, the two events may lie on the same fault plane. However, the fault area required to generate the surface waves was larger than the aftershock area (5 x 40 km2). 3) A large slow slip must have occurred beneath the ocean at the time of earthquake though the exact onset time is unclear. Subsidence on the coast and uplift offshore derived from tide gage records show that normal faulting took place to the south of aftershock area. A 10 m dislocation and 3O x 40 km2 fault plane area are required to explain these data if this slow slip occurred on the same plane. This earthquake might have been accompanied by injection of a huge volume of magma accumulated beneath Kilauea since the last large earthquake of 1868.

%O AGU fall meeting, San Francisco, CA, Dec. 6-10, 1976, Program and abstracts



%0 Journal Article

%A Ando, M.

%D 1979

%T The Hawaii earthquake of November 29, 1975: low dip angle faulting due to forceful injection of magma

%J Journal of Geophysical Research

%V v. 84

%N no. B13

%P p. 7616-7626

%K hc.kl, cross-section, eq.1975/11/29.ksf, tectonics.kilauea south flank, mech.earthquake.tsunami, eq^er, geodesy.horizontal.1896-1970

%X The mechanism of the Hawaii earthquake of November 29, 1975 (Ms = 7.1), which took place on the south flank of Kilauea Volcano, is discussed on the basis of a comprehensive set of body wave and surface wave data, the aftershock distribution, and tsunami and crustal deformation data. The aftershock distribution defines a gently dipping plane at about 10-km depth beneath the south flank of Kilauea. This suggests that the shallowly dipping P wave nodal plane fits the fault of the Hawaii earthquake better than the nodal plane that has a nearly vertical dip angle. The fault length is fixed well by the aftershock distribution, which is also consistent with the tsunami and crustal deformation data. The fault width which is obtained from tsunami and crustal deformation data is, however, significantly greater than that obtained from the aftershock distribution. This discrepancy implies that about half of the main shock fault plane was not associated with aftershock activity. The source parameters are strike N70ÁE; dip angle 20ÁSSE; fault length 40 km; seismic moment 1.8 x 1027 dyne-cm; fault width 20-30 km; fault movement is pure normal dip slip of 3.7-5.5 m, and stress drop is 43-93 bars. Results of geodetic surveys throughout the twentieth century and a history of volcanic activity on Kilauea imply that a north-south compression due to magma injected into rift zones may have steadily increased on the south flank of Kilauea since the 1868 earthquake, an event comparable to the 1975 shock. This compressional stress was possibly released by the 1975 Hawaii earthquake. The long-term eruptive activity of Kilauea may be affected by large earthquakes like the 1868 and 1975 events and may also have a similar 100-yr recurrence interval.





%0 Conf. Proc. (book)

%A Ando, M.

%D 1979

%T Large earthquakes and a cycle of eruptions at Kilauea Volcano, Hawaii [abs.]

%B Abstract volume

%E Decker, Robert W.

%EćDrake, Charles

%EćEaton, Gordon

%EćHelsley, Charles

%I U.S. Geological Survey, Hawaiian Volcano Observatory

%C Hawaii National Park, HI

%P p. 155

%8 July 16-22, 1979

%1 Hawaii Symposium on Intraplate Volcanism and Submarine Volcanism

%2 Hilo, HI

%K hc.kl, periodicity.earthquake, eq.1975/11/29.ksf, eq^er, mech.earthquake.tsunami

%X On November 29, 1975, an earthquake (MS=7.1) occurred on the south flank of Kilauea volcano, resembling the 1868 event in its pattern of tsunami heights, crustal deformation and seismic intensity. A study of the mechanism based on a comprehensive data set of body and surface waves, aftershock distribution, tsunami and crustal deformation produced a well-defined source model as a normal fault with a gentle dip angle. The fault parameters are: dip angle, 20Á down to SSE; fault strike, N70ÁE; focal depth, 10 km; fault area, 20 x 40 km2; normal fault component of displacement, 6 m. This earthquake was characterized by a southward movement of the south flank along a nearly horizontal plane, consistent with the movement anticipated from the accumulation of preseismic strain on the south flank. The nature and timing of magma intrusion and seismic events suggest a model of the south flank in which the fault plane of 1975 plays an important role as a horizontal bottom sliding plane. Magma is intruded forcefully into the rift zones and pushes the flank southward while the fault plane is locked against shear displacement (Fig la). When the stress exceeds a threshold, the lock is released and a sudden slip occurs on the fault plane to cause a large earthquake (Fig lb). By means of this earthquake the strain accumulation cycle is completed on the south flank. The same intrusive process starts again at a later time with the location of the south flank several meters south of its previous position. Thus, the south flank intermittently moves southward (Fig lc) at an interval of about 100 years associated with a large earthquake. The long quiescence of eruptions after the 1868 and an unusual postseismic deflation at the summit of Kilauea immediately after the 1975 earthquake suggest that confining pressure in the magma reservoir does not control the rate of magma supply from the mantle. If it did, the low confining pressure in the reservoir would have allowed magma to flow freely from the mantle to the reservoir and fill the voids left by large earthquakes, so that eruptions would have begun. Perhaps the rate of magma supply is related to the mantle processes, but independent of movements in the crust. This rate seems steady as inferred by the steady rate of crustal deformation due to magma injection on the south flank over the last 70 years. Assuming the steady rate of magma supply, we can anticipate that Kilauea will be generally quiescent for 20 to 30 years for large eruptions.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Andrews, Christian

%D 1907

%T Experiences at flow by one of Waiohinu party

%B Honolulu Evening Bulletin

%P p. 3

%8 01/31

%K ml.swr.1907, eqs.1907/01/11.mlswr?

%X Waiohinu, Kau, Hawaii, Jan. 16

Description of the eruption from Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone.

 . . .

 "Last Friday morning, the 11th inst., shocks of a rotary motion were felt at almost regular intervals. The day before, several thumps were likewise felt. These shocks, on account of their rotary motion and frequency, caused us evil forebodings. They were the harbinger of trouble. The sequel will show that our prognostications were correct. Were these shocks caused by Madam Pele's fiery train rushing through the bowels of the earth, in a subterranean passage, from her impossible pavilion at Kilauea, to her winter resort at Mokuaweoweo? At any rate, the quakes ceased, all but one more vicious thump which apparently forced an opening through the lower wall of Mokuaweoweo.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1840

%T [no title]

%B The Polynesian

%V v. 1

%N no. 15

%P p. 59

%8 09/19

%K kl.erz.1840, kl.cal.1840

%X The correspondent describes the spot where lava [from the 1840 eruption] first broke out. "It is about six miles from Kilauea [crater]. After running two miles above ground, it again disappears, and flows in a subterranean channel at a great depth below the surface; its course being marked by seams and deep fissures in the earth's surface, and by the emission of smoke and gasses. About twenty miles from the sea it breaks out again, in a terrific sea of fire, and rolls on above the surface to the ocean. The whole length of the stream may be thirty-five miles; more than one third of which is under ground."

  He closes by describing Kilauea crater. Everything is new compared to before the eruption. the caldron is one great sea of fire, much as it was described in the week before the eruption.

%O Extract from a letter dated Hilo, Aug. 26, 1840



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1841

%T [no title]

%B The Polynesian

%V v. 1

%N no. 36

%P p. 143

%8 02/13

%K kl.cal.1840, hazard.lava lake

%X A description Dr. Judd's escape from active lava, on a specimen-collecting trip to Halemaumau lava lake.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1841

%T More earthquakes

%B The Polynesian

%V v. 1

%N no. 42

%P p. 167

%8 03/27

%K hc.ml, eq.1840.kfz

%X On the 11th inst. two earthquakes were felt at Kailua, Hawaii--the first shock occurred 15 minutes before 10 o'clock, P.M. The second about half an hour later. Rev. Mr. Thurston states that they were the strongest that he has ever felt there. At Kealakekua much rock was thrown down from the pali. When these occurred, an unusual light was observed in the direction of the volcano.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1841

%T Earthquakes at Hilo, Hawaii

%B The Polynesian

%V v. 1

%N no. 49

%P p. 195

%8 05/15

%K eqs?.1841.kl?, hazard.earthquake

%X Last month several shocks were experienced at Hilo--one of which was the most severe that has happened for a long time. It occurred about midnight--and shook the houses violently, shattered the plastering, threw down stone walls, created quite an excitement among the crockery and all brittle ware, splashed about the milk in the milk-pans, and many like vagaries and eccentricities, to the alarm of the inhabitants. As an instance of the severity of the shock, it fairly waked all the native population; a circumstance heretofore unknown in the annals of earthquakes at Hilo. Had the houses been constructed of less yielding materials, they would have experienced much injury.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1841

%T Another earthquake, and knocking at our barn doors

%B The Polynesian

%V v. 1

%N no. 50

%P p. ?

%8 05/22

%K eq.1841.oahu?

%X On Monday night last, between 12 and 1 o'clock [May 18 A.M.], a shock was experienced here of sufficient violence to shake a house and awake its inmates.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1852

%T [no title]

%B The Polynesian

%V v. 8

%N no. 44

%P p. 2

%8 03/13

%K ml.ner.1852

%X Further accounts of the eruption, as it broke out on the side of Mauna Loa, from several correspondents, including Fidelia Coan. No date or time of the initial outbreak is given. Most information concerns progress of the lava down the mountainside.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1852

%T The late eruption

%B The Polynesian

%V v. 8

%N no. 45

%P p. 2

%8 03/20

%K ml.mok.1852, ml.ner.1852

%X An account from a resident in Hilo of the breakout of eruption in Mokuaweoweo on Feb. 18 and on the side of the mountain on Feb. 20. Fountains at the summit were estimated to be 300-500 ft high. The last entry date is March 2nd. Hilo is covered in Pele's hair; the length of one strand was measured at 26 inches. [signature obscured]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1852

%T The late eruption

%B The Polynesian

%V v. 8

%N no. 46

%P p. 3

%8 03/27

%K ml.ner.1852

%X Activity in the crater has greatly abated and lava has ceased to flow, after reaching within seven miles of Hilo.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1855

%T [no title]

%B The Polynesian

%V v. 12

%N no. 63

%P p. 2

%8 08/25

%K kl.cal.1855, ml.mok.1855

%X The eruption began on the evening of August 11 in Mokuaweoweo and was on the northeast rift by Aug. 14. "On the 15th August, at near 12 noon, another eruption was witnessed on the plain about equi-distant from Mauna Loa and Mauna Kea, and at a point where one was never before known." [This is most likely a breakout from the channel of the earlier eruption.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1857

%T The earthquake on Hawaii

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 08/13

%K eq.1857.hc

%X Our letters by the Liholiho came to hand too late for insertion in our last issue. The shock it seems, was one of the most severe that has been felt there for years. We will make an inquiry or two which some of our Hilo friends can answer perhaps. Are there any special changes observed to follow these severe shocks, in the crater of Kilauea, or do new eruptions take place after very severe earthquakes? In regard to the shock on the 30th of July, Mr. Wm. F. Conway writes: "A few minutes past one o'clock this morning, the people of Hilo and of the surrounding districts were suddenly aroused from their usually quiet slumber by a very heavy quake of the earth which lasted for several seconds and was felt more severely than any we have had on this side of the island for a number of years past: during my residence on the island of nearly five years, I have not experienced its equal. No damage however was done though it created a little fright to those who had not previously experienced the effects of a heavy shock. The undulation of the earth was from west to east. You can tell our neighbors on the other islands not to feel alarmed for their safety; for we say here, as schoolboys say when skating on the ice, 'all's right so long as she cracks.'"





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1858

%T Earthquake at East Maui

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 08/05

%K eq.1858.east maui.hk

%X On Sunday, July 25th, quite a smart shock of an earthquake was experienced in the districts of Hana and Koolau, East Maui. Dishes clattered, and furniture sensibly vibrated. It was not noticed in other parts of Maui, nor at Kohala. Is Haleakala getting uneasy?





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1859

%T Earthquake

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 11/24

%K eq.1859.oahu?

%X A severe shock of an earthquake occurred on Monday morning last, at 25 minutes past two o'clock, A.M., which lasted but a few seconds. It was felt by several persons, who were aroused by it. A gentleman who was awake at the time, says that the sensation felt was very similar to a person taking hold of another by the shoulders and shaking him suddenly. His native cook was aroused by it, and rushed into the house to inquire the cause. It is very seldom that an earthquake occurs on this island. We would like to have our correspondents at Hilo inform us, if any shock occurred there about that time.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1859

%T The earthquake at Waimea

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 12/15

%K eq.1859.oahu?

%X Noticing in your issue of Nov. 24 an account of the earthquake, and its being felt on the island of Oahu, perhaps you would like to know if Waimea is still above water. The shock was felt here about three o'clock on the morning of Monday, the 1st of November, and lasted about 10 seconds. It was preceded by a heavy rumbling sound, like distant thunder, which lasted about the same length of time. Nor was that all: about a half an hour after we felt another, not quite so severe, but it made the tree tops tremble. As there was no wind, we could hear the leaves shake over the house. The bed on which I slept shook like a man with the fever and ague. It made some of the natives commence saying their prayers, and the truth is, Mr. Editor, I felt something like it myself.

%O Communication dated Waimea, Hawaii, Dec. 4, 1859



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1860

%T From Hilo

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 06/14

%K eq.1860.hc

%X "A correspondent writes under the date of June 7: 'On the 1st of June, at 3 o'clock A.M., we had a quite severe shock of an earthquake. It awoke persons out of a sound sleep, and lasted about two minutes.'"





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1861

%T Getting shaky

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 06/13

%K eq.1861.hc

%X From Hawaii, we hear that three earthquakes have recently occurred on that island, showing that Madam Pele is getting up steam again, and will probably erupt herself shortly. The old dame manages to become uneasy and make a display of fireworks about every three or four years; and as it is now two and half years since the last eruption broke out, we should not be surprised to hear of another soon. . . . .





%0 Magazine Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1861

%T Earthquake

%B The Polynesian

%P [no page]

%8 12/07

%K eq.1861.molokai.lanai

%X On Thursday forenoon, at 10 minutes to 12 o'clock the good people of Honolulu were not a little startled by two distinct shocks of an earthquake. The first shock was apparently perpendicular with a tremendous crash, with a perfectly sensible, though perhaps not visible lifting up and down of buildings and houses. This was followed by a heavy rumbling sound, as of the rolling of large casks of old iron over a pavement, and a horizontal, wavy motion proceeding from east to west. Window panes glassware and crockery shook as if the town had been bombarded, and in several places the plaster fell from the ceilings of houses. People rushed from their buildings into the street and - we presume, thanked God that no damage was done. Although shocks of earthquake are a common occurrence in Hawaii, yet for very many years none has been felt on Oahu at all comparable to the present in strength and duration.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1861

%T Severe earthquake

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 12/12

%K eq.1861.oahu?, tsu.1842.1851

%X A heavy earthquake occurred on Thursday last, at 11 minutes before 12 M. Two distinct shocks were felt, and so severe were they, that everybody experienced them, whether walking, standing or sitting. In several instances it threw persons quite from their balance; and more probably experienced sensations of astonishment or fright. Nearly every house was shaken, in some cases so strongly as to cause the inmates to leave the building. At Punahou College, the plaster of the ceiling was shaken down, and the pupils ran out of doors. The same scene, so far as the stampede was concerned, occurred at the courthouse, where a suit was in progress in Chambers. The quake was accompanied by a noise resembling that of a dray driven over the roof, or the rolling of casks over head. The shock was felt at Lahaina, and was so severe, that ink was spilled out of an inkstand on a table. We cannot learn that it was noticed at Hilo or anywhere on Hawaii.

  It is very seldom that earthquakes have been felt on this island, though they are of frequent occurrence on Hawaii. The cause is probably that Oahu is more remote from the seat of activity of  the volcanic fires beneath us. Twice, however, during the last twenty years, this island has been visited by tidal waves, which are probably attributable to volcanic eruptions--once about the year 1842 at Honolulu, and again about the year 1851 at Waialua.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1861

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P [no page]

%8 12/12

%K eq.1861.molokai.lanai

%X [quotations from Cox, 1986]

The time of the first shock was given as 11 minutes before noon. 

  Nearly everyone in Honolulu "whether walking, standing or sitting" was reported to have felt the earthquake and "in several instances it threw persons quite from their balance. "Punahou College" was cited as a place where ceiling plaster was shaken down; and the exodus from buildings was attributed to students at Punahou and the occupants of the courthouse (downtown).

  The shock was felt at Lahaina, and so severe that the ink was shaken out of inkstand on a table. We cannot learn that it was noticed at Hilo or any where on Hawaii.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1861

%T Another earthquake

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 12/26

%K eq.1861.oahu?

%X On Sunday evening last, at about 21 minutes past seven o'clock, another severe shock was felt all over this island (Oahu). It consisted of ten or twelve very regular vibrations from East to West, and was felt equally plain by those sitting or walking. It was accompanied by a noise more distant than that which accompanied the shock of the 12th. some persons felt an electric sensation in the knees, In the harbor the effect of the quake was most noticeable. Some persons standing at the harbor-master's office, observed the fishes suddenly flying on the surface toward the sea, while the water disturbed by the fish, appeared like a sheet of phosphorous. The schooners lying by the wharves were also set to rocking. These earthquakes are something new to Honolulu, and the query suggested by our Maui correspondent below is not inappropriate--"Are we going under?"





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1861

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P [no page]

%8 12/26

%K eq.1861.molokai.lanai

%X ANOTHER EARTHQUAKE-On Sunday evening last, at about 21 minutes past seven o'clock, another severe shock was felt all over this island (Oahu). It consisted of ten or twelve regular vibrations from east to west, and was felt equally plainly by those sitting or walking. It was accompanied by a noise more distant than that which accompanied the shock of the 12th [sic]. Some persons felt an electric sensation in the knees.- In the harbor the effect of the quake was most noticeable. Some persons standing at the harbormaster's office, observed the fishes flying on the surface toward the sea, while the water disturbed by the fish, appeared like a sheet of phosphorus. The schooners lying by the wharves were also set to rocking. These earthquakes are something new to Honolulu, and the query suggested by our Maui correspondent below us not inappropriate-"Are we going under."

STILL ANOTHER EARTHQUAKE-the correspondent on Maui (at Ulupalakua), gives the time of the earthquake as "twenty minutes before 5 o'clock; it was said to have awakened "all hands" and it was described as if more intense than the "shake of the previous Thursday."





%0 Magazine Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1861

%T Earthquake

%B The Polynesian

%P [no page]

%8 12/28

%K eq.1861.molokai.lanai

%X [Quotes from Cox, 1986]

The time of this second earthquake [Dec. 15] in Honolulu was given as "about 8:00 o'clock," the direction of its motion there was reported as "apparently the same as that on the previous occasion (December 12) [sic], from east to west," and the water in Honolulu Harbor was described as having "bubled [sic] up and down, like in a state of boiling."

  Earthquakes were reported in the newspapers as observed on Oahu, Maui, or both, on Thursday. 5 December; on Thursday, 12 December; and at two significantly different times on Sunday, 15 December. It is, however, very doubtful that any earthquake was felt on Oahu with significant intensity on 12 December, although one may have been observed on Maui on that date. If three quakes had been observed on Maui, it is somewhat unlikely that the Ulupalakua correspondent to the Advertiser would have mentioned the second but failed to mention the first (which had been felt at least at Lahaina) in his or her report on the third. If three quakes had been observed on Oahu, it is much more unlikely that either newspaper would have mentioned the second but failed to have mentioned the first (which had clearly had a high intensity on Oahu) in its report on the third. Furthermore, the Polynesian issue of 14 December made no mention of a quake occurring two days earlier.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1862

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 01/02

%K eq.1861.hc

%X The earthquake was felt on Hawaii on Sunday night [12/29-30/1861], but the heaviest shocks were noticed on the following morning, which were unusually severe, even for that island, where they are of frequent occurrence.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1862

%T From Kona

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 01/30

%K eq.1862.kfz?

%X . . . . There have been several severe shocks of earthquake felt on the Kona side of Hawaii during the past month, auguring more than usual activity in the volcano. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1862

%T Notes of the week; the "shakes" on the increase

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 02/06

%X Almost every letter we receive from Maui and Hawaii, makes reference to frequent earthquakes, some much heavier than others. On the morning of the 29th January (one letter says the 29th another the 30th,) a few minutes after 5 o'clock, a very severe shock was felt--so heavy as to wake up all who were asleep, and set doors, windows, lamps, crockery, &c., into an unusual nervous state. One correspondent, writing from Maui, says:

  " . . . . , the supply of earthquakes is fully up to demand. A fine sample was offered at 5 A.M. this morning, and there was a lively time among the spectators for about 20 seconds, which was met with a corresponding briskness among the lamps and crockery. . . . 

 . . . Another correspondent writing from Makawao, (Jan. 30,) says:

  "At 5 o'clock this morning, we were pretty thoroughly shaken up by an earthquake. I had risen and was striking a light, so that I fully realized the movement. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1863

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 12/03

%K eq.1863.hc

%X An unusually severe shock of occurred at Hilo, about 4 o'clock on the morning of the 26th--the heaviest that has been experienced there for many years.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1865

%T Earthquake

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 03/04

%K eq.1865.kao?

%X On Friday morning, March 3rd, about fifteen minutes before one o'clock, a very severe shock of an earthquake was felt, many being waked out of a sound sleep by it. It appears to have been accompanied by a noise like that of persons tramping heavily over the floor. The frame dwelling we occupy was shaken very sensibly. It continued an unusually long period, and the motion was heaving up and down, rather than sideways as it generally is. No fear of any serious accident from earthquakes on this island need ever be entertained; and their occurrence only indicates increased activity in the volcanic fires under Hawaii. It is possible a new eruption may take place there soon. We should request our readers on Hawaii to advise us of anything of the kind occurring there, with dates and full particulars.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1865

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 03/11

%K eq.1865.kao?

%X The earthquake noticed in our last issue, was felt on Maui, more distinctly than on this island. Many of the people were waked up by it. On Hawaii it was very severe. Mr. Paris writes, under the date of March 8--"On Thursday night, the 2nd inst. about half past 12 o'clock, we had the hardest shake of earthquake I have experienced in 25 years. The plastering of our house is much damaged, and a great deal of stone wall in this region damaged."

![where was Mr. Paris?-call mission library]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1868

%T Earthquake

%B Hawaiian Gazette

%V v. 4

%N no. 38

%P p. 3

%8 10/07

%K eqs?.1868.kl?

%X On Thursday last, there was a smart shock of earthquake at Kawaihae, Hawaii, that started everybody out of their houses. At Hilo, on the 22nd ult., the atmosphere was loaded with smoke, and frequent slight shocks of earthquakes were felt. . . .





%0 Magazine Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1868

%T Earthquakes and eruptions on Hawaii

%B The Friend

%P p. 33

%8 May

%K hc.ml, WT, ml.swr.1868, eqs.1868.hil

%X A brief account of the earthquakes and the Mauna Loa southwest rift eruption.





%0 Magazine Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1868

%T Direction of the earthquakes

%B The Friend

%P p. 36

%8 May

%K hc.ml, WT, eye, eq.1868/04/02.hil, tsu.1868, ls.1868, eqs.1868.hil, mech.earthquake, damage.earthquake, eruption.precursor.seismicity

%X "Mr. Rexford Hitchcock, of Hilo, informs us that [during the earthquake of April 2, 1868] stone walls running due north and south were not so much thrown down and demolished as walls running in the opposite direction. After the great shock on the 2d of April, curtains and other things suspended in the dwellings at Hilo were left swinging north and south. 

  Culmination, April 2d--Although the number of shocks have exceeded two thousand, yet all accounts agree on the point that the severest was experienced April 2d, six minutes before four o'clock, P.M. This was the moment when the 'mud flow' issued forth, when the whole Islands shook and trembled, when the clocks stopped in Honolulu, when the tidal wave swept over the southeast shore of Hawaii, when Capt. Ludlow, off Hamakua, Hawaii, saw the precipices tumble into the sea, when the most damage was done at Hilo, Kau, and other places on Hawaii."

  The author quotes Brigham, to the effect that earthquake precursors to eruption were previously unknown. The earthquakes took place in 1868 only because the lava could not find a vent higher on the slope.





%0 Magazine Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1868

%T The mud flow

%B The Friend

%P p. 37

%8 May

%K hc.ml, WT, ls.1868.ml, eqs.1868.hil

%X The author quotes F.S. Lyman's letter [see F.S. Lyman, 1868a-b] on the earthquakes and the mudflow triggered by the April 2 shock.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1868

%T Earthquake

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 04/18

%K hc.ko.ml, WT, eqs.1868.hil

%X Earthquakes were still felt at Hilo and Kohala on April 14.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1868

%T Earthquakes and the volcano

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 3

%8 04/11

%K hc.ml, WT, kl.hm.1868, kl.ki.1868, ml.mok.1868, eqs.1868.hil

%X A collection of reports regarding the earthquakes and volcanic activity in April. Kilauea caldera was reported very active, the lava level was dropping fast, and smoke had issued from the line of craters on Kilauea's east rift zone. [This is the only indication that an intrusion may have accompanied the 1868 collapse.]  Smoke from Mauna Loa was first sighted on March 27. The article concludes with a list of earthquakes felt from March 28-31, compiled by C.G. Williamson. [See Anonymous, 1868e.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1868

%T New eruption of the volcano and Postscript: later from the volcano!

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 3

%8 04/04

%K hc.ml, WT, ml.mok.1868, eqs.1868.hil

%X Notice of the summit eruption of Mauna Loa, March 27, and the beginning of the earthquake swarm.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1868

%T The eruption

%B Hawaiian Gazette

%P p. 2

%8 04/29

%K hc.ml, WT, ml.swr.1868, eqs.1868.hil, kl.hm.1868

%X A brief account of the 1868 Mauna Loa lava flow and littoral cone, and the April 2, 1868 landslide. The correspondent mentions that the eruption had ended but that earthquakes were still being felt. Kilauea Crater had sunk 500 ft and no lava was visible.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1868

%T [On the eruption and earthquakes of 1868]

%B Hawaiian Gazette

%P p. 2

%8 04/15

%K hc.ml, WT, kl.hm.1868, ml.mok.1868, eqs.1868.hil

%X An account of the great earthquakes of 1868, and the activity of Mauna Loa and Kilauea, including a description of the effects of the accompanying tsunamis at Hilo and along the southern shore.

%O Excerpted in American Journal of Science, 1868, 2nd ser., v. 46,  p. 122-123



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1868

%T The volcano active

%B Hawaiian Gazette

%8 04/08

%K hc.ko.ml, WT, ml.mok.1868, eye, eqs.1868.hil, seismicity, maui, oahu

%X This article contains an account of the summit eruption of Mauna  Loa, first seen at 5:45 am on Mar. 27, and the ensuing earthquake swarm. Effects of the April 2, 1868, earthquake are described as they affected Kau, Kohala, Maui, and Oahu. The article includes a list of earthquake times from March 28-31. [See also Williamson, 1868a-b.]

The following sections describe effects at places other than Kau:

Earthquakes at Kohala

  A strong shock was felt at Kawaihae at 4 pm on April 2 lasting 30 seconds, accompanied by a deep rumbling noise and landslides on the Kohala slopes. Tsunami at Kawaihae marked by 13 cycles of ebb and flow, leaving the reef exposed and returning beyond high water mark.

 Several shocks, not severe. were experienced on a ship offshore of Hamakua; landslides into the sea were observed.

Earthquake on Maui

  At Lahaina an earthquake felt at 4 pm April 2, lasting 90 seconds, accompanied by a low rumbling sound, and shaking the house and everything in it. About 5 o'clock the sea receded, the space between reef and beach left dry in many places. The sea ebbed and flowed thirteen times, the time between each flow being between seven and eight minutes.

  shocks and similar tidal disturbances were observed on Lanai at the same hour.

  Two earthquakes felt at Lahaina on the early morning of April 4, 12:19, lasting 30 sec, and 12:37 am, lasting a bit longer. they were both more violent than the one on Thursday, the latter more particularly so, and were both atended with the same rumbling sound and my house was violently shaken; no tidal effects were seen to follow these quakes.

On Oahu

  At 4 pm on April 2 a first, very light, shock occurred, noticed only by those inside of stone buildings. The movement was lateral and quick and was not noticed by the majority of the townspeople. The sea was observed to recede, but the disturbance was not great.

  The same shocks were noticed at Kaneohe. Probably three shocks on the night of April 3-4 extended all over this island.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1868

%T The late earthquakes

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 3

%8 05/02

%K hc.ml, WT, ml.mok.1868, kl.hm.1868, ls.1868.ml, eq.1868/04/02.hil, mech.earthquake, tsu.1868, mech.tsunami

%X A discussion of the earthquake of April 2, 1868, the mudflow, and the tsunami. The earthquake waves were estimated to travel from Hilo to Kona at 12 mi/hr. [This is far too slow.]  The summit activity on Mauna Loa was reported to have built a cone several hundred feet high [exaggerated]. The fire was returning to Kilauea as of May 1.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1869

%T From Hilo

%B Hawaiian Gazette

%V v. 5

%N no. 64

%P p. 3

%8 02/24

%K kl.cal.1869, seismicity

%X Somehow the rumor has got current about town, and was near being snapped up by our reporter, that there was an eruption of Kilauea, quite formidable in its character, and that some more heavy shocks of earthquakes had been felt in Hilo. We are able to state, on the reliable testimony of Capt. Babcock, arrived thence on Monday last, that although Kilauea was bubbling and boiling enough to be interesting, there was no eruption, and that although there had been a couple of slight earth tremors at Hilo, there was nothing that approached the dignity of an earthquake.





%0 Magazine Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1869

%T The coast-line of Hawaii

%B The Friend

%P p. 77

%8 Sept.

%K hc.ml, WT, eq.1868/04/02.hil

%X A brief note, quoting from the Pacific Commercial Advertiser, regarding the subsidence of the shoreline associated with the 1868 earthquake.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1871

%T Earthquake

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 3

%8 02/25

%K eq.1871.lanai

%X " . . . the 4th day of February 1871, and the 10th day of February, 1871, are days ever to be remembered in Lahaina. The first was the occasion of a free fight, before mentioned, and the other was the great earthquake, at 10 o'clock 15 minutes P.M. on Sunday. It came as near from the S.E. as you could have made it. We heard the noise like distant thunder, long before we received the shock, and when it did come, it came good. There is not an adobe or adobe and stone, or a stone house but what is cracked, and some scattered so bad that it is dangerous to live in them. The old mission church is damaged, the walls are all cracked. Also the fine stone building of Col. Spalding is damaged. Then as you come along the main road, that is cracked open for many feet. Then along the Court House, which is damaged, and will need repairing . . . Since Sunday night, we have had repeated shocks, but light.





%0 Magazine Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1871

%T The earthquake

%B The Friend

%P p. 21

%8 March

%K eq.1871.lanai, kl.cal.1871, ml.mok.1871

%X "At ten minutes past ten o'clock Sabbath evening, February 19, many of the people in Honolulu and elsewhere on the islands experienced a new sensation. There was no doubt about the reality of the agitation of the earth. Hitherto, however, severe the shocks may have been on the island of Hawaii, this island has escaped. This time, from all accounts, the islands of Oahu and Maui have been more seriously affected than Hawaii. The vibrations continued not over thirty seconds on this island [Oahu], but elsewhere report says they lasted three minutes. Several houses and public buildings were more or less cracked, and in some places crockery and glassware were thrown down and broken. There is a report of an eruption on the summit of Mauna Loa, but the old crater of Kilauea, report says, remains in status quo."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1871

%T An earthquake

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 3

%8 09/30

%K WT, eq.1871.hc

%X Notice of an earthquake on Sept. 18, 1871, the largest since April 2, 1868.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1872

%T Rev. Mr. Coan's "Kilauea" criticized

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 3

%8 01/27

%K hc.ml, WT, ml.swr.1868, eq.1868/04/02.hil, kl.hm.1871

%X The author questions the dimensions of Halemaumau lava lake, the steepness of slope and the height of its shield during August 1871, and the distance from Kilauea to Mauna Loa, as set forth by Titus Coan (1871).





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1875

%T Earthquake, storm and volcano

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 3

%8 01/23

%K WT, ml.mok.1875, kl.hm.1874, eq.1874.1875.hc

%X A series of short communications reporting increased activity at Kilauea in December 1874, a new eruption at Mokuaweoweo on January 10, 1875, and a strong earthquake felt at Hilo on December 29, 1874.

Hilo, Jan. 3d, 1875-- . . . Old residents say that with two exceptions--in 1855 and in 1868 . . . there has been nothing like the recent one [earthquake] A continuous shake of two or three minutes, like the earthquake of Dec. 29, must have torn everything to pieces.

Kailua, Hawaii, January 12, 1875--The summit crater of Mokuaweoweo . . . broke out active again on [just before sunrise] last Sunday morning, the 10th instant. . . . At Kau a sharp shock of earthquake immediately preceded the outbreak.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1877

%T From the crater of Kilauea

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 3

%8 05/12

%K WT, kl.cal.1877, eye, eqs.1877.klcal

%X  . . . the old South Lake of Kilauea, which for many years has been the principal vent of that volcano . . . has become extinct . . . On Friday the 4th inst., several severe shocks of earthquake were felt at the volcano house (and also at Hilo at the same time) and shortly thereafter a brillian eruption burst out in the S.E. corner of the great pit, and worked its way up into the extinct crater of "old Kilauea [Keanakakoi] ." Subsequently the eruption subsided here but broke out again on Monday the 7th in the bottom of the pit [Kilauea crater floor], right on the path from the volcano house to the South Lake. . . . [This is the only published account of eruption in Keanakakoi Crater. See also Bevens, 1988.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1877

%T The volcano

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 03/03

%K WT, ml.mok.1877, ml.kb.1877.submarine, eq.1877.hc

%X A brief account of the eruption in Kealakekua Bay, first seen by natives at about 8 a.m. on February 24. Light porous lava was constantly rising to the surface in lumps in a state of fusion, and sinking again to the bottom as soon as the gases had escaped. Activity at Mauna Loa summit on February 14 lasted less than one day. A severe shock of earthquake had been felt on the night of the 23d [Feb.], and that quite a crack in the old lava deposit had been traced from Keei point (opposite the submarine flow) several miles inland in the direction of Mauna Loa..





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1881

%T The earthquake

%B Hawaiian Gazette

%P p. 3

%8 10/05

%K WT, eq.1881.maui

%X A smart shock of earthquake roused a number of people out of their beds [on Oahu] a few minutes before five on Friday morning [Sept. 30] last. The exact time is difficult to settle, as the clocks in this city [Honolulu] have a way of keeping the most extraordinary time. Reports vary from seven minutes to 5 to two minutes to 5; the latter was our observation, and agreed with the clock in the Government buildings. There were three shocks in all; one a severe one, lasting about 30 seconds, followed by two short and light ones. Beyond stopping a few clocks, and slightly cracking the walls of one building, no damage was done. The shock in Honolulu was not nearly so severe as the one of Feb. 19, 1871. Considerable anxiety was felt, till news was received from Hawaii; the shock appears to have been very severe there, and we may hear of great damage in Hilo and Kau. We give below the letters which we have received from our various correspondents in all parts of the group. These go to show that the effects of the shock were felt almost simultaneously all over the islands.

Kauai, Kapaa, Oct. 1, 1881--The earthquake was felt all over the Island of Kauai, shortly beofore 5 o'clock on friday morning, the 30th ult. There were three distinct shocks all within the space of a minute or two; the first two shocks were quite severe for this island--and the last was an almost imperceptible tremor.

 . . .

Maui--Maui was visited by an Earthquake on Friday morning--between 4 and 5 o'clock. The first shock lasted perhaps fifteen or twenty seconds and was quite severe. After an interval of a few minutes, another slight shaking was experienced, but not as heavy as the first. It is the general opinion of those who have resided in Wailuku for many years, that there has bbeen nothing like it on this island since '68. Some declare that there was another slight shock on Friday evening, but if so it was so exceedingly slight as to be noticeable only by a few.

  From Lahaina conmes the following:

  The dwellers on the "hill," and doubtless those also in Lahaina were awakened at 5 0'clock, Friday morning, by a fair sized earthquake, which heralded its advent by terrible rumblings. the rumblings resembled those of rapidly driven lorries filled with sheets of corrugated iron, coming from a distance, and passing within a rod of the sleeper. The rumblings preceded the earthquakes some twenty seconds, and in the midst of the loudest din the quake occurred. A second quake immediately apoceeded [sic] the first, attended by like rumblings, almost deafening.

  The rumblings appeared to approach from the south-east and died away to the north-west. No damages occurred to property.

Hawaii, Waimea, Sept. 30, 1881--At eight minutes before 5 this morning, the earth quaked terrifically, and our houses rocked to and fro most fearfully. There were three shocks of earthquake in quick succession. . . . Stone walls were thrown down more or less all over Waimea. Nothing like it since the Kau earthquake of '68. Much more stone-wall was thrown down in Waimea by these than by those earthquakes. What other damages have been done, I have not yet heard.

Hamakua--At about 5 o'clock this morning of the last day of September, a series of of earthquake shocks occurred. the first one was even heavier than than that which happened in 1868 . . . For a while, there was a stampede among the  natives around us. A great many left their beds in a hurry. Our house is a substantial wooden structure, but it cracked and creaked as if the whole fabric would come to pieces.

  There are three houses in the Kohala district so badly shaken as to be untenable. The cisterns at Kohala plantation, have been cracked, and the water has leaked out, probably the same thing will have happened at Ookala.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1881

%T The earthquake on Hawaii

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 3

%8 10/08

%K hc, WT, eq.1881.maui?

%X At Kailua--About 5 o'clock this morning (Friday, Sept. 30th.) we had a severe shock of earthquake. a second shock was felt about three minutes after the first; and a third one about 1/4 past 5 a.m. The shocks did some damage to my crockery on the shelves; threw down some stone wall fences, cracked Kapakui's stone building, the church buildings and several others. It rocked structures pretty roughly. It frightened some people very much . . .

  The shock was severely felt throughout Hawaii. In Kona, and along the coast, through the Waimea and Hamakua districts, we have accounts of stone walls being cracked, and of considerable damage to crockery, and other fragile articles. Several large water cisterns on plantations have been cracked, and their contents discharged.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1881

%T The earthquake

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 10/01

%K WT, eq.1881.maui

%X Yesterday morning the 30th ult., at 4:53 a.m., the early wakers of this town [Honolulu] were startled by a very sensible undulation of the earth from east to west. There was a decided roll and heave of the earth that made some parties feel slightly nauseated. there followed a jar and rattle, as though a great train of cars was moving past, which caused the ground to rumble and the crockery and window-sashes to clatter. This shock lasted about thirty seconds; and in about five minutes afterwards was followed by another very light roll and tremble of the earth.

  This earthquake, though quite marked and unmistakeable, is spoken of by the most of the observers as not being equal in force and effect to the shock felt on Sunday night, 10.6 p.m., 19th, February 1871; or the one of the 8th of April, 1868--in this city. We have not heard of any damge to buildings in the city. There was a little dispute about the exact time of the commencement of the first shock--varying from 5 to 6 minutes in time--our neighbor Dr. Hoffmann contending that it was exactly seven minutes to 5; and on entering our office we discovered our pendulum clock, which had been set correctly the day before, had stopped at exactly seven minutes to 5, thus confirming the doctor's time. We may expect to hear of a lively shake up on Hawaii. Our late news from the chief island stated that there were indications of unusual activity in the crater of Kilauea.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1887

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 3

%S Island Notes

%8 01/31

%K eqs.mlswr.1887

%X     Hilo, Hawaii, January 28th

 Hilo was shaken up lively on Sunday evening, 23rd instant, seven earthquakes occurring at 11:15, 11:30, 11:45, 11:50, two were slight. The most noticeable was the second one, and it shook things down all over town. Most of the people, both native and foreign, were up after the first shock in expectation that more would follow. They were ready for the second one, which seemed as though the houses would be shaken down and everything in them that was loose. Clocks stopped, and some people were afraid to sleep in their own houses, and went to sleep at houses of friends. The shocks were very severe to nervous people. The only licensed liquor saloon lost over $100 in broken liquor bottles. . . . .The other side of this island has suffered some. At Kapapala Ranch the water tanks broke, a building was moved eight inches, stone fences were thrown down. The shakes were much more severe than at Hilo; in fact, they usually are. . . .

%O replace in main bib!



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1887

%T Volcano trip

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 01/31

%K WT, kl.hm.1887, ml.swr.1887, eye

%X [subheads: A week's excursion by the S.S. Kinau; Visit to the crater of Kilauea; Grand display of the great lava flow; Incidents of the excursion, etc.]

An account of an excursion beginning January 24, 1887, on the steamer Kinau. Kilauea was moderately active, the lessened activity attributed to the eruption of Mauna Loa. On January 28, the second  eruptive vent was seen above and to the right of the main vent feeding flows to the ocean.

%O replace in main bib!



%0 Magazine Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1887

%T [On the 1887 eruption of Mauna Loa]

%B The Whaleman's Shipping List

%P p. 1

%8 Mar. 1

%K hc.ml, WT, ml.mok.1887, ml.ner.1887?, ml.swr.1887, eqs.1887.mlswr

%X An eruption began January 16, 1887, at Mauna Loa's summit, was quiet for 2 days, and broke out on the southwest rift zone on January 18. The eruption was accompanied by an earthquake swarm; 383  shocks were felt in 36 hrs. Lava reached the ocean in two days, destroying plantations, houses, etc., but no lives were lost as the natives and foreigners received timely warnings and abandoned their places ahead of the flow.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1887

%T [On the earthquake swarm of 1887]

%B Hawaiian Gazette

%P p. 1

%8 02/01

%K hc.ml, WT, ml.mok.1887, ml.swr.1887, ml.ner.1887?, eye, eqs.1887.mlswr

%X Subheads over letters from correspondents, signed and unsigned:

Mauna Loa!; Hawaii's great volcano; twenty miles of liquid fire in motion!; Madam Pele on the rampage!; continuous earthquake shocks!; description of the flow!; notes and incidents



Pahala, January 23, 1887--A  vivid description of the the earthquake swarm and early stages of eruption at Mauna Loa. She notes eruption a little way down from the summit on Sunday night, January 16  at 9 p.m. The light vanished at 11:30 p.m , as suddenly as it appeared, and we had six terrific earthquake shocks between thatn and morning, not counting the trembling and occasional jerk, which were constant. We felt better by daylight though the trembling kept on and the big shocks seemed as though they meant to take the house down. . . . then came a shock that was worse than what we had experienced already. By night there was still no smoke or fire, and still the awful shocks and we were all wondering and we were all wondering where the force would spend itself. 

  Monday night [Jan. 17] was literally a night of terror, and we felt as though we couldn't live through any more, the heavy shocks were nearly as continuous as the trembling had been for four hours, there was no pause longer than five minutes or often only three between the shocks, and sometimes three succeeded each other like ocean waves.and again on January 18. . . . .

  At 11:30 a.m., Tuesday [Jan. 18], the smoke burst out again immediately after two very heavy shocks, just where it did at first quite a way down on the western slope. . . . Later, smoke came from the '81 opening [See annotation to Anonymous, 18871.]. The trembling was not so constant and the shocks less heavy after this, then the flow broke out very near the old '68 outbreak . . . . 

  . . . .

  We have only two or three heavy shocks a day now though frequent tremblings, and last evening [Jan. 21] a very long shock that swayed the house back and forth making us sick and dizzy.

  . . . .

%O Letter no. 04



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1887

%T [On the earthquake swarm of 1887]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 3

%8 01/31

%K hc.ml, WT, ml.swr.1887, eqs.1887.mlswr

%X A report from Hilo of earthquakes on January 23 and of a view of the Mauna Loa eruption.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1887

%T [On the earthquake swarm and eruption of 1887]

%B Hawaiian Gazette

%P p. 8

%8 02/01

%K hc.ml, WT, eqs.1887.mlswr, eye, damage.earthquake.eruption

%X Subheads over letters from correspondents, signed and unsigned:

The latest from Kau!; great damage to property!; continued earthquakes



 . . . The lava is still pouring into the sea and another flow has started down the mountain, bursting forth somewhat higher up than that of January 18th.

  The earthquakes has been continuous in the Kau district, and have done great damage, while severe shocks have been felt in every part of the island.

  On Sunday January 24th, the earthquakes were very severe in Kau, every house at Kahuku was moved some inches from its foundation and the contents smashed. The mail carrier reported at Hilo that eight buildings had been burned in Kahuku during Sunday night in consequence of the lamps having been overthrown by the vibrations. The walls throughout the Kau district have been leveled to the ground. The crockery in every house has ceased to exist, one correspondent reports only seven plates left and his stove in pieces, others tell the same tale. . . . Fortunately no loss of life is reported.

  Kilauea is reported by the Rev. Baker to be in the same state that it has been for some time past.

  Seven shocks of earthquake were felt in Kohala on the 23rd but, beyond giving the people a fright, no damage was done.

  At Laupahoehoe, nine shocks were felt the same night, a little after eleven. Two of these were quite severe. There have been light shocks ever since.

Pahala, Jan. 24th, 1887--We had two very heavy severe shocks of earthquake about 11:00 last night that did us considerable damage. Nearly all the work done in setting out new boilers was damaged, so that it will have to be done over again. The large iron tank at the mill was thrown down and a number of pipes broken about the mill.

  The Moaula and the new reservoir were badly damaged. The Whitney reservoir very little. Nearly all the houses on the slopes are off their underpinning. Last night was one of terror.

Hilo, Jan. 27, 1887--Hilo had a decided shaking up on Sunday night, January 23rd [sic-should be Saturday night]. The first shake was a rouser, at 11:18 o'clock p.m., followed five minutes later by another more terrible than the first. these were followed by numerous minor shakes, and half an hour later by a third heavy shock, but not as heavy as the two previous ones, which seemed determined to tear doors and windows off the houses. Many a frightened person ran out of doors, and some left their houses to spend the night with their neighbors. In fact it was the heaviest jolt at Hilo since 1868. Many articles, such as vases and ornaments and dishes, were thrown down in the various houses and broken. In one store in Hilo over $30 worth of lamps and chimneys were thrown down and destroyed by the earthquakes of Sunday night.

  The chimney of the kitchen at the Onomea Sugar Company Manager's house was thrown down, and slight damage is reported all about Hilo.

  The oscillations were from east to north-northwest.

[the rest of the article talks about weather conditions]

%O Letter no. 07



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1887

%T [On the Mauna Loa eruption and earthquake swarm of 1887]

%B Hawaiian Gazette

%P p. 1

%8 02/01

%K hc.ml, WT, ml.swr.1887, eqs.1887.mlswr

%X Subheads over letters from correspondents, signed and unsigned:

Mauna Loa!; Hawaii's great volcano; twenty miles of liquid fire in motion!; Madam Pele on the rampage!; continuous earthquake shocks!; description of the flow!; notes and incidents



Lava first shot up on Sunday night, January 18th [sic--other accounts give this date as January 16th, consistent with the statement below regarding lava not being seen on the 17th], three or four miles below the summit of Mauna Loa near Pohakuohanalei. Earthquakes were continuous for over 36 hours. Mr Jones counted 383 well-defined shocks and created a standard by which he could judge the force of the shocks. The reason for nothing having been seen during Monday the 17th, was that the lava had found an underground channel through which it surged along until reaching the steep slope about 10 miles west of Mr. Jones Ranch, when it burst once more into view.

[Followed by Jones, 1887]

%O Letter no. 01



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1887

%T [On the earthquake swarm and eruption of 1887]

%B Hawaiian Gazette

%P p. 8

%8 02/01

%K hc.ml, WT, eqs.1887.mlswr, precursor.eruption.seismicity, ml.swr.1887, eye, damage.earthquake.eruption

%X Subheads over letters from correspondents, signed and unsigned:

Mauna Loa!; Hawaii's great volcano; twenty miles of liquid fire in motion!; Madam Pele on the rampage!; continuous earthquake shocks!; description of the flow!; notes and incidents



Hilea, Jan. 23, 1887-- . . . up to 7 o'clock Tuesday night [Jan. 18] we had 508 earthquakes, then we gave up counting. On Tuesday 4 p.m., smoke was seen on the slopes of Mauna Loa, and fire at 7 p.m.. She briefly describes the lava streams in Kahuku and damage done on January 23-24.

%O Letter no. 06



%0 Magazine Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1891

%T Collapse of Kilauea

%B The Friend

%P p. 28

%8 Apr.

%K WT, kl.hm.1891, eye, eqs.1891.klcal

%X Brief mention of the earthquake swarm from March 5 to 8 accompanying collapse of Kilauea and draining of Dana lake.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1895

%T Madam Pele stirring; Showers of much needed rain; taro shipped to Maui

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 3

%8 05/29

%K eq.1895.kao?, kl.hm.1895

%X Kau (Hawaii), May 25.--On Friday night the 17th inst. Madam Pele gave a vicious kick about 9 o'clock. It was felt at the Volcano House and throughout the district. It is reported that fire has appeared in the crater, and at time small stones are thrown over forty feet into the air. (This occurs at the bottom of the lake). There is plenty of smoke and it will not be a surprise if Madam Pele will entertain us once more.

 . . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1895

%T Slight earthquake at Kau

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 07/12

%K eq.1895.kao?

%X Kau (Hawaii), July 7.--On Wednesday, June 26th, about 3 p.m., a slight earthquake shock was felt.

 . . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1895

%T Earthquake at Kau; Plantations cleaning up--anxiety about spread of cholera

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 6

%8 08/31

%K eq.1895.kao?

%X Kau (Hawaii), August 28.-- . . . .

 A shock of earthquake was felt throughout the district about 11:30 Tuesday night.

 . . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1895

%T The earth in a tremble; one of the most violent shocks ever felt on the island; clocks stopped and smashed-damage to residences-reports from outer districts-strong at Waikiki

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 12/09

%K eq.1895.kao?

%X There were two distinct shocks of earthquake at 11:04 last night, each about ten seconds duration. The first was quite light, the second being much stronger and perhaps the most severe ever felt on the island. Down town the shocks were heavy, but not quite as hard at Waikiki and along King street. The clock at Lucas' mill was stopped, and in the Interisland dock office a clock was thrown to the floor and smashed. At Fred Whitney's residence, King street, the contents of the house were strewn in all directions.

. . . .

  Telephone messages from Waialua and other places beyond the pali reported the earthquakes equally as strong as in Honolulu.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1895

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 7

%S Local Brevities

%8 12/10

%K eq.1895.hc

%X Two shocks of earthquake were felt Monday morning at about 3:12 o'clock. The first lasted but a few seconds; the second being quite severe and of some fifteen seconds duration.

%O A letter to the editor



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1895

%T Kilauea active again; Small flow seen in one corner of the pit; Severe shakes on Hawaii; Bottom of the crater falls in and fire disappears

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 12/14

%K eq.1895.kao?

%X Kau (Hawaii), Dec. 11.-- . . . Last Sunday night [Dec. 8] at 11 o'clock, . . . a severe earthquake [occurred], followed by another, and one more shake 3 a.m. (Monday). From reports the earthquakes were felt throughout the island, and more severe within a radius of thirty miles from the volcano [Kilauea]. At the volcano it was very light. . . .fire appeared in the crater Sunday night . . .

    Fire disappears

 Later--Dec. 12--4 a.m.  . . . the bottom of the crater had fallen in again and the fire disappeared.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1895

%T Hilo gets a shaking

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 12/18

%K eq.1895.kao?

%X Hilo (Hawaii), Dec. 15-- . . . .

  A heavy earthquake shock was felt here shortly after eleven o'clock Sunday night--the first for months. It was followed by a lighter shock two hours later. [Other reports have the second shock at four hours later]

  The earthquakes that shook up Honolulu were also felt here [Kohala] at the same hours. The one at 11 o'clock began with a preliminary shock that wakened most of those who were asleep. After an interval of a second or two it was followed by a strong tremor that continued with decreasing force for probably thirty seconds. Some reckon it at a full minute. The undulation proceeded from mauka to the sea. The waves were longer, and the shock less violent than is usual with such a considerable earthquake. At 3 o'clock there was a second prolonged tremor, less violent than the former; but characterized by the same long graceful undulations . . . On the Kona side the shocks are reported as being much more violent. Altogether it was the greatest shake up Kohala has had for years.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1896

%T The volcano eruption

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 4

%8 04/23

%K ml.mok.1896, eqs.1887.mlswr

%X A report that the crater of Mokuaweoweo has broken out again. No details are given and no earthquakes are mentioned, although there is reference made to the earthquake swarm of 1887.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1896

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 7

%S Local Brevities

%8 04/28

%K eq.1896.ha

%X Several residents [Honolulu] felt a slight shock of earthquake Saturday night about town.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1896

%T Condition unchanged; Mokuaweoweo's crater sending out fire

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 6

%8 04/29

%K ml.mok.1896, eqs.1896.mlmok, precursor.eruption.seismicity

%X [subheads: Parties visiting the summit; No returns yet--several shocks of earthquake felt--probability of an overflow--weather in vicinity of outbreak clear and cold]

 Kau (Hawaii), April 27, 1896.--Brief mention of the eruption at Mauna Loa's summit that has been going on for nearly a week.

 Following is an extract of a letter received from Kapapala Ranch by the W.G. Hall yesterday:

 "We had five or six shakes about 1:30 Tuesday morning, April 21st. None of these were very severe, but the reflection was seen down at Pahala about 4 o'clock or earlier, so that the fire must have started soon after the cessation of the earthquakes. . . . .

 . . . .

 "The latest news from Hawaii is to the effect that there have been no earthquakes on the island since Tuesday morning, April 21st, the time of beginning of the outbreak."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1896

%T Earthquake shocks; first one felt 4:48 Sunday morning and lasted three seconds

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 09/14

%K eq.1896.ml?

%X There were two shocks of earthquake early Sunday morning which shook people up considerably and banished sleep from the minds of many. Prof. A.B. Lyons kindly furnished the Advertiser with the following description of the shocks:

  "The first shock was at 4:48 a.m. and lasted perhaps three seconds, appearing to go off in a northeasterly direction.

  "The sound died away gradually, lasting 15 or 20 seconds after the shock. 

 "Then after an interval of 10 seconds there came a second shock about equal in severity to the first but of shorter duration, apparently a reflection of the earthquake wave.

  "It was impossible to tell from what direction the second shock came and it ended quite abruptly." [One quake or two?]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1896

%T This was no "night mare"; Hilo treated to good sized earthquake; Earth was rent asunder

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 09/16

%K eq.1896.ksf?, photo

%X [subheads: Severest shock since 1868--bells rang, bottles and dishes tumble from shelves--valuable statuary ruined in J.A. Scott's house--drug company suffers loss]

 News received from the volcano is to the effect that the severest shock since 1868 was felt there at one minute before 5 a.m. Sunday. As near as can be ascertained the shock came from NE. to SW., light in the beginning and growing stronger during the 10 seconds it lasted.

  Dishes were thrown from the shelves in private houses and bottle from shelves and tables in the business section, the heaviest loss being that of the Hilo Drug Co. on Front street. . . Her hundreds of bottles of patent medicines and valuable drugs were thrown to the floor, and smashed, One small show case was broken by heavy articles falling upon it. Where the large drug jars were not thrown down they were turned half around on the shelves leaving the labels next to the wall.

  At John Scott's house, Wainaku, the loss was considerable; several pieces of valuable statuary and bric-a-brac . . . were thrown from their places and smashed to pieces.

  In L. Turner's general store, and Theo. H. Davies branch, in the building next to the drug store, goods were upset generally, but no serious damage resulted. C.E. Richardson suffered a small loss through broken bottles of liquids. . . . Much type in the Tribune office was "pied." Including the damage to effects in private houses, the entire loss will amount to, perhaps, a thousand in the immediate vicinity of Hilo.

  As an evidence of the shock a crack beginning at the sea and running north for half a mile [can be seen]. In some places, too, the stone wall around the Catholic Mission was thrown to the ground and one tree uprooted.

. . . .

  Col. Peter Lee [manager of the Volcano House] says that from all accounts the shock at the crater was not as severe as the one felt in Hilo. Some of his children sleeping in the adjacent cottage did not feel the disturbance at all. Col. Lee considered the shock a good one, equal in every respect to the Kau quakes, but as he is hardened to such things, he may not be a competent judge.

  Artist Howard Hitchcock, who had just returned from a tour of Puna, where he had been making sketches, was rudely awakened by the shock. He suffered no inconvenience beyond a surprise in running up against the wall in getting out of the wrong side of bed.

 [R.T. Perkins reports from Olaa] "I was awakened the moment the shock began; my lamp was in danger of falling from the dresser, so I got up and placed it on the floor and sat down alongside of it, merely to experience the thing in its fullest force . . .

. . . 

  Eben Low of Kohala says the shock was severe there and caused much consternation among his fat cattle. there was no damage from the shock anywhere in the vicinity of his home.

  Maui was in harmony with Hawaii and Oahu in the sensation. Passengers from there state that it was the most severe shock experienced in many years.

  Telephone messages received in Hilo from all stations in Hawaii were to the effect that the shock was severely felt at every point but there was no disturbance of the sea on any part of the island. . . .

 [A drawing of Hilo Bay and village, made from a photograph, has the following caption: The cross shows where the rent in the earth began and extended in almost a straight line for a half mile across town, widening as it got further away from the sea.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1896

%T Hilo gets a shaking up; most violent shock of earthquake in several years; much damage is the result; Hilo Drug Company heavy losers-general smash-up about town-interruption of the volcano, land slides

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 3

%8 09/17

%K eq.1896.ksf?

%X The most violent shock of earthquake since the 80s prevailed throughout the Island of Hawaii early last Sunday, striking terror  to the hearts of inhabitants and causing much damage to property. It differed from previous quakes in that only one shock was felt--there being a generally lighter and secondary interruption following the first--and being strong from the beginning.

  At precisely one minute to 5 a.m., a slight vibration was felt, which increased a few seconds later to a heavy wave and continuing for fully thirty seconds. People were awakened to see their houses rocking like reeds in the wind, and to hear the smash of crockery, glassware, vases, bric-a-brac, statuary. Clocks were thrown around promiscuously, table overturned, mirrors broken, and sundry other damage done.

[report of damage details in Hilo similar to PCA, Sept. 16]

  Along the Hamakua coast the shock was equally strong as felt here. Cooking ovens in Pepeekeo were cracked, the water dam at Laupahoehoe parted, and in the different gulches tons of rock and earth were loosened, almost blocking the road in several places.

  At the Volcano the quake was not so violent, several guests there failing to be awakened by it. The lava bed leading to the crater opened in places sufficiently large to admit small buildings, and emitted volumes of sulfurous smoke, giving indication of outbreaks at different points.

  In Kau and Kona there was but little notice taken of the shock, it being much milder there than elsewhere.

  News from Honolulu yesterday by the Hall says Oahu was considerably shaken up, but no damage resulted. Two shocks were felt, each about ten seconds duration.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1896

%T Mokuaweoweo's fierce fires

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 3

%8 04/27

%K WT, ml.mok.1896, eq.1896.maui

%X A brief notice from Maui, relating the appearance of fire and smoke at Mauna Loa's summit. "During the 20th [April, 1896] a slight shock of earthquake was experienced at Ulapalakua."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1897

%T Earth tremors; Three shocks on the Island of Kahoolawe

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 8

%8 12/06

%K eq.1898.kahoolawe?

%X Maui, December 4.--During Friday, the 3d, three unusually heavy earthquakes waves were felt on the Island of Kahoolawe. Inasmuch as the Island of Hawaii is hidden in smoke, it is thought that these shocks were caused by extraordinary activity in Kilauea. No earth tremors were felt on Maui.

 . . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1898

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 7

%S Local Brevities

%8 08/20

%K eq.1898.hc

%X A slight earthquake shock was felt in the city [Honolulu] at 6:50 yesterday morning. A noticeable tremor was felt at the weather observatory at Punahou.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1898

%T A Kau tremblor; Strong shock--runaway Japanese, Rev. J. Kauhane

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 3

%8 08/22

%K eq.1898.hc

%X Punaluu, Kau, Aug. 13.--On August 5, at 6:30 a.m., there was a very heavy earthquake shock in this district--the strongest felt here in some time. It shook dishes, etc., up in great shape.

 . . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1898

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 9

%S Local Brevities

%8 12/10

%K eq.1898.hc

%X The S.S. Mauna Loa, arrived yesterday from Hawaii, reports a heavy shock of earthquake in Kau last Sunday.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1899

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 9

%S Local Brevities

%8 01/09

%K eq.1899.hc

%X An earthquake shock was felt at Hilo at 4 o'clock last Wednesday morning.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1899

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 11

%S Local Brevities

%8 08/28

%K eq.1899.hc

%X Rather heavy earthquake shocks were experienced in Olaa and Hilo on Thursday night.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1899

%T Sharp earthquake shock

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 11

%8 11/20

%K eq.1899.hc

%X Last Saturday evening at 8:20 the most severe earthquake shock was felt in Hilo since the eruption on Mauna Loa. Though no damage was done the residents were reminded that they still lived on the verge of immediate destruction and said, "There's a shock."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1899

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 13

%S The news boiled down

%8 12/11

%K eq.1899.hc

%X An earthquake shock in the vicinity of the Volcano overturned a stone wall and started the smoke booming in Kilauea.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1899

%T Lava flows stop

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 3

%8 07/29

%K hc.ml, WT, ml.ner.1899, eqs.1899.mlner

%X Subheads:

Pele has allowed her fires to go out; Hawaii shaken by earthquakes which have done no damage--Kilauea still quiescent



The eruption ended at Mauna Loa on July 23, 1899. "During the day the whole island of Hawaii was shaken with earthquakes of various degrees. None were very heavy and no damage was done. . . .

  Writing from Punaluu, the Acverrtiser's special correspondent says:  

  On Monday [July 25] about lunchtime Hawaii had a heavy earthquake. It was most severe at Hilo and vicinity and very light here."

%O Also published in Hawaiian Gazette, Aug. 1, p. 2



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1900

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. ?

%S Meteorological record for month of December

%8 01/17

%K eq.1899.hc

%X There was a slight earthquake at Waimea, Hawaii on Dec. 5.

%O !did not find on Dec. 7; meteorological record on Jan. 18 reports no earthquakes in December 1899.



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1900

%T [no title]

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 5

%S Local items

%8 03/03

%K eq.1900.hc

%X A slight earthquake on Monday morning [Feb. 27] about two o'clock, was noted by those whom troubled conscience or indigestion caused to sleep ill.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1900

%T [no title]

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 5

%S Local items

%8 06/02

%K eq.1900.hc

%X A light shock of earthquake was experienced in Hilo on Tuesday morning [May. 29].





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1900

%T [no title]

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 5

%S Local items

%8 07/14

%K eq.1900.hc

%X A rather heavy shock of earthquake at about nine o'clock on Tuesday evening aroused a transient interest in the doings of Pele which have of late been conspicuously absent.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1900

%T [no title]

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 5

%S Local items

%8 10/13

%K eq.1900.hc

%X A rather heavy shock of earthquake was felt by many residents of Hilo on last Wednesday evening between eleven and twelve o'clock. The pitching and rocking of the earth brought some alarm to those who roost above the ground floor.

%O Reprinted verbatim in Pacific Commercial Advertiser of Oct. 15



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1900

%T Did Pele turn over; Hawaii felt the earthquake

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 6

%8 10/15

%K eq.1900.hc

%X A rather heavy shock of earthquake was felt by many residents of Hilo on last Wednesday evening between eleven and twelve o'clock. The pitching and rocking of the earth brought some alarm to those who roost above the ground floor.

%O Reprinted verbatim from Hilo Tribune of Oct. 13



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1901

%T Earthquake reported

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 5

%8 01/18

%K eq.1901.hc

%X Prof. Curtis J. Lyons, the Territorial Meteorologist, reports a slight earthquake as having been reported about 2 o'clock Wednesday morning [on Oahu]. Owing to the lateness of the hour, there were probably very few people awake at the time and this, together with the slight nature of the shock, probably accounts for se few people having commented about it. The seismograph at Oahu College was not in position, therefore there is no scientific record of the earthquake.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1901

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 11

%S Local Brevities

%8 01/23

%K eq.1901.hc

%X The report of a slight earthquake shock at a quarter past two o'clock last Wednesday morning, has been corroborated by a report of a shock felt at Waimea at the same hour.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1901

%T News from the Big Island

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 11

%8 03/25

%K eq.1901.hc

%X Hilo, March 22--A slight shock of earthquake was felt [in Hilo] at 7:15 yesterday [Mar. 21] morning.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1901

%T Lahaina notes

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 8

%8 04/09

%K eq.1901.maui?

%X Lahaina [Maui], April 4--Was it a diminutive earthquake? About 10 o'clock Tuesday night [Apr. 2] several persons thought they perceived a slight tremor in their houses, accompanied with singular noises. The strange phenomenon lasted for only a few moments.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1901

%T Earthquake at Kau

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 7

%8 06/12

%K eq.1901.hc

%X Waiohinu, Kau, June 8--A sharp earthquake occurred [in Kau] at 3:50 p.m. June [date obscured; probably June 6, although the Lyman time for this date is 6 p.m.].





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1901

%T A submarine volcano here

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 07/03

%K hc.ml, ml.kb.submarine?.1901

%X What is, to all appearances, a submarine volcano, has appeared at Kealakekua Bay, Hawaii. Professor Lyons, the Government meteorologist, has just received some specimens of black pumice stone from Mr. Leslie of Napoopoo, which his informant says is floating all over the Bay of Kealakekua. The pumice is of a shiny, jet black and covers the surface of the water for miles in every direction. The theory is that there has been a submarine outbreak in the vicinity, and that pumice has been ejected by seismic action.

  [reference to 1877 eruption]

  The pumice stone will be placed in the windows of Wall, Nicholls Co. where it may be seen.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1901

%T Seismograph at work

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 5

%8 07/19

%K oahu.seismograph

%X The seismograph recently set up at Punahou under the particular care of President Smith of Oahu College, for the purpose of registering subterranean disturbances, is, it is said, behaving badly. The machine is arranged so that violent agitation of the air will cause a needle to register correspondingly jagged lines on a film, and while the apparatus has shown itself faithful to its purpose several times, yet it repeatedly goes beyond its duty, and is now registering, with great precision, the violence of certain jars and shocks that are due not to earthquakes but to the heavy blasting in Manoa valley.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1901

%T Earthquake Friday night; two distinct waves felt throughout the island of Hawaii

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 5

%8 11/22

%K hc.ml, eq.ml?.1901

%X A vigorous earthquake was felt on this island Friday night [Nov. 15] at 10 o'clock. The shock came in two distinct waves, probably ten seconds apart. The second was the more violent of the two and made the windows rattle in many Hilo homes. At the Volcano Hotel the quaking was felt and the opinion of the manager was that the seismic wave started from the nether regions of Mauna Loa.

%O Reprinted verbatim in Pacific Commercial Advertiser of Nov. 25



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1901

%T Heavy earthquake at Hilo

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 11

%8 11/25

%K eq.1901.hc

%X Hilo, Nov. 22.--A vigorous earthquake was felt on this island Friday night [Nov. 15] at 10 o'clock. The shock came in two distinct waves, probably ten seconds apart. The second was the more violent of the two and made the windows rattle in many Hilo homes. At the Volcano Hotel the quaking was felt and the opinion of the manager was that the seismic wave started from the nether regions of Mauna Loa.

%O Reprinted verbatim from Hilo Tribune of Nov. 22



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1902

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 7

%S Local Brevities

%8 06/02

%K eq.1902.hc

%X The Kinau brought news yesterday of slight earthquake shocks in the Hamakua district. Kilauea is still smoking, but not in an unusual manner.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1902

%T [no title]

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 5

%S Local items

%8 08/15

%K eq.1902.hc

%X A slight earthquake was felt in Hilo last Friday afternoon [Aug. 8] at 2:25 p.m.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1902

%T News notes

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. ?

%8 08/18

%K eq.1902.hc

%X A slight earthquake was felt in Hilo last Friday afternoon [Aug. 8] at 2:25 p.m.

%O Reprinted in Hilo Tribune of Aug. 15.



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1902

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 9

%8 09/08

%K kl.hm.1902, cross-section.map.dimensions.crater

%X A map and cross-section of Halemaumau crater on August 29, 1902 drawn by E.D. Baldwin. Data for the surrounding area of Kilauea crater are attributed to F.G. Dodge Plans, in Records 1891-1898, p. 40 and 111. The crater as drawn is about 1500 feet across and 600 feet deep.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1902

%T Hot rocks at Puna

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 5

%8 10/17

%K hc.klerz.fume

%X Hilo railroad workmen engaged in obtaining road bed material from the great volcanic cinder pile at Puna were astonished and frightened last Monday morning to see puffs of steam and dust issue about them from the volcanic material upon which they were working. The first puff startled the workmen. The second sent them down the hill. When it was seen that the premonitory symptoms of a Martinique upheaval were not followed up, they resumed their labors but not without fears and misgivings.

  Reports are to the effect that steam is visible every morning. It seems to issue from a volcanic crack along which the rocks are too hot to bear the hand. Answers to a few inquiries indicate that the phenomenon is one altogether new in Puna.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1902

%T [no title]

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 5

%S Local items

%8 10/17

%K eq.1902.hc

%X The people of Hilo were awakened about 4 o'clock Thursday [Oct. 16] by a slight earthquake shock.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1902

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%S Miscellaneous

%8 10/20

%K eq.1902.hc

%X Quite a heavy shock of earthquake was felt in the Makawao region [Maui] early Wednesday morning, the 15th.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1902

%T Halemaumau's lava pit is rapidly filling up with lava while geysers of fire dot the great lake

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 11/17

%K kl.hm.1902, cross-section.dimension.crater

%X A description of the return of lava to Halemaumau beginning Tuesday, Nov. 11. A cross-section shows an asymmetrical conical crater 1500 feet in diameter and about 1000 feet deep.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1902

%T Another earthquake

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. ?

%8 11/17

%K eq.1902.hc

%X One of the heaviest earthquake shocks in recent years was experienced by the people of Honokaa shortly after 7 o'clock Tuesday night. Disturbances were reported at the same time by people in Waimea. The shock was noticed in Hilo and Olaa.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1903

%T Early morning earthquake

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. ?

%8 01/04

%K eq.1903.hc

%X Prof. Lyons, the Territorial meteorologist, report that at 7:29:30 yesterday morning a slight but distinct earthquake was felt in Punahou and also in Honolulu. A number of early risers also noticed that a tremblor was on.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1903

%T New years day on Maui

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 8

%8 01/05

%K eq.1903.hc

%X Maui, Jan. 3-- . . . .

    The earthquake

This morning (the 3rd) at 7:20 a.m., East Maui experienced two quite heavy shocks. The second vibration, was heavier than the first, making houses creak and windows rattle. There was an interval of a second or two between them.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1903

%T Kilauea plugged; No connection with the Mauna Loa smoke columns

%B The Weekly Hilo Tribune

%P p. 5

%8 08/07

%K eq.1903/08/01.southhawaii

%X A piece of the Puna side wall of Halemaumau crater, 500 feet long and 6-8 feet thick, fell in on August 1st. [Probably triggered by an earthquake at 11:50 a.m. (see Pacific Commercial Advertiser, Sept. 15, 1903).]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1903

%T Has Mauna Loa broken out again?

%B Hawaiian Star

%P p. 1

%8 09/04

%K ml.mok.1903

%X A report [later proved false] of fire on Mauna Loa as seen from a ship approaching Oahu from Kauai.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1903

%T Others see volcano fire

%B Hawaiian Star

%P p. 3

%8 09/07

%K ml.mok.1903

%X Further reports [later proved false] of fire on Mauna Loa as seen from the summit of Haleakala.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1903

%T Mokuaweoweo now belching steam

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 10/08

%K ml.mok.1903

%X [subheads: Largest volume ever witnessed by old residents; Great activity shown; Distance prevents many visitors from going to scene--smoke and steam visible from Volcano House]

  The article chronicles the eruption in Mokuaweoweo that began on the evening of Oct. 6, 1903. No mention is made of earthquakes.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1903

%T Great glow of lava flow grand show

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 10/10

%K ml.mok.1903, precursor.eruption.seismicity

%X [subheads: Miss Paris writes about bright spots of fire seen from Kona; Joseph Emerson's theory sustained--Mr. Bidgood tells of beauty and glory of the scene]

 A communication from Anna M. Paris, Kealakekua, Kona, dated Oct. 7, 1903: . . . "It has all been so quietly done. No earthquakes as yet. If the flow should stop suddenly we may expect them. . . .; communication from St. Claire Bidgood at Volcano House, 12:30 a.m. Oct. 7, 1903: . . .[the eruption] started at 12:45 this p.m. [Oct. 6] without any warning--no earthquakes or reports . . . .

%O Repeated in Hawaiian Gazette of Oct. 18, 1903



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1903

%T Great activity at Mokuaweoweo

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 10/15

%K ml.mok.1903, eq.1903/10/08.hil?

%X [subheads: Bright firelight continues visible from Hilo; With parties for crater; Outbreak was seen from vessel at sea--officers say flow was noticed--crowds watch fire]

  Most of the article chronicles the eruption in Mokuaweoweo that began on the evening of Oct. 6, 1903. Apparently the buildup and beginning of eruption were without felt events. The following entry is the only mention of earthquakes associated with the eruption.

  "Two days after the outbreak [Oct. 8] Kau experienced a short but heavy shock of earthquake, not noticed on the windward side of the island."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1903

%T Volcanic tantrums; Mauna Loa crater dark since Tuesday night

%B The Weekly Hilo Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 12/11

%K ml.mok.1903

%X "Tuesday night [Dec. 8] . . . unusual brilliancy at the crest of Mauna Loa. But at about 10 p.m. the fire died away. . . . Wednesday night the peak was dark again. From all appearances the curtain has dropped at Mauna Loa.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T [no title]

%B The Weekly Hilo Tribune

%P p. 5

%8 02/19

%K eq.1904/02/18.easthawaii

%X A vigorous earthquake visited Hilo Thursday [Feb. 18] forenoon between 10 and 11 o'clock.

%O Reprinted in Pacific Commercial Advertiser of Feb. 22 and Hawaiian Star of Feb. 20



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T News in a nutshell

%B Hawaiian Star

%P p. 8

%8 02/20

%K eq.1904/02/18.easthawaii

%X A vigorous earthquake visited Hilo Thursday forenoon [Feb. 18] between 10 and 11 o'clock.

%O Reprinted from Hilo Tribune of Feb. 19



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 6

%8 02/22

%K eq.1904/02/18.easthawaii

%X A vigorous earthquake visited Hilo Thursday [Feb. 18] forenoon between 10 and 11 o'clock.

%O Reprinted from Hilo Tribune of Feb. 19



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T Hiloites get busy

%B Hawaiian Gazette

%P p. 2, 6

%8 04/05

%K eq.1904/03/29.ko

%X     Earthquake in Kohala

 A severe earthquake was felt in Kohala on the afternoon of the 29th inst. It lasted ten minutes and according to the report received from Manager Tulloch of the telephone company seemed to move in a northwesterly direction from the Kohala club to Mahukona. As yet no fatalities have been listed but we are sure there will be quite a list before the finish--Herald

%O Repeated from Hawaii Herald of ?



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T Earthquake

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 5

%8 04/07

%K eq.1904/04/04.molokai?

%X Quite a severe shock was felt here Monday morning [Apr. 4] at 7:30. No damage done.

%O Reprinted in Pacific Commercial Advertiser of April 11, 1904



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T Hilo earthquake

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 6

%8 04/11

%K eq.1904/04/04.molokai?

%X Quite a severe shock was felt here Monday morning at 7:30. No damage done. The wise phrenologist is circulating the report that it had some connection with Madam Pele's head and this fact seems to be supported by word from the Volcano that there was an outbreak Monday night.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T A whale story by Simerson

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 7

%8 05/07

%K eq.1904/04/29.kao??

%X On Friday, April 29 at 10:30 o'clock [am assumed] a most severe earthquake shock was felt at Keauhou and Punaluu. The shock lasted about eight seconds and was apparently from north to south.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T Earthquake was heavy on the other islands

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 06/05

%K eq.1904/06/04.molokai?

%X Lahaina, June 4--A heavy earthquake lasting thirty seconds shook all Maui at 12:30 p.m. today. Light furniture and bric-a-brac were damaged everywhere.

    Severe on Molokai

Kamalo, Molokai, June 4--A severe earthquake shook Molokai at 12:30  today. Enormous rocks were detached from the mountain above here and rolled down the valley with a fearful noise. No serious damage was done.

    Hawaii heard from

 Manager Cross asked the operators of the Inter-Island Telegraph Co. on Hawaii to send particulars of the earthquake there. In reply it was stated that light shocks had occurred at Hilo and Honokaa. As they stopped at that, the inference was that the shock was less severe on the Big island than the others. Either that, or it takes a very great temblor to jar the island that monopolizes all the volcanoes.

    Temblor shook up Honolulu

An earthquake lasting 20-27 seconds took place yesterday in Honolulu at 12:29:24 and lasted until 12:29:55. The shock, or series of shocks, were distinctly felt in all parts of the city.

  In the business section the shocks were quite appreciable. The quake came with a sudden jolt which caused buildings to tremble. The shock was accompanied by rumbling. A few seconds and the shock was repeated, gradually wearing off into nothingness, to be repeated with less severity at intervals until it finally died out.

  In the grill room of the Young Hotel, the first shock came with what seemed to be a swaying of the building and a heavy rumbling. Diners stopped eating, the Chinese waiters came to dead halts and all talk was hushed. The contents of water coroffes [sic] heaved in miniature billows. When the occupants of the room finally divined the cause, watches were shipped out from pockets and the time taken. It seemed an interminable wait until the last shock had died away.

  At the same time looking from the windows of the grill room, just a perceptible swaying of the black smokestack of the Rapid Transit power house was apparent.

  In Waikiki, Kaimuki, Manoa and Nuuanu valleys the earthquake was quite apparent.

  In Manoa dishes were shaken from shelves and fell to the floor with a crash.

  Territorial Meteorologist Lydecker reports on the earthquake as follows: "My time for the earthquake was 12:27:25 p.m. and it lasted 23 seconds. There were two shocks, very close together, so close it seemed almost one. There was a slight lull between the two, the second one being heavier than the first. The first had a direction from south to north, and the second had a rotary motion, which caused sickness in the stomach for many. It shook the windows of houses in Punahou."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T [no title]

%B The Weekly Hilo Tribune

%P p. 5

%8 06/10

%K eq.1904/06/04.molokai?

%X The slight earthquake shock experienced by Hiloites last Saturday noon was more vigorously felt on Molokai and Maui, where dishes and bric-a-brac suffered from the earth tremor.

%O Also cited in the Pacific Commercial Advertiser of June 5 and 13 and July 14



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T [no title]

%B Maui News

%P p. 3

%8 06/11

%K eq.1904/06/04.molokai?

%X A sharp jar of earthquake was felt in Wailuku last Saturday [June 4], but no damage was done. The jar was general throughout the island and did some minor damage.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T The earthquake

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 6

%8 06/13

%K eq.1904/06/04.molokai?

%X The earthquake of last Saturday was the severest one experienced on Maui in several years. There were two or three shocks, the last being much the heaviest. In Paia and other parts of Makawao district china rattled, pictures swung to and fro, and walls of houses creaked and cracked ominously. At Kahului store much crockeryware was broken and bottles of salad oil smashed, the liquid running over shelves and floor. The vibration was the chief subject of conversation during the afternoon of the 4th.

%O Also cited in the Pacific Commercial Advertiser of June 5 and July 14 and the Hilo Tribune of June 10.



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T [no title]

%B The Weekly Hilo Tribune

%P p. 5

%8 07/01

%K eq.1904/06/28.easthawaii

%X A pretty vigorous earthquake shock was felt [in Hilo] Tuesday night [June 28] at 10 o'clock.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T News in a nutshell

%B Hawaiian Star

%P p. 8

%8 07/02

%K eq.1904/06/28.easthawaii

%X Hilo had a vigorous earthquake last Tuesday night [Jun. 28].





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T [no title]

%B The Weekly Hilo Tribune

%P p. 6

%8 07/15

%K eq.1904/07/11.easthawaii, eq.1904/07/12.easthawaii

%X There was an earthquake shock on Monday morning [July 11] about 11:00 o'clock, which was felt throughout the city [Hilo] but with more severity in Puueo. Tuesday morning [July 12] about 10 o'clock there was another shock [felt in Hilo].





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T Heavy quakes felt in Kau

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 7

%8 07/20

%K eqs.1904/07/17.kao??

%X The steamer Mauna Loa which got in early yesterday morning brings reports of heavy earthquake shocks in the Kau district. The shocks were very frequent and some were of considerable duration. No damage was reported. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T Signs of activity

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 07/21

%K eq.1904/07/17.kao??

%X Volcano House, July 19--The heavy earthquake shock last Sunday [Jul. 17, 1904] caused a disturbance in the crater here that has kept up ever since. The walls began caving in immediately after the quake and lava has been falling since Sunday. The cones and cracks from which the sulphur fumes have escaped since last January are entirely covered by debris and the floor of the crater is entirely free from smoke. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T Violent earthquake; shock felt throughout district. Volcano changes shape

%B The Weekly Hilo Tribune

%P p. 2

%8 07/22

%K eq.1904/07/17.kao??

%X Last Sunday at 2:00 P.M. quite a seismic visitation came to Hilo and vicinity, waking the good inhabitants from their afternoon siestas, and tumbling pictures and bric-a-brac about in a heedless manner. The quaking was slow and steady, vibrating about 33 seconds, with a period in the middle of about 5 seconds of real genuine jolting. Houses and trees could be seen swaying to and fro, and considerable damage was done to crockery, glass, etc. The shake was felt at the Volcano House, which was rather unusual as most earthquakes that strike Hilo are merely felt at the Volcano. Evidently the shock caused several cracks in the wall of the crater for during the night there were cave-ins on the east and south sides of the pit. Walls heretofore of an angle of 50Á or 60Á are now perpendicular. The lava flow and cones are covered with about 50 or 60 feet of debris. The hot cracks are much hotter, and the crater itself is perfectly clear, no steam or sulphur fumes escaping at all. If this lack of smoke continues there is apt to be an explosion and outbreak shortly, according to kamaainas who profess to know.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T Kilauea caves in

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 10

%8 07/24

%K eq.1904/07/17.kao??

%X According to reports brought up to Hilo by the steamer Kinau an earthquake shock last Sunday caused the walls of the inner crater of Kilauea to cave in. The shock occurred at 2 p.m., the vibrations lasting for some 33 seconds with about five seconds of hard quake in the middle. The quake was felt at the Volcano house, an unusual thing. As no smoke is proceeding from the choked crater those who profess to know predict an outbreak of the pent up forces soon.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T [no title]

%B Maui News

%P p. 2

%S Locals

%8 10/15

%K eq.1904/10/14.maui?

%X At 15 minutes to 4 o'clock yesterday morning [Oct. 14] Central Maui was shaken by a sharp shock of earthquake, no damage resulting.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T Earthquake shock

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 3

%8 10/15

%K eq.1904/10/14.maui?

%X Honolulu and its suburbs received a rather sharp and prolonged jar at 3:45 yesterday morning. There were two distinct temblors with a short interval between. On the Koolau side of the island the shock, according to reports, was heavier than in town. No damage is reported. Lahaina, Maui, felt a heavy quake at the same hour as Honolulu but without damage.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 3

%8 10/17

%K eq.1904/10/14.maui?

%X At 3:40 a.m. yesterday morning [10/14] East Maui people were awakened from slumber by the violent shaking of their beds, and their apartments and dwellings as well. The earthquake continued for several seconds. There were two shocks, one of longer duration than the other, Aside from the rocking, rattling and shaking there is little to make mention of.

%O date or newspaper wrong-couldn't find in advertiser; column to left "Confidence"; column to right "J. above, picture of file drawers below"



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T [no title]

%B The Weekly Hilo Tribune

%P p. 5

%8 10/18

%K eq.1904/10/12.easthawaii, eq.1904/10/13.easthawaii, eq.1904/10/14.maui?

%X Distinct shocks of earthquake were felt by Hilo residents at 10:30 Wednesday night [Oct. 12], 9 a.m. Thursday [Oct. 13] and Friday morning [Oct. 14] at 3:40. It is reported that the smoke has cleared from Kilauea crater.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1904

%T [no title]

%B The Weekly Hilo Tribune

%P p. 5

%S Condensed local items

%8 11/15

%K eq.1904/11/13.easthawaii

%X A distinct earthquake shock was felt Sunday night [Nov. 13] about 8:40 o'clock.

%O The same event [with times of 8 and 8:15 p.m.] is reported in the Lyman diary (Wyss and others 1992) and the Pacific Commercial Advertiser of Dec. 19



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1905

%T Hawaii visited by earthquake

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 03/27

%K eq.1905/03/24.klcaldeep??

%X Hawaii experienced an earthquake on Friday evening [March 24] at about 8:30 o'clock. Purser Story of the steamer Noeau, in yesterday from Honokaa, reports the phenomenon.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1905

%T [no title]

%B Hawaiian Gazette

%P p. 4

%S Weekly crop bulletin for the week ending March 25, 1905

%8 03/28

%K kl.hm.1905

%X The eruption of Kilauea, Hawaii continues.

[no mention of earthquakes]

Advertiser of Mar. 28, p. 6

%O Repeated from Pacific Commercial 



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1905

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial 

%P p. 6

%S Weekly crop bulletin for the week ending March 25, 1905

%8 03/28

%K kl.hm.1905

%X Advertiser

The eruption of Kilauea, Hawaii continues.

[no mention of earthquakes]

%O Repeated in Hawaiian Gazette of Mar. 28, p. 4



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1905

%T Heavy earthquake

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 5

%8 05/04

%K eq.1905/05/03.ksf?

%X There was a rather heavy temblor in this district at 3:20 p.m. yesterday, the motion coming from all points of the compass at the same time. Dishes rattled on pantry shelves and bottles in the saloons jarred each other . . . The quake was light for the first two seconds and increased in violence until the motion ceased 10 seconds later. This is considered the heaviest shake Hilo has had in nine years. No damage is reported from the country.

  From the Volcano it is learned that the shock was quite distinct there, but . . . no material change was noted in the appearance of the [Halemaumau] lake. . . .

  At 4:10 there was another shock as severe, if not more so, than was the first. The clapper in the foreign church bell was dashed twice against the bell. There was considerable excitement among members of the Japanese colony and on Furneaux street, . . . [where] the women ran out of the houses in fear. At St. Joseph's convent there was an overturning of bottles and dishes, in some instances breaking them. In the saloons [with exposed glassware] no damage was sustained.

  The third and weakest shock occurred at 6:35 p.m. This one did not amount to much and was not noticed in some parts of town.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1905

%T Heavy earthquake on Hawaii

%B Hawaiian Star

%P p. 3

%8 05/06

%K eq.1905/05/03.ksf?

%X Hilo, May 4.--There was a rather heavy temblor in this district at 3:20 p.m. yesterday [May 3], the motion coming from all points of the compass at the same time. Dishes rattled on the pantry shelves and bottles in the saloons jarred each other worse than a Carter veto of the license bill. The quake was light for the first two seconds and increased in violence until the motion ceased ten seconds later. This is considered the heaviest shake Hilo has had in nine years. No damage is reported from the country

 From the Volcano it is learned that the shock was quite distinct there, but as well as could be ascertained at the hour of going to press no material change was observed in the appearance of the lake. No one had returned from the pit, however since the shake occurred.

 At 4:10 there was another shock as severe, if not more so, than the first. The clapper of the Foreign Church bell was dashed twice against the bell, there was considerable excitement among members of the Japanese colony and on Furneaux Street, where many Japanese reside, the women ran out of the houses in fear. At Saint Joseph's Convent there was an overturning of bottles and dishes, in some instances breaking them. In the saloons, where, it is said, there is much glassware exposed, no damage was sustained.

 The third and weakest shock occurred at 6:36 p.m.. This one did not amount to much and was not noticed in some parts of town





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1905

%T Pit filling up

%B Hawaiian Star

%P p. 8

%8 05/08

%K kl.hm.1905

%X Easter cone more active than ever. Cone spouting several hundred feet. Fresh lava covers floor of crater. Now visible from Volcano House all night. If lava continues as at present, will not be long before pit will overflow.

%O Communication from Demosthenes Lycurgus



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1905

%T The earthquakes; most violent shocks felt in recent years

%B The Weekly Hilo Tribune

%P p. 5

%8 05/09

%K eq.1905/05/03.ksf?

%X . . . . The seismic disturbances that commenced Wednesday afternoon of last week [May 3] and lasted through the night and early morn, are the hardest shakes given Hilo since the early eighties. While no crack opened through the town as in 1896, yet the vibrations seemed more violent. The first shock at 3:18 and the second at 4:10 in the afternoon caused considerable damage to furniture, bric-a-brac and china, and while there were shakes and jolts during the night at 6:34, 10:38, 10:55, 11:10, 1:00 [am May 4] and at intervals during the wee hours of the morn, yet there was no great damage done, except to nerves and delicate stomachs. The Hilo Drug Store, which suffered so considerable in 1896, escaped damage on this occasion. The frequency of the shocks and at such short intervals seemed to portend something ominous, and it was this feeling that aroused the inhabitants more than the damage to personal belongings. The shocks were felt at the Volcano house, causing the breaking up of the sulphur banks. No apparent difference has been noted in Madam Pele's continuous performance so there was no apparent connection between the Volcano and the subterranean rush of gas, lava and steam, which sent the molecules of the earth tumbling over each other in the violent seismic waves of last Wednesday. On Friday evening [May 5] Hilo received another visitation on a small scale. There were two shocks at about 5 p.m., another at 6:30, one at 7:15 and another at 8:20. On Sunday evening [May 7] at 7:20 p.m. another shock aroused the memory of man, "Lest he forget! Lest he forget!"

%O Repeated from Hilo Tribune of May 9, 1905



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1905

%T Hilo has the shakes; heavy earthquake jolts

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 05/12

%K eq.1905/05/03.ksf?

%X Hilo. May 10--The seismic disturbances that commenced Wednesday afternoon of last week [May 3] and lasted through the night and early morn, are the hardest shakes given Hilo since the early eighties. While no crack opened through the town as in 1896, yet the vibrations seemed more violent. The first shock at 3:18 and the second at 4:10 in the afternoon caused considerable damage to furniture, bric-a-brac and china, and while there were shakes and jolts during the night at 6:34, 10:38, 10:55, 11:10, 1:00 [am May 4] and at intervals during the wee hours of the morn, yet there was no great damage done, except to nerves and delicate stomachs. The Hilo Drug Store, which suffered so considerable in 1896, escaped damage on this occasion. The frequency of the shocks and at such short intervals seemed to portend something ominous, and it was this feeling that aroused the inhabitants more than the damage to personal belongings. The shocks were felt at the Volcano house, causing the breaking up of the sulphur banks. No apparent difference has been noted in Madam Pele's continuous performance so there was no apparent connection between the Volcano and the subterranean rush of gas, lava and steam, which sent the molecules of the earth tumbling over each other in the violent seismic waves of last Wednesday. On Friday evening [May 5] Hilo received another visitation on a small scale. There were two shocks at about 5 p.m., another at 6:30, one at 7:15 and another at 8:20. On Sunday evening [May 7] at 7:20 p.m. another shock aroused the memory of man, "Lest he forget! Lest he forget!"

%O Repeated from Hilo Tribune of May 9, 1905



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1905

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 12

%S Local Brevities

%8 07/30

%K eq.1905/07/28.oahu?

%X "There were two slight earthquake shocks about dinner time last evening" [probably refers to same event as next report]

 "Parties who came over from the windward side of Oahu last night reported that a distinct shock of earthquake was felt at Waihole on Friday night" [July 28].

%O date or newspaper wrong-couldn't find in advertiser; Sunday Advertiser-Local Brevities section



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1905

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 9

%S Local Brevities

%8 10/25

%K eq.1905/10/19.easthawaii

%X There was a sharp earthquake shock on Hawaii late last week.

%O Not reported in Weekly Crop Bulletin for week ending Oct. 21, 1905 (Pacific Commercial Advertiser, 10/24/05, p. 6)



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1906

%T Kona felt the shock; Stirred up Mahukona

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 04/26

%K hc.1906/04/25.northhawaii

%X Honokaa, April 25, (Special)--A severe shock of earthquake was felt here shortly before 2 o'clock this morning. It was followed by two others which were less severe. The first shock lasted about half a minute. At Kawaihae stone walls were shaken down and the cistern at Kaiser's was wrecked.

  Mahukona, April 25, (Special)--Earthquake shocks were felt here at an early hour this morning. They were followed by a succession of heavy rollers from the sea. No damage was done.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1906

%T Temblors shake Hilo; three mild earthquake shocks woke city up early Wednesday morning

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 2

%8 04/26

%K hc.1906/04/25.northhawaii

%X Three distinct shocks of earthquake were felt in Hilo during the early hours of Wednesday. . . . As it was, the temblors yesterday did no damage. In the absence of an official record it may be stated that the first shock came a minute or so before 2 a.m. It was preceded by a slight rumbling sound and to the casual observer seemed to be a movement from the mountains to the sea. While its movement was distinct it is not known that it did any more harm than merely robbing a few Hilonians of their beauty sleep.

  The second shock was very light. It came a few minutes after the first and was succeeded by another so light that many people did not feel it at all. By telephone it was learned that Kau experienced the temblors at the same time but suffered no damage.

%O Repeated in Hawaiian Star and Hawaii Evening Bulletin of Apr. 28



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1906

%T Earthquake on Hawaii; three distinct shocks felt there last Wednesday at about 2 o'clock in morning

%B Hawaiian Star

%P p. 8

%8 04/28

%K eq.1906/04/25.northhawaii

%X Hilo, April 26--Three distinct shocks of earthquake were felt in Hilo during the early hours of Wednesday. . . . As it was, the temblors yesterday did no damage. In the absence of an official record it may be stated that the first shock came a minute or so before 2 a.m. It was preceded by a slight rumbling sound and to the casual observer seemed to be a movement from the mountains to the sea. While its movement was distinct it is not known that it did any more harm than merely robbing a few Hilonians of their beauty sleep.

  The second shock was very light. It came a few minutes after the first and was succeeded by another so light that many people did not feel it at all. By telephone it was learned that Kau experienced the temblors at the same time but suffered no damage.

Honokaa, April 26--A severe shock of earthquake was felt here shortly before 2 o'clock this morning. It was followed by two others which were less severe. The first shock lasted about half a minute. At Kawaihae stone walls were shaken down and the cistern at Kaiser's was wrecked.

Mahukona, April 26--Earthquake shocks were felt here at an early hour this morning. They were followed by a series of heavy rollers from the sea. No damage was done.

%O Except for Mahukona dateline, repeated from Hawaii Herald of Apr. 26



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1906

%T Hilo felt quakes on Wednesday morning

%B Hawaii Evening Bulletin

%P p. 2

%8 04/28

%K hc.1906/04/25.northhawaii

%X Hilo, April 26.--Three distinct shocks of earthquake were felt in Hilo during the early hours of Wednesday [Apr. 25]. . . . As it was, the temblors yesterday did no damage. In the absence of an official record it may be stated that the first shock came a minute or so before 2 a.m. It was preceded by a slight rumbling sound and to the casual observer seemed to be a movement from the mountains to the sea. While its movement was distinct it is not known that it did any more harm than merely robbing a few Hilonians of their beauty sleep.

  The second shock was very light. It came a few minutes after the first and was succeeded by another so light that many people did not feel it at all. By telephone it was learned that Kau experienced the temblors at the same time but suffered no damage.

%O Repeated from Hawaii Herald of Apr. 26



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1906

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 5

%S Weather bulletin for the week ending April 28, 1906

%8 05/01

%K eq.1905/04/25.northhawaii

%X   Pepeekeo--We experienced quite a heavy earthquake shock at 2:00 a.m., followed by two slight ones at intervals of 10 minutes

  Hakalau--A heavy earthquake shock was felt here at 1:57 a.m. of the 25th, and a lighter one at 10:55 p.m. of the 26th

  Kau--A heavy earthquake shock, with direction north to south, occurred on the 25th at 2 a.m.

%O Repeated in Hawaiian Gazette, p. 8



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1906

%T Slight earthquake

%B The Weekly Hilo Tribune

%P p. 2

%8 05/01

%K eq.1906/04/25.northhawaii

%X A slight earthquake shock aroused some of the sleeping residents of the island at 2 a.m. Wednesday [April 25]. The whole island was affected in about the same degree--as was reported from the Volcano House, Waimea and Mahukona. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1906

%T Island pumice stone met

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 7

%S News of the waterfront

%8 05/26

%K ha.submarine.1906

%X For nearly 200 miles large pieces of floating pumice stone were passed by the bark St. Katherine, which arrived at this port last Friday from the Hawaiian Islands. They were seen on April 20, about 400 miles from the Island of Oahu. Captain Saunders is under the impression that the pumice stone was from a subterranean volcano which was in action at the time of the earthquake here. [possibly the large earthquake of 4/25/1906] It was undoubtedly of recent occurrence, as the pumice stone was massed together. On many of the large pieces deep se crabs were seen clinging. Captain Saunders brought several samples of the pumice stone and will present them to the Academy of Sciences.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1906

%T Pumice stone is found

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%S News of the waterfront

%8 05/30

%K ha.submarine.1906

%X Captains Schlemmer and Welsbarth bring news from the shores of the French Frigate Shoals, Laysan Island and other islands to the westward are covered with pumice stone. . . . The captains are of the opinion that this pumice stone came from near Formosa and was thrown upon the sea from some volcanic disturbance there. It is not thought that the pumice has anything to do with the San Francisco earthquake. The pumice at French Frigate Shoals is about the size of walnuts. At Laysan it was much larger. That at Laysan had been cast up on the beach on March 23, a month previous to the San Francisco quake. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1906

%T A quake at Hilo; a sharp temblor there night before last

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 08/21

%K eq.1906/08/19.southhawaii

%X  There was a sharp earthquake here [Hilo] at 9 o'clock last evening.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1906

%T Hilo has a light quake

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 09/01

%K eq.1906/08/31.mlner??

%X  There was a light earthquake here [Hilo] at 6:30 a.m.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1906

%T Earthquake at Hilo followed by appearance of scalded fish

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 09/04

%K eq.1906/08/31.mlner??, ml.ner.submarine?.1906

%X An earthquake occurred here at 6:40 a.m. Shortly afterwards hundreds of dead fish were strung along the beach. The fish were apparently scalded by a submarine eruption off Keaukaha.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1906

%T A fish phenomenon

%B The Weekly Hilo Tribune

%P p. 5

%8 09/04

%K ml.ner.submarine?.1906

%X An unusual occurrence is reported by Fish and Food Inspector J.M. Hering. Since last Tuesday large numbers of dead fish have drifted ashore along the coast on both sides of Hilo Bay. . . .

  . . . the water was unusually warm, and this, in connection with the appearance of the fish, leads Mr. Hering to believe that the killing of them may have been due to submarine volcanic action, connected with the slight earthquake shock felt the Sunday evening previous [Aug. 31] at Hilo. Such a killing of fish occurred only once before, in the [18]70's, during an eruption of Mauna Loa.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1906

%T Scalded fish drift up at Hilo; fish drift ashore dead at Hilo for the first time since the seventies

%B Hawaiian Star

%P p. 1

%8 09/05

%K eq.1906/08/31.mlner??

%X After describing the fish kill, the article concludes as follows: . . ."leads Mr. Hering to believe that the killing of them may have been due to submarine volcanic action, connected with the slight earthquake shock felt the Sunday evening previous at Hilo. such a killing of fish occurred only once before in the '70s during an eruption of Mauna Loa."--Hilo Tribune





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1906

%T A severe earthquake; Hilo got another shock early yesterday morning

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 09/05

%K eq.1906/09/04.easthawaii

%X  A severe earthquake was felt here [Hilo] at 3:15 this morning. It was not felt at the Volcano House and was felt lightly at Mountain View.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1906

%T Deep water fish came up scalded

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 7

%8 09/06

%K ml.ner.submarine?.1906

%X An account, taken from the Hilo Tribune, of the fish kill thought to be connected with the earthquake felt in Hilo on Aug. 31, possibly indicating submarine eruption.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1906

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 6

%S Local Brevities

%8 09/10

%K eq.1906/09/04.easthawaii

%X A sharp earthquake shock awakened most Hilonians at 3:15 a.m. Tuesday. Beyond disturbing slumbers, the temblor did no damage.

%O Quoted from the Hawaii Herald of 9/4/1906



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Volcano measured; report that crater moved was incorrect

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 2

%8 01/10

%K kl.hm.1907, hm.dimension, geodesy.triangulation

%X A survey of Halemaumau by E.D. Baldwin showed the depth to be 597-602 feet and width of 1300 feet. The locus of activity was found to be in exactly the same place as it was in 1893.

%O Repeated in Hilo Tribune, Oct. 15, 1903



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Volcanic action appears to be confined to Kau; Authentic statement regarding outbreak

%B Honolulu Evening Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 01/11

%K eqs.1907/01/10.mlswr?, ml.swr.1907, ml.mok.1907

%X Hilo, Hawaii, Jan. 11--The crater on Mauna Loa broke out in eruption about midnight on Wednesday night; the illumination therefrom continued very brilliant until 4 o'clock in the morning, at which time it disappeared entirely.

 Fisherman who were in their boats off the Kona coast at the time reported that they saw a lava flow beginning at about the same place where the flow which occurred in 1887 commenced. However, it continued only a short distance until morning.

 The mountain has been clear aside from what appears to be a cloud of smoke. On the Kona side there is no indication of fire.

 "At Kapapala there were numerous earthquakes yesterday, but none of them were very severe. One shock took place at 1:30 o'clock and another at 9:30 o'clock yesterday evening, which was felt all over the island.

 This morning it was reported from Waiohinu, in the Kau district, that there had been five shocks felt there between the hours of 10 and 11 o'clock.

 At Pahala the shaking of the earth is almost continuous.

 There is still a little fire in the crater of Kilauea, but it appears to be in no way affected by the outbreak on Mauna Loa.

 The continuous earthquakes on the Kau side of the island are an indication of further activity.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Much interest is manifested in the Mauna Loa outbreak

%B Hawaiian Star

%P p. 1

%8 01/11

%K ml.mok.1907, eqs.1907/01/10.mlswr?

%X Mokuaweoweo burst out last night, about eleven-thirty . . . .  . . . Over thirty slight earthquakes have occurred here (Hilo) since midnight. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Mokuaweoweo resumes her activity; fountains of fire play in the summit crater of Mauna Loa--Heavens lighted by subterranean glow

%B Hawaiian Gazette

%P p. 1, 8

%8 01/11

%K ml.mok.1907, ml.mok.1899.1903, eqs.1907/01/10.mlswr?, precursor.eruption.seismicity

%X Accounts of the eruption in Mokuaweoweo. Start times are given variously as 11:30 p.m. and midnight. One correspondent says that "Over 30 slight earthquakes have occurred here (Hilo) since midnight." The article continues, stating that "There were no earthquake shocks just prior to the outbreaks of 1899 and 1903."

%O Repeated in Pacific commercial advertiser of Jan. 11, 1904



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Fountains of fire play in the summit crater of Mauna Loa--heavens lighted by subterranean glow

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1, 2

%8 01/11

%K eqs.1907/01/10.mlswr?, ml.mok.1907, ml.swr.1907

%X [Two different sources report that Mokuaweoweo came into eruption at 11:30 or around midnight on Jan. 9]

  . . . [A Hilo correspondent reports that] over thirty slight earthquakes have occurred here (Hilo) since midnight [Jan. 9-10].

  There were no earthquake shocks just prior to the outbreaks of 1899 and 1903. [The remainder of the article recalls those two eruptions].





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Fire continues in both craters; slight earthquakes in Hilo district yesterday morning, glow seen in Kohala

%B Hawaiian Star

%P p. 10

%8 01/12

%K ml.mok.1907, eqs.1907/01/11.mlswr?

%X  . . . Purser Beckley [of the S.S. Kinau] reports a few slight earthquakes of the earth in the Hilo district yesterday morning.

 . . . No earthquakes were felt in that [Kohala] district . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T How the outbreak looked at Hilo

%B Hawaiian Star

%P p. 1

%8 01/12

%K ml.mok.1907, eqs.1907/01/10.mlswr?

%X Nearly all Hilo was awakened on Wednesday night by the outbreak at the summit of Mauna Loa. It was first seen at about midnight. . . .

 . . . There have been many earthquake shocks on the other side, especially at Kapapala and one was felt in Hilo at 1:30 p.m. on Thursday [Jan. 10]. Another slight one was felt at 9 in the evening.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Lava still flows from Volcano in Kau district

%B Honolulu Evening Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 01/12

%K eqs.1907/01/10.mlswr?, ml.swr.1907

%X A report from a passenger on the Kinau covers continuing eruption from Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone, concludes with the statement:

 "There were a number of earthquakes in Kau, but very few in Kona."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Three forked stream of lava is flowing to the sea

%B Honolulu Evening Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 01/14

%K ml.swr.1907, lava flow.rate

%X The article described continuing eruption from Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone, including information that the flow was advancing at the rate of about seven miles per hour.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Mauna Loa is in activity

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 01/15

%K eqs.1907/01/10.mlswr?, ml.swr.1907, ml.mok.1907

%X [Subheads: Wonderful fiery spectacle witnessed from Hilo last Thursday morning; Flow crosses over Kahuku to the ocean; The government road covered and telephone system destroyed--second outbreak from the summit headed for the Kona side of the Island]

A report on the Mauna Loa eruption of 1907. There is a brief mention of seismic activity, as follows:

  Though not a solitary shock of earthquake was felt during the display in Hilo, it was learned that shocks were continuous at Montserrat's [Kapapala] Ranch, some thirty or forty being counted. During the day [Jan. 10], however, two temblors were felt in Hilo and a number of slight ones on the Puueo side of the Wailuku river. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Kona reports new outbreak

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1, 7

%8 01/15

%K eqs.1907/01/10-15.mlswr?, ml.mok.1907

%X Most of the article chronicles the flow from Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone.

  "The flow, which was accompanied by frequent severe earthquakes, started at 7:30 a.m. on January 16 and the eruption ceased on January 31."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Mauna Loa sends lava to the ocean

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 01/17

%K eqs.1907/01/10.mlswr?, ml.swr.1907

%X A report on the Mauna Loa eruption of 1907. A brief mention of seismic activity is made, as follows:

  The outbreak was utterly without warning, as far as is known. It was accompanied by a large number of earthquakes, on the other side of the island [from Hilo], and two or three in Hilo, though few people felt the Hilo ones. Those on the other side were severe and continuous enough to cause residents to pack their glassware and discuss moving, but no damage was done by the shakes.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1, 3

%8 01/18

%K eqs.1907/01/08-09.mlswr?, ml.swr.1907, ml.mok.1907

%X Over 50 shocks have been felt at Pahala on Jan. 8 and 9, one quite heavy on the afternoon of Jan. 8, with swaying bushes and trees. [The Lyman diary (Wyss and others, 1992), does not mention either the heavy earthquake on Jan. 9 or the swarm of thirty earthquakes on the morning of Jan. 9, said to be felt in Hilo (see Pacific Commercial Advertiser, Jan. 11, 1907.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T New cones forming close to the coast in Manuka district; New outbreaks reported at Kahuku--fresh flow crosses government road--two hundred earthquake shocks

%B Hawaiian Gazette

%P p. 1, 8

%8 01/18

%K kl.hm.1907, eqs.1907/01/10-15.mlswr?, ml.swr.1907

%X An account of the ongoing eruption from Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone.

    Repeated earthquake shocks (p. 8)

 Slight earthquake shocks continue to be felt throughout the island of Hawaii. Postmaster T.C. Wills, of Pahala . . . reports that two hundred distinct shocks have been felt [at Pahala] since the outbreak of Mauna Loa.

 Another resident of Pahala writes:

 . . . .

 "Thursday and Friday [Jan. 10-11] we felt at least fifty shocks or more of earthquake, the greater number being slight . . .

 "Thursday afternoon we had quite a heavy shock, plainly observing the trees and bushes swaying back and forth."

 The next section notes that Kilauea is exceptionally active.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Spectacle of lava from the sea; Captain Simerson of S.S. Mauna Loa tells of what he saw yesterday

%B Hawaiian Star

%P p. 1, 5

%8 01/18

%K ml.swr.1907, eqs.1907/01/10-15.mlswr?

%X Much of the article is about the Mauna Loa southwest rift eruption, ending with the following two paragraphs:

 Earthquakes of a slight nature, generally, are being felt all over the island: In Pahala two hundred shocks have been felt since the outbreak. Various places report all the way from eight to sixty ordinary shocks since the outbreak of the lava. We did not feel any of the earthquakes aboard ship. They were not severe enough.

 Purser Charles Jones of the S.S. Mauna Loa reports that at Punaluu last Tuesday [Jan. 15], 53 distinct earthquake shocks were felt. At Kailua the telephone operator at central informed the purser that sulphur fumes were very noticeable.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Weekly Weather Bulletin for the week ending Jan. 19, 1907

%B Hawaiian Star

%P p. 7

%8 01/22

%K ml.swr.1907, eqs.1907/01/10-11.mlswr?, eq.1907/01/16.mlswr?

%X Earthquake shocks were felt during the week at a number of stations in the western and southern portions of Hawaii. The observer at Kau (Waiohinu) reports that there were many earthquake shocks felt on the 10th and 11th, and a light one on the 16th. Also, that an eruption occurred on the south side of Mauna Loa on the 11th, and that three streams of lava, all from one source, were flowing toward the sea in south, southwest and west directions. Very little of the glow from the eruption was seen at Kealakekua (Davis), Hawaii.

%O Abridged from the Pacific Commercial Advertiser of the same date



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 9

%S Local Brevities

%8 04/04

%K eq.1907/04/02.oahu?

%X Various credible citizens [Honolulu] say they felt an earthquake moving west to east and lasting three to seven seconds at 12:43 o'clock Tuesday morning [Apr. 2].

%O Not listed in Honolulu Bulletin (Hazard, 1911); No Crop Bulletin published for this week



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 9

%S Local Brevities

%8 04/26

%K eq.1907/04/25.kauai

%X A slight shock of earthquake is reported to have been felt at Lihue, Kauai, between 12 and 1 o'clock Thursday morning [Apr. 25].

%O Not listed in Honolulu Bulletin (Hazard, 1911)



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Quakes on Hawaii; two shocks felt on Tuesday morning--lasted for 40 seconds or longer

%B Hawaiian Star

%P p. 1

%8 06/14

%K eq.1907/06/11.hil?

%X Two severe earthquake shocks were felt on the Island of Hawaii on Tuesday last [Jun. 11], early in the morning.

 Purser of the S.S. Mauna Loa, which arrived early today from Hawaii and Maui ports, states that he was standing ashore at Honuapo, with many others, when a violent tremor was felt, the shake continuing steadily for about 40 seconds.

 Those aboard the Mauna Loa . . . did not feel the shake . . . Everybody on the wharf felt the shock and several declared that it was the heaviest they had felt on Hawaii.

 At 4 o'clock, 26 minutes later, another and almost as heavy shake was experienced, lasting longer.

 It was learned later that the shocks had been felt in Hilo, Kona and Waiohinu.

 . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Big Island shaken last Tuesday by earthquake shock; Recent lava flows emitting steam

%B Honolulu Evening Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 06/14

%K eq.1907/06/11.hil?

%X Two heavy earthquake shocks occurred on the Kau coast last Tuesday morning . . . .

 The first shock was experienced at 3:43 a.m., and the last about fifteen minutes later. Purser of the Mauna Loa . . says they were tremendous. the trend of the temblor seemed seaward and the whole vessel shook and rolled as if in a heavy storm. . . .

 "We were lying off Honuapo, loading sugar," said this morning, when the shock occurred. It caused the steamer to tremble from stem to stern, so the shock must have been felt with considerable force on shore. The shocks seemed to be strongest in Kau, but they were also felt in the Kona district, even as far as the Maguire ranch at Heuhu. They were also felt in a small degree at Hilo, but the force seems to have diminished the further places were from Kau. I do not think that any damage was done, at least none was reported to us.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Steamer reports shocks

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 9

%8 06/15

%K eq.1907/06/11.hil?

%X Earthquake shocks on the Island of Hawaii last Tuesday morning were reported by officers of the Steamer Mauna Loa upon her arrival here early yesterday morning. Purser states that at 3:43 o'clock a most severe shock was felt, and another longer though less violent tremor was felt at 4 o'clock sharp. The Mauna Loa was in Honuapo at the time . . . and, with a number of others was ashore near the landing. Those aboard the steamer did not feel the disturbance, but all ashore agreed that they felt a shake more violent than any they had experienced on Hawaii. The first shake lasted about forty seconds. It was learned that seismic phenomena had been felt elsewhere on the island, in Hilo, Kona and Waiohinu.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 9

%S Local Brevities

%8 06/15

%K eq.1907/06/11.hil

%X Two heavy shocks of earthquakes are reported as having occurred last Tuesday morning [Jun. 11] at 3:43 and fifteen minutes later on Hawaii.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Slight earthquake shook the city

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 07/06

%K eq.1907/07/05.molokai??

%X A slight earthquake shock was felt in all parts of the city [Honolulu] last night at five minutes to twelve. The shock lasted but a few seconds but was quite distinct.

%O Not listed in Honolulu Bulletin (Hazard, 1911)



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Locals

%B Maui News

%P p. 5

%8 07/13

%K eq.1907/07/05.molokai??

%X A distinct earthquake was felt on Maui and throughout the group last Friday night [Jul. 5] at 11:45. The shock lasted some seconds, but did no damage.

%O Not listed in Honolulu Bulletin (Hazard, 1911)



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Hawaii shaken by sharp 'quake

%B Honolulu Evening Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 09/06

%K eq.1907/09/05.ksf?

%X Hilo, Hawaii, Sept. 6.--A sharp earthquake shock was felt here at eight minutes of seven last evening. the quake was felt all over the Island of Hawaii and was especially hard in Kohala, at Papaikou and Kau. A slight second shock was felt thirty seconds later.

 Hilo buildings creaked and swayed in a long movement and the foundations trembled. Liquid in full bottles was upset. The general opinion is that this shock is the worst since 1882. Communication with the Volcano is interrupted.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Beckley tells of recent earthquake at Hilo

%B Honolulu Evening Bulletin

%P p. 2

%8 09/07

%K eq.1907/09/05.ksf?

%X  . . . heavy shocks of earthquakes were felt in Hilo at about 7 o'clock on Wednesday night. the wharf was badly shaken up, but fortunately was not damaged. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Shock slight at the volcano; Hilo rocked by quake but Kilauea shows only slight interest in event

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 09/08

%K eq.1907/09/05.ksf?

%X Hilo, September 7 (received 5:15 p.m.)--The Volcano wire was interrupted after the earthquake shock [on Sept. 5]. Communication was restored this afternoon.

  There was but a slight shock of earthquake at the Volcano Thursday [Sept. 5]. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T [no title]

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 5

%S Condensed local news

%8 09/10

%K eq.1907/09/05.ksf?

%X A sharp earthquake shock was felt in Hilo on Thursday evening [Sept. 5] shortly before seven o'clock. No damage was reported.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Hilo stirred by earthquake; sharp shock made houses tremble; after dinner coffee spilled from cups

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 6

%8 09/12

%K eq.1907/09/05.ksf?

%X Some made a rush for their babies. Others made a rush for their doors. This was when the earthquake shook up Hilo at 6:42 o'clock on Friday [Thursday] evening last.

  . . . 

  It was a lively little shock, while it lasted, only a few seconds, lively enough to let everybody in Hilo know that something unusual had happened. It was a long, steady motion that swayed houses perceptibly, made timbers creak and foundations strain. But it was soon over and pictures settled back against the wall, tea and coffee stopped from spilling over into the saucers, liquids in full bottles that had been dripping over returned to their normal steadiness. Only in Kennedy's jewelry store, on Front street, is it known that a few pieces of cut glass moved from their place, and a couple of articles of silverware fell on their sides. Yet in the Hilo Drug Store, close by, nothing moved at all, so far as could be seen.

  First reports by telephone came from Laupahoehoe, then Kau was heard from. . . . Next morning Hakalau reported a lively terrestrial movement, while Kohala seemed to have excelled in shakes. E. Faxon Bishop came in from Papaikou and said it was as bad as he wanted. Waimea felt it. In fact the tremor showed no discrimination but let its presence be felt all over the Big Island.

  One man in Hilo, who has been living on Hawaii for nearly thirty years, said:

  "It was the worst shake I have felt since '82."

  Other old timers would not go back as far as that, but they shook their heads and acknowledged that "it was a bad shake all right, the worst we have had for many years."

  There was no communication with the Volcano House till Saturday afternoon when it was learned that only one light shock had been felt there. At Shipman's ranch, however, there were three distinct shocks, one at 6:52 p.m., a lighter one 20 minutes later, and a third during the night which was sharp enough to awaken the entire household. The first of the three was the most severe felt for many years; pictures moved, a few bottles upset in a workroom, and as a matter of safety a rush was made for the lamps.

%O Text, omitting last paragraph, repeated in Pacific Commercial Advertiser of September 13, 1907



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Shake was sharp but not prolonged

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 6

%8 09/13

%K eq.1907/09/05.ksf?

%X Hilo, September 9--Some made a rush for their babies. Others made a rush for their doors. This was when the earthquake shook up Hilo at 6:42 o'clock on Friday [Thursday] evening last [Sept. 5].

  . . . 

  It was a lively little shock, while it lasted, only a few seconds, lively enough to let everybody in Hilo know that something unusual had happened. It was a long, steady motion that swayed houses perceptibly, made timbers creak and foundations strain. But it was soon over and pictures settled back against the wall, tea and coffee stopped from spilling over into the saucers, liquids in full bottles that had been dripping over returned to their normal steadiness. Only in Kennedy's jewelry store, on Front street, is it known that a few pieces of cut glass moved from their place, and a couple of articles of silverware fell on their sides. Yet in the Hilo Drug Store, close by, nothing moved at all, so far as could be seen.

  First reports by telephone came from Laupahoehoe, then Kau was heard from. . . . Next morning Hakalau reported a lively terrestrial movement, while Kohala seemed to have excelled in shakes. E. Faxon Bishop came in from Papaikou and said it was as bad as he wanted. Waimea felt it. In fact the tremor showed no discrimination but let its presence be felt all over the Big Island.

  One man in Hilo, who has been living on Hawaii for nearly thirty years, said:

  "It was the worst shake I have felt since '82."

  Other old timers would not go back as far as that, but they shook their heads and acknowledged that "it was a bad shake all right, the worst we have had for many years."

%O Repeated from Hawaii Herald of September 12, 1907



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Directors of Kukuihaele meet

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 10/08

%K eq.1907/09/20.mk?

%X About three weeks ago [Sept. 20?] an earthquake at Kukuihaele split the land on which the largest warehouse is built, a large crack running under the building and causing part of it to settle from eight to nine inches.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T An earthquake last evening; a disturbance about nine o'clock lasting for several seconds

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 12/20

%K eq.1907/12/19.aledeep?

%X Yesterday evening, at about five minutes to nine,  an earthquake occurred, which was felt all over the city [Honolulu]. There were two shocks, which  followed each other within a few seconds, the entire disturbance occupying a period of about fifteen seconds.

  It is some four or five years since an earthquake of similar intensity has been felt in this city, although slight shocks have been reported now and then. The fact that the crater at Kilauea, on the island of Hawaii, has been active for the first time in seven months, is interesting in connection with the shocks last night.

  The quake was felt also in the outskirts of the city.  In Nuuanu valley, Palolo and in Kalihi, as well as at Waikiki, the residents at once reported it to the Advertiser over the telephone. Owing to the fact that the Wireless Telegraph Company is closed in the evening, it is impossible to find whether the quake was caused by any volcanic disturbance which was noticeable on the island of Hawaii.

  R.H. Trent, living in Nuuanu Valley, reported a long shock in that section. In Palolo the quake was reported by W.F. Foster, who stated that it was severe and lasted for twenty seconds. On Pacific Heights, Gilbert J. Walter felt two shocks, slightly separated from each other and both severe.

  W.I. Soper states that at his home on Wyllie street he felt the quake in two shocks and that the direction seemed to be from southeast to northwest. Judge Kingsbury, living on Thurston avenue, says that his house was well shaken up. At the fire station the switchboard was affected by the force of the movement.

  From Waikiki, Colonel McFarlane reported. He said: "The shock apparently reached the beach from the direction of Punchbowl. I believe that there must have been a shock on the island of Hawaii as the shocks on this island generally follow seismic disturbances there."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Earthquake visits Maui and Oahu; Two distinct earthquakes were felt on Maui and Oahu--no damage done

%B Maui News

%P p. 1

%8 12/21

%K eq.1907/12/19.aledeep?

%X Honolulu, December 20--Two distinct earthquake shocks were felt here last night about nine o'clock





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%S Personal and General [datelined Lahaina, Maui, Dec. 20]

%8 12/23

%K eq.1907/12/19.aledeep?

%X There was a sharp earthquake vibration in this town [Lahaina] on Thursday, December 19, at 9 p.m.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Madam Pele restless; Earthquake of long duration was felt Thursday night

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 5

%8 12/24

%K eq.1907/12/19.aledeep?

%X A long sustained shock of earthquake was felt in Hilo and, in fact, all over the island of Hawaii on Thursday evening at ten minutes to nine. Though it was by no means severe the unusual length of time that the vibration continued was sufficient to alarm many people. There came the usual premonitory rumble, a slight jelly-like shivering and then a very pronounced lateral shaking. This subsided to the former shivery motion and again there was a more severe shock. Various estimates are made as to the total duration but it is agreed that it lasted anywhere from fifteen to twenty five seconds. No damage of any kind was done. Reports from different parts of the island indicate that the temblor was generally felt. In Honokaa and all through Kohala the earth trembled. The volcano, which has recently been active, continued in activity . . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 13

%S Local Brevities

%8 12/24

%K eq.1907/12/19.aledeep?

%X There were two distinct shocks of earthquake felt on Molokai last Thursday night, corresponding to the hour at which tremors have been reported on Hawaii, Maui and Oahu. It seemed to be a perpendicular vibration rather than a lateral motion, as if the earth's disturbance was directly underfoot.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T Earthquake on Hawaii

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 5

%8 12/26

%K eq.1907/12/19.aledeep?

%X A long shock of earthquake was felt in Hilo Thursday evening [Dec. 19] about 8:50 o'clock. While not very sharp, it was vigorous enough to shake bottles on shelves, but was mainly notable for its duration. It corresponded with the time of a Honolulu tremor which was severe. Honokaa reports feeling the shock which was very sharp about the middle period of its illustration. Laupahoehoe reported a very hard shock there at 8:54 p.m., but no damage done.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1907

%T New cones forming close to the coast in Manuka district

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1, 3

%8 01/18

%K hc.ml, WT, ml.mok.1907, ml.swr.1907, eye, eqs.1907.mlswr, precursor.eruption.seismicity

%X Eruption began in Mokuaweoweo on January 9 and died quickly.  An earthquake swarm began on January 10. By January 12, 200 earthquakes had been felt, and a second eruption had begun above Kahuku. Kilauea was also active.

%O Reports from various persons; also in Hawaiian Gazette, Jan. 18, p. 1, 8



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T [no title]

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 01/19

%K eq.1908/01/12-18.easthawaii

%X Three slight earthquakes were felt at Hilo last week, almost coincidentally with the tidal phenomena on the Kona and Kohala coasts.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Volcanic activity is noticed in Hilo

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 07/23

%K eq.1908/07/21.easthawaii

%X . . . . shortly after nine o'clock on Tuesday morning [Jul. 21, 1908] , a slight shock of earthquake was felt [in Hilo], its direction seemingly being from east to west.

%O Reprinted in Volcano House Register (Bevens, 1988)



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Collapse of molten lake; magnificent sights seen at crater--lava rises again

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1, 5

%8 09/09

%K eqs.1908/09/04.klcal05-10?, eqs.1908/09/05.klcal05-10?, kl.hm.1908.collapse

%X On Friday afternoon last [Sept. 4] an earthquake shock of unusual force was felt in Hilo and that evening the boiling lava in Halemaumau began to pour out in a fiery whirlpool through the bottom of the firepit.  On Saturday afternoon another shock came to [Hilo] and that night it was reported from the Volcano House that the volcano was again active and the molten lake was rising. Whatever the connection there may have been between the two shocks and the subsidence and breaking out again of the volcano can only be authoritatively addressed by scientists, but the two affairs were very generally commented on by Hiloites yesterday.

  [The remainder of the article describes the collapse and recovery of Halemaumau lava lake. The timing of earthquake and collapse quoted above disagrees with that reported in the Hawaii Herald of Sept. 10. That article makes clear the collapse and draining began in the afternoon and the earthquake occurred after much of the lake was drained.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Freaks of Halemaumau and shocks of earthquake

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1, 5

%8 09/10

%K eq.1908/09/02.klcal05-10?, eq.1908/09/04.klcal05-10?, eq.1908/09/06.klcal05-10?, kl.hm.1905.subsidence

%X In connection no doubt with the subterrestrial disturbance that has taken place in the Kilauea region, several earthquakes have been noticed in Hilo. The first of these occurred about noon on Wednesday, September 2. The next was on Friday evening [Sept. 4] at 6:15 o'clock.  This was followed by a third one, twenty-four hours later at 6:15 o'clock. On Sunday morning [Sept. 6], at 8:30 o'clock, a lighter quake was felt. That of Saturday evening was the most severe. Its motion apparently was from east to west . . .

[The beginning and remainder of this article has personal descriptions of the sinking lava lake. The lake began sinking on Friday afternoon, Sept. 4, prior to the earthquake on the evening of Sept. 4. By Saturday morning the lake was empty, five or six hundred feet down from where it was Friday morning, with nothing but smoke to be seen. On the morning of Monday, September 7, the bottom of Halemaumau again dropped at eight o'clock]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Collapse of molten lake

%B Hawaiian Gazette

%P p. 2

%8 09/11

%K eq.1908/09/04.klcal05-10?, eqs.1908/09/05.klcal05-10?

%X Hilo, Hawaii, September 7.--On Friday afternoon last [Sept. 4] an earthquake of unusual force was felt in Hilo and that evening the boiling lava in Halemaumau began to pour out in a fiery whirlpool through the bottom of the firepit. On Saturday afternoon another shock came to the Big Island metropolis and that night it was reported from the Volcano House that the volcano was again active and the molten lake was rising. Whatever connection there may have been between the two shocks and the subsidence and breaking out again of the volcano can only be spoken of authoritatively by scientists, but the two affairs were very generally commented upon by Hiloites yesterday.

%O Repeated from Pacific Commercial Advertiser of Sept. 9, 1908



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Hilo had shake last night; Hilo shocked seven seconds

%B Honolulu Evening Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 09/21

%K eq.1908/09/20.ksf

%X Hilo, Hawaii, Sept. 21.--The heaviest earthquake that has visited this town in years and experienced Sunday evening at ten minutes past eight. The shock was heavy and lasted seven seconds.

 No serious damage was done although all the stores and residences suffered some loss from broken glass ware that was shaken off the shelves.

 The shock had no apparent connection with the Volcano, which has undergone no special change, though still very active.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Severe earthquake shocks and more volcanic action

%B Hawaiian Gazette

%P p. 1

%8 09/22

%K eq.1908/09/20.ksf

%X Hilo, September 21.--The heaviest earthquake felt on the island of Hawaii since 1868 occurred at 8:15 Sunday night [9/20/1908]. All parts of the Island were shaken. While no serious damage was done, much crockery and bric-a-brac were broken. The volcano became exceedingly active, the lakes rising and filling the pit from ten to fifty feet every few hours, accompanied by falling banks. There were many fire fountains. An artesian well of molten lava twenty-five feet in diameter gushed to a considerable height continually pouring a cataract down the east bank of the pit.

  Other particulars: Prof. Alexander stated yesterday that he distinctly felt an earthquake shake Sunday evening at eight minutes past eight o'clock. It was from mauka to makai and quite distinct. In fact, it was of such long duration and the movement so pronounced that he put out his hand to hold a lamp which was on a table. News of the same series of shocks at Hilo was received yesterday in the following wireless telegram from Hilo:

  A very sharp earthquake shock took place here at eight o'clock last night.

  Much glass and liquor in bottles resting on shelves were destroyed by being thrown to the floor. Windows were broken in many places and plaster was cracked in the Inter-Island office.

  The shock was severest in Puueo.

  An hour before the shake the lava in the volcano dropped a hundred feet. Then, immediately before the  shake, it rose to almost the level of the top of the pit.

  The shock was violent in Hilo and also in Puna. Sam Johnson was shaken from his bed.

%O Repeated in Hawaiian Gazette of Sept. 22, 1908



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Hilo has big shake; a roar and a rattle--the volcano joins in the fun--Neptune takes a hand--big fright, damage slight--worst quake for over twenty years

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 09/22

%K eq.1908/09/20.ksf, earthquake.damage

%X  . . .

  . . . For the brief space of half a minute, the town of Hilo rocked and rattled to its foundations, and then the sensation was over . . .

  . . . Some old residents say there has been nothing like it for thirty years past, but others aver that the shake of 1887 was quite equal to that of Sunday night. . . .

  . . . without the slightest warning, there came  a mighty subterranean roar, and to the music of this sound the churches, stores and dwellings swayed and rattled and shook. . . .

  . . .

  Visits of inspection and inquiry around town disclosed the fact that very little damage had resulted from the earthquake. The only building showing perceptible injury was an old unoccupied store . . . The high false front of this structure came down with a crash and partly wrecked the veranda and front of the building. As seen yesterday, the sight was a confused mass of old timber and electric wire.

  [Detailed damage reports follow, mainly falling plaster, broken bottles, etc. in various businesses]

  The damage done in private dwellings may amount to a considerable sum in the aggregate, but in no individual case was it great. Many clocks stopped short, so that there was no difficulty in fixing the time of the shock at a few minutes after 8 p.m. In one home the clock refused to stop, despite the fact that the pendulum was lifted from its attachment by the shock and thrown down.

  Along the water front some alarm was felt, from the fact that immediately after the shock a considerable tidal wave was impelled ashore. This did not rise more than four feet over the usual mark, but some shore residents were so frightened that they came into town for the night.

  [at the volcano] about six in the evening the lava in the crater of Kilauea suddenly dropped down about 100 feet and the fountains began to play with great vigor. . . Then the crater began to fill very rapidly to within 50 to 100 feet of the rim. . . 

  The earthquake shock was very severe at Volcano House. It is described as the heaviest shock ever experienced at that altitude.

  From inquiries at a number of places, it is evident that the shock was felt all over the island. At Waimea, Punaluu and Holualoa, as well as at other points, the shake was alarming, but in no case was any damage done. At the Mahogany Company's mill in Puna, there was a severe shock, and a lighted lantern was thrown down with great violence, but no damage whatever was done to the mill buildings or machinery.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Houses down and slight earth cracks caused by Sunday evening's quake

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1, 5

%8 09/24

%K eq.1908/09/20.ksf, earthquake.damage

%X "The most severe shock of earthquake felt in Hilo since 1868," is how L.A. Thurston described the shake-up that this city received a few minutes after 8 o'clock on Sunday evening last. Others claimed it was not so bad as the tremors of 1886 or 1888. Anyhow, it was lively enough to make everybody sit up and take notice. Both Mr. Thurston and Mr. Julian Monsarrat agreed that it was a Mauna Loa shake, and as Mr. Monsarrat lives on the slopes of the big mountain he ought to be credited with some knowledge about them.

  The most serious damage was done near Kalapana, in Puna, where three houses occupied by Hawaiians were leveled to the ground. Slight cracks in the earth have been made in Hilo, near the bridge, and on the road leading to the Shipman residence on Reed's Islands. There was a tidal wave about three feet high. A few buildings suffered from cracked plaster, there was loss in grocery and liquor houses, and more of it in private dwellings.

  Shocks were felt slightly on Monday, and at least six distinct ones during Monday night; others until Tuesday evening, so that the earth has been trembly for forty-eight hours.

  When the crash came, for it did come with a crash, there was a general desire for fresh air . . . As usual, the shake was felt most severely in Puueo, but there was considerable damage done in the business section of the town. An unusual feature consisted of in cracks, small ones, appearing in the road to the Shipman home across the bridge, and on the made ground from the house at Reed's Island to the government road. Both Mr. Shipman and Mr. Thurston told the Herald that these cracks were visible longitudinally and transversely, and were about wide enough to admit the insertion of a knife.

  Slight tidal wave: A second, and lighter, shock followed a few minutes after the first one. Others were reported at 9 p.m., 11 p.m., near midnight, and at 3 a.m. A tidal wave about three feet high accompanied the shake, being noticed where the Wailuku River discharges itself at Puueo, at Waiakea, and at Reed's Bay. On board the Claudine, lying alongside the Hilo railroad wharf, the shock was distinct, and the little vessel trembled from stem to stern. The motion of the shake was from northwest to southeast, and like a succession of waves. At the Volcano House it was not felt as nearly as severely as at first reported, and the fire did not reach the top of the pit. It was very active, however, sometimes dropping a hundred feet, again rising.

  Chimneys move and break: In Hilo there were many curious freaks played in the movement of furniture, glassware, pictures and other household adornments and necessaries. Water spilled from many tanks in bathrooms. No buildings were thrown down here, but many owners and occupants thought they would be, so got out from under. At the Board of Health office it will cost about $25 to replace the glassware needed by Inspector Bowman, who also lost half the chimney of his rodental crematory. At the hospital Dr. Hayes report the brick chimney cracked across and the upper portion turned halfway around on the lower base. The high school suffered no damage. At Ferndale station, on the Hilo railroad, the water tank came to the ground.

  Downtown section: Serrao building, at the corner of Shipman and Bridge street, is cracked slightly on both frontages. The bottle pickles, sauces, jams and other things fell in a mass in the Serrao and Turner groceries, . . . Glassware and bottles in Serrao's, Demosthenes' and other places went from bar to floor, the liquor stocks in pantries and wholesale houses also blending with the broken glass. There was much cleaning up to be done, except at the Peacock wholesale house, where Austin has his goods wired in and consequently lost only one bottle of sake. But the Peacock's block was not so fortunate, the four corners on the Bridge street side of the Hilo Bank windows are chipped off, though nothing touched them. There is a crack in the plaster of the bank several feet long and several inches wide, which also show in the Count Attorney's office on the other side of the wall. In the sitting room upstairs and in the hall there was, here and there, a light sprinkling of plaster on the floor, and the big water cooler went off its base. At Holmes' store it was the crockery that suffered most. Soap fell to the floor in barbershops, a window in the Inter-Island office was smashed, two windows in the Herald office were broken and one press was moved five inches out of plumb. The top of the little shoe shop next door was about three inches out of place, overhanging on the sidewalk, and it has since been moved back into position. The Hilo drug store lost a couple of bottles, everything there being wired, and there was no damage at Kennedy's jewelry store, not even a piece of cut glass cracked.

  It was near Kalapana that three houses, occupied by Hawaiians, fell to the ground. At the Hawaiian Mahogany Camp, Superintendent Sam Johnson was thrown from his bed. He immediately rushed to the mill, where he found all the lamps upset and extinguished, but no damage done. At Waimea, Charlie Hall landed on the floor after retiring early. At the plantation the mill machinery is being carefully examined, and from all parts of the island the reports come of more or less severity in the shake and of more or less damage. The private houses seem to have suffered the most, and the loss from broken furniture and glassware must mount up to many thousands of dollars in all parts of the island.

%O Reprinted verbatim in the Pacific Commercial Advertiser of Sept. 28, 1908, and the Hawaiian Gazette of Sept. 29, 1908, p. 3



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T 'Quake returns

%B Honolulu Evening Bulletin

%P p. 5

%8 09/24

%K eq.1908/09/20.ksf

%X Charles K. Notley received a letter from his son William, who is at Paauilo, Hawaii. Under the date of September 21 he writes, "We had quite an earthquake shock up here on Sunday evening. It shook pretty lively; the strongest we have had on this Island. It shook the water out of the tanks; I thought we were going to lose all of our water.

 From Kalae, Molokai, comes the following: On Sunday evening 20th inst. a very gentle rocking of the earth was felt here. First an instantaneous movement, a pause and then a gentle and continuous rocking. The movement gave the sensation of being directly underneath.

%O Repeated in Hilo Tribune of Sept. 29



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Telegraphic news

%B Maui News

%P p. 4

%8 09/26

%K eq.1908/09/20.ksf

%X Hilo, September 21--The heaviest earthquake since 1868 occurred at 8:15 Sunday night [Sept. 20] and was felt throughout the island. Much crockery and bric-a-brac was broken. No serious damage was done. Sam Johnson was shaken out of his bed at the camp. The volcano is exceedingly active. The lava lake is rising every few hours and filling the pit from ten to fifty feet each time. The active spells are accompanied by falling banks and many fountains. An artesian well of molten lava 20 feet in diameter is continually poring a fountain of lava down the eastern bank of the pit.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Details of the earthquake as gathered by the Hawaii Herald staff

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 5

%8 09/28

%K eq.1908/09/20.ksf, earthquake.damage

%X "The most severe shock of earthquake felt in Hilo since 1868," is how L.A. Thurston described the shake-up that this city received a few minutes after 8 o'clock on Sunday evening last. Others claimed it was not so bad as the tremors of 1886 or 1888. Anyhow, it was lively enough to make everybody sit up and take notice. Both Mr. Thurston and Mr. Julian Monsarrat agreed that it was a Mauna Loa shake, and as Mr. Monsarrat lives on the slopes of the big mountain he ought to be credited with some knowledge about them.

  The most serious damage was done near Kalapana, in Puna, where three houses occupied by Hawaiians were leveled to the ground. Slight cracks in the earth have been made in Hilo, near the bridge, and on the road leading to the Shipman residence on Reed's Islands. There was a tidal wave about three feet high. A few buildings suffered from cracked plaster, there was loss in grocery and liquor houses, and more of it in private dwellings.

  Shocks were felt slightly on Monday, and at least six distinct ones during Monday night; others until Tuesday evening, so that the earth has been trembly for forty-eight hours.

  When the crash came, for it did come with a crash, there was a general desire for fresh air . . . As usual, the shake was felt most severely in Puueo, but there was considerable damage done in the business section of the town. An unusual feature consisted of in cracks, small ones, appearing in the road to the Shipman home across the bridge, and on the made ground from the house at Reed's Island to the government road. Both Mr. Shipman and Mr. Thurston told the Herald that these cracks were visible longitudinally and transversely, and were about wide enough to admit the insertion of a knife.

  Slight tidal wave: A second, and lighter, shock followed a few minutes after the first one. Others were reported at 9 p.m., 11 p.m., near midnight, and at 3 a.m. A tidal wave about three feet high accompanied the shake, being noticed where the Wailuku River discharges itself at Puueo, at Waiakea, and at Reed's Bay. On board the Claudine, lying alongside the Hilo railroad wharf, the shock was distinct, and the little vessel trembled from stem to stern. The motion of the shake was from northwest to southeast, and like a succession of waves. At the Volcano House it was not felt as nearly as severely as at first reported, and the fire did not reach the top of the pit. It was very active, however, sometimes dropping a hundred feet, again rising.

  Chimneys move and break: In Hilo there were many curious freaks played in the movement of furniture, glassware, pictures and other household adornments and necessaries. Water spilled from many tanks in bathrooms. No buildings were thrown down here, but many owners and occupants thought they would be, so got out from under. At the Board of Health office it will cost about $25 to replace the glassware needed by Inspector Bowman, who also lost half the chimney of his rodental crematory. At the hospital Dr. Hayes report the brick chimney cracked across and the upper portion turned halfway around on the lower base. The high school suffered no damage. At Ferndale station, on the Hilo railroad, the water tank came to the ground.

  Downtown section: Serrao building, at the corner of Shipman and Bridge street, is cracked slightly on both frontages. The bottle pickles, sauces, jams and other things fell in a mass in the Serrao and Turner groceries, . . . Glassware and bottles in Serrao's, Demosthenes' and other places went from bar to floor, the liquor stocks in pantries and wholesale houses also blending with the broken glass. There was much cleaning up to be done, except at the Peacock wholesale house, where Austin has his goods wired in and consequently lost only one bottle of sake. But the Peacock's block was not so fortunate, the four corners on the Bridge street side of the Hilo Bank windows are chipped off, though nothing touched them. There is a crack in the plaster of the bank several feet long and several inches wide, which also show in the Count Attorney's office on the other side of the wall. In the sitting room upstairs and in the hall there was, here and there, a light sprinkling of plaster on the floor, and the big water cooler went off its base. At Holmes' store it was the crockery that suffered most. Soap fell to the floor in barbershops, a window in the Inter-Island office was smashed, two windows in the Herald office were broken and one press was moved five inches out of plumb. The top of the little shoe shop next door was about three inches out of place, overhanging on the sidewalk, and it has since been moved back into position. The Hilo drug store lost a couple of bottles, everything there being wired, and there was no damage at Kennedy's jewelry store, not even a piece of cut glass cracked.

  It was near Kalapana that three houses, occupied by Hawaiians, fell to the ground. At the Hawaiian Mahogany Camp, Superintendent Sam Johnson was thrown from his bed. He immediately rushed to the mill, where he found all the lamps upset and extinguished, but no damage done. At Waimea, Charlie Hall landed on the floor after retiring early. At the plantation the mill machinery is being carefully examined, and from all parts of the island the reports come of more or less severity in the shake and of more or less damage. The private houses seem to have suffered the most, and the loss from broken furniture and glassware must mount up to many thousands of dollars in all parts of the island.

%O Abstract text copied verbatim from Hawaii Herald of September 24, 1908; repeated in Hawaiian Gazette of Sept. 29



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T How Hawaii was shaken

%B Hawaiian Gazette

%P p. 3

%8 09/29

%K eq.1908/09/20.ksf, earthquake.damage

%X "The most severe shock of earthquake felt in Hilo since 1868," is how L.A. Thurston described the shake-up that this city received a few minutes after 8 o'clock on Sunday evening last. Others claimed it was not so bad as the tremors of 1886 or 1888. Anyhow, it was lively enough to make everybody sit up and take notice. Both Mr. Thurston and Mr. Julian Monsarrat agreed that it was a Mauna Loa shake, and as Mr. Monsarrat lives on the slopes of the big mountain he ought to be credited with some knowledge about them.

  The most serious damage was done near Kalapana, in Puna, where three houses occupied by Hawaiians were leveled to the ground. Slight cracks in the earth have been made in Hilo, near the bridge, and on the road leading to the Shipman residence on Reed's Islands. There was a tidal wave about three feet high. A few buildings suffered from cracked plaster, there was loss in grocery and liquor houses, and more of it in private dwellings.

  Shocks were felt slightly on Monday, and at least six distinct ones during Monday night; others until Tuesday evening, so that the earth has been trembly for forty-eight hours.

  When the crash came, for it did come with a crash, there was a general desire for fresh air . . . As usual, the shake was felt most severely in Puueo, but there was considerable damage done in the business section of the town. An unusual feature consisted of in cracks, small ones, appearing in the road to the Shipman home across the bridge, and on the made ground from the house at Reed's Island to the government road. Both Mr. Shipman and Mr. Thurston told the Herald that these cracks were visible longitudinally and transversely, and were about wide enough to admit the insertion of a knife.

  Slight tidal wave: A second, and lighter, shock followed a few minutes after the first one. Others were reported at 9 p.m., 11 p.m., near midnight, and at 3 a.m. A tidal wave about three feet high accompanied the shake, being noticed where the Wailuku River discharges itself at Puueo, at Waiakea, and at Reed's Bay. On board the Claudine, lying alongside the Hilo railroad wharf, the shock was distinct, and the little vessel trembled from stem to stern. The motion of the shake was from northwest to southeast, and like a succession of waves. At the Volcano House it was not felt as nearly as severely as at first reported, and the fire did not reach the top of the pit. It was very active, however, sometimes dropping a hundred feet, again rising.

  Chimneys move and break: In Hilo there were many curious freaks played in the movement of furniture, glassware, pictures and other household adornments and necessaries. Water spilled from many tanks in bathrooms. No buildings were thrown down here, but many owners and occupants thought they would be, so got out from under. At the Board of Health office it will cost about $25 to replace the glassware needed by Inspector Bowman, who also lost half the chimney of his rodental crematory. At the hospital Dr. Hayes report the brick chimney cracked across and the upper portion turned halfway around on the lower base. The high school suffered no damage. At Ferndale station, on the Hilo railroad, the water tank came to the ground.

  Downtown section: Serrao building, at the corner of Shipman and Bridge street, is cracked slightly on both frontages. The bottle pickles, sauces, jams and other things fell in a mass in the Serrao and Turner groceries, . . . Glassware and bottles in Serrao's, Demosthenes' and other places went from bar to floor, the liquor stocks in pantries and wholesale houses also blending with the broken glass. There was much cleaning up to be done, except at the Peacock wholesale house, where Austin has his goods wired in and consequently lost only one bottle of sake. But the Peacock's block was not so fortunate, the four corners on the Bridge street side of the Hilo Bank windows are chipped off, though nothing touched them. There is a crack in the plaster of the bank several feet long and several inches wide, which also show in the Count Attorney's office on the other side of the wall. In the sitting room upstairs and in the hall there was, here and there, a light sprinkling of plaster on the floor, and the big water cooler went off its base. At Holmes' store it was the crockery that suffered most. Soap fell to the floor in barbershops, a window in the Inter-Island office was smashed, two windows in the Herald office were broken and one press was moved five inches out of plumb. The top of the little shoe shop next door was about three inches out of place, overhanging on the sidewalk, and it has since been moved back into position. The Hilo drug store lost a couple of bottles, everything there being wired, and there was no damage at Kennedy's jewelry store, not even a piece of cut glass cracked.

  It was near Kalapana that three houses, occupied by Hawaiians, fell to the ground. At the Hawaiian Mahogany Camp, Superintendent Sam Johnson was thrown from his bed. He immediately rushed to the mill, where he found all the lamps upset and extinguished, but no damage done. At Waimea, Charlie Hall landed on the floor after retiring early. At the plantation the mill machinery is being carefully examined, and from all parts of the island the reports come of more or less severity in the shake and of more or less damage. The private houses seem to have suffered the most, and the loss from broken furniture and glassware must mount up to many thousands of dollars in all parts of the island.

%O Abstract text copied verbatim from Hawaii Herald of September 24, 1908; repeated from Pacific Commercial Advertiser of Sept. 28



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Notes on earthquake

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 5

%8 09/29

%K eq.1908/09/20.ksf

%X Honolulu, Sept. 24--Charles K. Notley received a letter from his son William, who is at Paauilo, Hawaii. Under date of September 21 he writes, "We had quite an earthquake shock up here on Sunday evening. It shook pretty lively; the strongest we ever had on this island. It shook water out of the tanks . . . .

  From Kalae, Molokai, comes the following: On Sunday evening, 20th inst., a very gentle rocking of the earth was felt here. First an instantaneous movement, a pause and then a gentle and continued rocking. The movement gave the sensation of being directly underneath.

%O Repeated from Honolulu Evening Bulletin of Sept. 24



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Shakes and tremors

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 10/01

%K eq.1908/09/20.ksf, earthquake.damage, earthquake.aftershock

%X Slight shocks of earthquake have been noted nearly every day within the past week, three on Friday [Sept. 25], two on Saturday [Sept. 26], one early Monday morning [Sept. 28] and one at 3 o'clock on Tuesday morning [Sept. 29]. That of Saturday, at 8:04 p.m., was short but particularly sharp. The original shake of Sunday, Sept. 20, appears to have been more severe in Puna than elsewhere, the Herald receiving reports of fallen walls and a large earth crack. At 5:16 yesterday morning there was a short but very sharp quake that caused tremors among the nervous and some unusually early rising. It also extended the cracks in the plaster at the Hilo Bank.

%O Repeated in the Pacific Commercial Advertiser of Oct. 4



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Puna rent by earthquake; severer than that of 1868, so say many of the natives

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 10/04

%K eq.1908/09/20.ksf, earthquake.damage, kl.hm.1908, mech.lava lake

%X "The earthquake of two weeks ago," said L.A. Thurston, who has just returned from Hawaii, " was most interesting in its manifestations and in the evidences left of its force. At first I was inclined to think it had its origin on Mauna Loa, partly because Mauna Loa is the source of most of the severe earthquakes on Hawaii. But I feel now that Kilauea was the  source of this one.

  "There is a line of fissures and cones extending, at first, southeasterly from Kilauea, and then northeasterly, along the line of the flow of 1840, and everywhere along this line there is evidence of the destructiveness of the earthquake. At one place the deepest crater in the Islands exists. It is, or was, about 1500 ft deep [Makaopuhi crater]. Great masses of rock and earth have been shaken into this crater, piling up debris at the bottom.

  "In other places there has been similar destruction. At one place along the old Puna trail a new wall was being built. It was three or four feet thick and four or five feet high, and contained many stones weighing two or three hundred pounds. This wall was thrown down and the stone in many places hurled eight or nine feet. Practically every stone wall in Puna was thrown down. . . .

  "The earthquake was much more severe in the part of Puna between Kilauea and Kapoho, which is near the 1840 flow, than it was there on to Hilo. A number of old natives who have lived there all their lives say it was the severest earthquake they have ever experienced, much severer than that of 1868.

  There have been slight earthquakes every day since then. In Hilo these are very slight tremors, but they are felt practically every day."

  "Kilauea is much more active than she has been for months, Her present activity is of a kind entirely new to her--unknown before. I refer to the rising and falling of the molten lava in the pit. Of course, the regular phenomena of Kilauea is that the lava gradually rises until it finds outlet somewhere lower down, as it did in the flow of 1840, and then it is quiescent till it begins to rise again in the same way. But now it rises and falls daily and sometimes more frequently. The rapidity of the rise and fall and the immense amount of material that pours in and pours out of the pit is marvelous beyond computation. 

 [The remainder of the article offers more detail of the activity, including drops and rises of 10 to 50 feet, and artesian flow from one side of Halemaumau to the other]

%O Reprinted in the Hilo Tribune of Oct. 13, 1908



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Items of interest from Hawaii

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 8

%8 10/05

%K eq.1908/09/20.ksf, earthquake.damage, earthquake.aftershock

%X The earthquake caused some trouble in the work on the new Masonic building, the shake tilting the uprights so that the cross beams were found too small to fit between them. Later, there was a tilt the other way and the cross pieces were too large to fit. . . .

  When the Hilo High School was being built, there was more or less discussion as to the probability of its being immune from earthquake. Not a crack has appeared since the severe earthquake of last week and the plaster is perfectly sound. In the laboratory, more or less full of glass, where a row of glass bottles, vessels and other containers stood on the edge of a high shelf and closet, not one piece of glassware fell to the floor, nor was one moved from its place. . . . 

  Slight shocks of earthquake have been noted nearly every day within the past week, three on Friday [Sept. 25], two on Saturday [Sept. 26], one early on Monday morning [Sept. 28] and one at 3 o'clock on Tuesday morning [Sept. 29]. That of Saturday, at 8:04 p.m., was short, but particularly sharp. The original quake of Sunday, Sept. 20, appears to have been more severe in Puna than elsewhere, the Herald receiving reports of fallen walls and one large earth crack. At 5:16 yesterday morning there was a short but very sharp quake that caused tremors among the nervous and some unusually early rising. It also extended the cracks in the plaster at the Hilo bank.

%O The last paragraph repeats the Hawaii Herald of Oct. 1



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Earthquake pranks; country split open and houses overturned--A. Gartley tells of what he saw

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 6

%8 10/06

%K eq.1908/09/20.ksf, damage.earthquake

%X Honolulu, Sept. 30--In the Advertiser, A. Gartley writes as follows of his observations of the effects of the recent big shake:

  Gerritt P. Wider and I just came through Puna from the Volcano on horseback, and saw many evidences of the earthquake which were of interest.

  We left the Volcano on Keauhou trail, passing the line of small craters Panau, Panau-iki, Kapaahu, Kalapana, Pahoa, Kapoho and to Hilo. At the crater of Makaopuhi tons of material have been shaken down from the vertical banks into the mauka pit below. Some smoke was issuing from the bottom of the mauka pali and quite large deposits of sulphur have formed.

  The shake must have been very heavy in Puna. At Kapaahu a crack about a foot wide opened for about 500 feet, extending mauka from the sea.

  At Kalapana the old '68 crack, which opened when the Puna coast sunk, opened about twelve inches more, and about a quarter mile back of this crack toward Kau a new crack has opened, extending from pali to pali and several hundred feet long. Some say there was a small crack before one or two inches wide, but it is now twelve to eighteen inches wide.

  At Kahena it is reported that a strip of the pali (about 100 feet high) along the coast, some 50 feet wide and half a mile long, split off and dropped into the sea, and a new crack has opened parallel with the front of the pali 50 feet back and over two miles long.

  The schoolhouse at Kauaea was either overturned or badly set off its foundation.

  Three houses and many water tanks were overturned in Kalapana and nearly every stone wall was thrown down. On the trail from Kalapana to Kahena the walls on the mauka side of the road suffered, those on the makai side being left intact.

  Between Kalapana and Pahoa the aa lava from old flows was thrown into the road and blocked it some hours.

  L.L. McCandless was speaking in Kalapana school when the quake came, and the crowd disappeared like magic. He could not induce them to return.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Schools hit by earthquake

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 8

%8 10/06

%K eq.1908/09/20.ksf, earthquake.damage

%X  . . .

  Inspector Charles King of Hawaii reported that at Kamaea, in Puna, the schoolhouse was moved two feet by the earthquake and tipped over, the main building going over one way and the lanai another. At other places in Puna water tanks at schoolhouses were knocked over by the earthquake.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Link and the earthquake; just calling on Hawaiians to "Wake up" when it came

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 10/11

%K eq.1908/09/20.ksf, earthquake.damage, earthquake.aftershock

%X [An account of the earthquake as felt at Kalapana during a meeting in the Kalapana schoolhouse]

 . . . It was a terrific quake, and I thought certain the building was going to fall over. It rocked violently. . . .

  [at the house where I was staying] a lamp, which had been left lighted on a table, had been tipped over so that the oil had leaked out on the tablecloth. . . The lamp was one of the kind made to set in a hanging frame, and it had tipped over so that the chimney touched the table. . . .

  There were several slight earthquakes that same night and the next day. The next morning, . . . I was leaning against a stone wall. While I was in this attitude an earthquake occurred which shook my feet back and forth, sideways as I stood.

  Stone walls were thrown down in all that part of Puna. Water tanks were overturned, and in a way a good deal of damage was done.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T A Kilauea quake; L.A. Thurston's theory of the late big shake--Puna suffered most--eccentric volcanic activity

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 6

%8 10/13

%K eq.1908/09/20.ksf, kl.hm.1908, mech.lava lake, earthquake.damage

%X "The earthquake of two weeks ago," said L.A. Thurston, who has just returned from Hawaii, " was most interesting in its manifestations and in the evidences left of its force. At first I was inclined to think it had its origin on Mauna Loa, partly because Mauna Loa is the source of most of the severe earthquakes on Hawaii. But I feel now that Kilauea was the  source of this one.

  "There is a line of fissures and cones extending, at first, southeasterly from Kilauea, and then northeasterly, along the line of the flow of 1840, and everywhere along this line there is evidence of the destructiveness of the earthquake. At one place the deepest crater in the Islands exists. It is, or was, about 1500 ft deep [Makaopuhi crater]. Great masses of rock and earth have been shaken into this crater, piling up debris at the bottom.

  "In other places there has been similar destruction. At one place along the old Puna trail a new wall was being built. It was three or four feet thick and four or five feet high, and contained many stones weighing two or three hundred pounds. This wall was thrown down and the stone in many places hurled eight or nine feet. Practically every stone wall in Puna was thrown down. . . .

  "The earthquake was much more severe in the part of Puna between Kilauea and Kapoho, which is near the 1840 flow, than it was there on to Hilo. A number of old natives who have lived there all their lives say it was the severest earthquake they have ever experienced, much severer than that of 1868.

  There have been slight earthquakes every day since then. In Hilo these are very slight tremors, but they are felt practically every day."

  "Kilauea is much more active than she has been for months, Her present activity is of a kind entirely new to her--unknown before. I refer to the rising and falling of the molten lava in the pit. Of course, the regular phenomena of Kilauea is that the lava gradually rises until it finds outlet somewhere lower down, as it did in the flow of 1840, and then it is quiescent till it begins to rise again in the same way. But now it rises and falls daily and sometimes more frequently. The rapidity of the rise and fall and the immense amount of material that pours in and pours out of the pit is marvelous beyond computation. 

 [The remainder of the article offers more detail of the activity, including drops and rises of 10 to 50 feet, and artesian flow from one side of Halemaumau to the other]

%O Identical text to the article in the October 4 issue of the Pacific Commercial Advertiser



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Earthquakes, storms and steamer burned

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 10/22

%K eq.1908/10/20.easthawaii, eq.1908/10/21.easthawaii

%X At 9:55 o'clock Tuesday morning [Oct. 20] there was an earthquake shock in Hilo, short but distinct. At 6:20 yesterday morning [Oct. 21] there were two shocks [in Hilo].





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Italy's earthquake felt on Hawaii

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 12/31

%K eq.1908/12/28.kao?

%X It was between 1 and 1:30 p.m. on Monday [Dec. 28], the same day that the disastrous earthquake occurred in Italy, that Mrs. F.M. Swanzy and Mrs. Mary Gunn arrived at Julian Montserrat's Kapapala  ranch, and Mrs. Gunn had just asked if they now had any of their old time earthquakes, when a smart tremor shook the house. A second shock was felt in the evening, though not so severe as the first one. It may be that scientists can trace some connection between the shakes in Italy and Hawaii, if so their ideas would be interesting.





%0 Magazine Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1908

%T Earthquake shocks

%B Hawaiian Annual for 1909

%P p. 172

%K WT, eq.1908/09/20.ksf, hc.kl

%X A strong earthquake at 8:15 p.m. on September 20, 1908, was most severe in Hilo and in Puna.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1909

%T What Omori said about local quakes

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 01/02

%K ha, hazard.earthquake

%X August 11, 1906.--Professor F. Omori, a leading scientist of Japan, and recognized as among the world's leading authorities on seismic questions, on passing through Honolulu en route to Japan from California, where he had been sent by the Japanese government to investigate the earthquake in San Francisco on April 19, 1906, made the following statement to the Advertiser:

 "I would say there is a very slight possibility of there ever being a an earthquake of any magnitude in the Hawaiian Islands.

 "It is noticeable that in the immediate neighborhood of large volcanoes, such as here, there are no violent earthquake shocks. Naples, for instance, is free of them. And it is therefore quite safe to say that these islands will never be visited by such a shock as has been had in California.

 The article concludes with a statement that California will be immune from serious shocks for at least thirty years.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1909

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 7

%S Local Brevities

%8 01/02

%K eq.1908/12/28.kao?

%X Passengers from Hawaii on the Mauna Kea yesterday report that the Big Island experienced an earthquake shock on Monday last [Dec. 28, 1908], on the day when the Sicilian disaster occurred.

%O For times see Hawaii Herald of December 31, 1908



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1909

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 7

%S Local Brevities

%8 01/05

%K eq.1909/01/04.mk?

%X A story is published to the effect that Hilo felt a severe earthquake shock yesterday [Jan. 4], shortly after noon. The shock is said to have been sharp and decisive.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1909

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 7

%S Local Brevities

%8 01/13

%K eq.1909/01/10.easthawaii

%X A light earthquake was felt at Hilo last Sunday night [Jan. 10] , and two more have been felt since then.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1909

%T Weekly weather bulletin for the week ended January 23, 1909

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. ?

%8 01/26

%K eq.1909/01/20.klerz?

%X A slight earthquake shock was felt at Kapoho, Hawaii, at 6:45 p.m. of the 20th





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1909

%T Shake on Hawaii

%B Honolulu Evening Bulletin

%P p. 2

%8 03/13

%K eq.1909/03/13.klcaldeep?

%X Hilo, Hawaii, March 13.--A sharp earthquake shock was felt here and through Kona and Kau at 3:30 o'clock this morning.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1909

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 5

%S Local Brevities

%8 03/14

%K eq.1909/03/13.klcaldeep?

%X A sharp earthquake shock was felt in Hilo and throughout Kona early yesterday morning.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1909

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 5

%8 03/23

%K eq.1909/03/13.klcaldeep?

%X An earthquake shock, which was severe in parts of the island, was felt generally over Hawaii about 3:20 a.m. of the 13th.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1909

%T Local Brevities

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. ?

%8 06/14

%K eq.1909/06/08.easthawaii

%X A sharp earthquake jolt was felt in Hilo on Tuesday morning [June 8], a few minutes after seven o'clock. There was only one shock and it was short, but it left no doubt as to its existence or that its direction was from north to south





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1909

%T At the mouth of Hell

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 2

%8 07/22

%K kl.hm.1909

%X Prof. Daly, of Massachusetts, who accompanied Prof. Jaggar to the Volcano to study the requirements for the establishment of an observatory at Kilauea, has stood at the mouth of Hell, and he was not alone, with him being his sister-in-law, Miss Haskell, and Rev. J. Lidgate [sic]. The three were lowered over the brink of the precipice, surrounding Halemaumau, by ropes down a depth of 190 feet from the top. Professor Daly took measurements and found that the active fire was a distance of 235 feet from the top. His party, therefore, was within 45 feet of the active boiling lava, standing on a ledge of black lava that surrounds the fiery furnace. While there, Mr. Daly, with scientific instruments, tested the heat of the mouth of Hell.

  Exactly how long they remained there is not known, but the length of their visit to the inferno was somewhat shortened by the fumes of sulphur which compelled them to ascend to the brink of the pit earlier than they had intended. The descent was made on July 5, 1909, but Mr. Daly does not advise others to go and do likewise.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1909

%T Hitchcock finds two new craters near Kilauea

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 12/29

%K hc.kl, discovery.pit crater

%X Two new live craters of almost the same dimensions as Halemaumau, the living, boiling fire-pit of Kilauea, were discovered two weeks ago by Professor Hitchcock, the eminent geologist and volcanologist, and Rev. W.D. Westerveldt. The craters are about six miles from the Volcano House and about two miles from Halemaumau, the location of the craters being between Kilauea and Keauhou.

  The craters are in a region which has practically never been explored and is unsurveyed, a waste which apparently has no more value or interest than much of the surrounding lava cropped surface. A convict, who has been at work, with  a large gang of territorial prisoners, on the new road which leads down from the Volcano House around the eastern edge of Kilauea, led Professor Hitchcock's party into the new land. After leaving the road the explorers went into a rough country and finally came to the craters. Each crater is reported by professor Hitchcock to be full of steam, but no lava is visible.

[The distance from Volcano House and description of the terrain fits what are now called "Cone Craters," on Kilauea's southwest rift zone east of Puu Koae.--the distance from Halemaumau is too short and the direction is considerably east of a line connecting Kilauea's summit and Keauhou landing on Kilauea's south coast. A subsequent article in the Pacific Commercial Advertiser of Nov. 13, 1910 makes it appear that the two craters were on Kilauea's east rift zone, including Puhimau and perhaps Hiiaka.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1910

%T Observatory of our own; Hawaii should be independent of Massachusetts Institute of Technology; the study of the volcano; educators object to having it under the Boston Institution's control

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. ?

%8 02/20

%K hvo.history.funding

%X A declaration that Hawaii should assume control of Professor Jaggar's proposed volcano observatory for Kilauea. An alternative to control by M.I.T. would be the assumption of responsibility by the College of Hawaii [predecessor to the University of Hawaii at Manoa}.

%O !cannot find



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1910

%T Kilauea oldest volcano in the world; Prof. Jaggar announces it as the Earth's first, with Fuji of Japan the latest

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. ?

%8 02/20

%K hc.kl.age

%X Addressing the 665th meeting of the Society of Arts, in Boston, Jaggar lectures, not only holding that Kilauea is the world's oldest volcano, but that the world's volcanoes can be grouped by age and chemical composition, the oldest being most fluid  (basic in composition) and the youngest most sticky (acidic in composition). He also holds from experiments conducted in his laboratory that the temperature of basic and acidic eruptions is about the same. [Ed. note: A very strange lecture, completely at odds with modern volcanological knowledge.]

%O !cannot find



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1910

%T Earthquake's severe shock

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 04/21

%K eq.1910/04/19.kl?

%X A very sharp earthquake shock took place Tuesday morning [Apr. 19] at about 3:50, causing those were awake to jump around and those who were asleep to get up suddenly. The shock, while severe, was of such short duration that very little damage was done, other than the breaking of a little crockery where it had been left close to the edge of a shelf. An interesting feature of the shock was the fact that immediately after it took place the Kilauea crater flamed up suddenly, lighting the sky in that direction with great brilliancy. Though the weather was very cloudy it could be seen plainly. the glare only lasted for about five minutes then dying down.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1910

%T Decapitate the Garden Island; Kauai is eighty feet lower than it was some months ago, but does not miss the loss; the Federal topographers find island has held head too high

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1, 4

%8 10/20

%K kauai, geodesy.vertical

%X A new topographic survey of Kauai, under the direction of Birdseye, shows the summit to be 5170 feet, 80 feet lower than shown on earlier maps. All maps will be revised to reflect the results of the new survey.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1910

%T New craters smoking up

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 11/13

%K hc.kl, discovery.pit crater

%X Hilo, November 9--Some time ago it was reported that prisoners working on the new volcano road had found two new craters, being attracted thereto by the steam rising from the pits. This became more noticeable and Henry Cockett, in charge of the prisoners, has a trail built there. The craters are within seven or eight miles of the Volcano house and can be easily reached on horseback. It is claimed that they are the most attractive craters in the vicinity of Kilauea. One of them pours forth an abundance of steam incessantly. In shape it is perfectly round, while the inside walls are absolutely precipitous, and its depth is unfathomable. Handsome forest growth surround it to its very brink.

  Mrs. James Dougherty has given the crater the name of Puhimau. which means "always retiring." [Puhimau is not steaming since at least 1964. If these are the craters described by Hitchcock in the Pacific Commercial Advertiser of Dec. 29, 1909 (Anonymous, 1909), his description seems at odds with this one.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1911

%T Quake is felt in Honolulu

%B Honolulu Evening Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 07/14

%K eq.1911/07/14.mauideep?

%X Wailuku, July 14.--Two heavy earthquake shocks were felt here at 11:30 today, each of about ten seconds duration.

 A slight but distinct earthquake shock at 11:37 o'clock this morning was felt in various parts of the city [Honolulu]. For twenty seconds the temblor rocked the earth, the motion being gentle by easily felt, and then subsided as quickly as it began.

 The shock was recorded by the U.S. weather Bureau instruments, the time being given as 11:30 o'clock. At the Capitol the shock was quite noticeable, but nowhere was it severe enough to cause any fear or uneasiness.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1911

%T Honolulu has an earthquake

%B Hawaiian Star

%P p. 1, 8

%8 07/14

%K eq.1911/07/14.mauideep?

%X Honolulu had the very unusual experience of an earthquake shock this morning shortly after half-past eleven. It was not a shock to do any damage, or to be noticed except by people sitting or lying down, but nevertheless it was a shock of severity beyond recent precedent, and was very distinctly felt by many people. No damage was done.

 The shock was distinctly felt in the Capitol, where it manifested itself in two distinct movements. the first was a series of vertical shocks-five or six in number-which were believed at first to be the results of heavy blasting in the harbor, as when a series of charges are detonated in succession. with possibly a brief interval in between, the second motion began, and this was described by those who felt it as a wave motion, or a backward and forward motion from sea towards the mountains. During the second shock a book toppled from the shelf in the Secretary's office, and windows and blinds rattled as though shaken by a strong wind. According to clocks in the Capitol, the shake occurred at 11:39, and lasted perhaps half a minute.

     Felt on Tantalus

 W.R. Castle, from his residence on Tantalus, described the shock as occurring at 11:34 am and lasting half a minute. The motion was up and down and slightly rotary.

 The quake seemed to increase in severity and ended with a severe shock.

 The Castle house is built on a ridge consisting mostly of black sand, and therefore more susceptible to a shock than would be a location down town.

 The shock was distinctly felt in the McCandless building and in the U.S. engineer's office people were rocked backward and forward in their chairs.

 Residents of Alewa Heights felt the shock, or rather the two shocks, for so the quake is described by dwellers in the neighborhood.

 The Kaimuki people had their share of the shock, and a lady living near Sixth Avenue states that the earth shook with the motion of a boat at sea, making her head so dizzy that she had to lie down for a spell.

    On the Waterfront

 Along the water front the shock could be distinctly felt. In the office of Collector Stackable, the building could be felt moving as though it were being shaken by heavy gusts of wind. The door of the office rattled so that inspector Stackable thought that someone was knocking for admittance, and he shouted "come." but of course there was no answer. The shock seemed to be a gentle one, although of quite a long duration, but the big clock that is situated in his office was not thrown enough out of its course to stop the pendulum.

[The remainder of the article is written in a less serious manner, detailing the reactions of a number of persons in different places in Honolulu. Common observations are that furniture moved, a sound of rumbling or a blast was heard, and hanging fixtures swung. A few persons ran out into the streets in panic.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1911

%T Maui people feel 'quakes

%B Honolulu Evening Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 07/14

%K eq.1911/07/14.mauideep?

%X Wailuku, Maui, July 14.--There were two quite severe earthquake shocks felt on Maui at about 11:30 o'clock this morning, its direction being from east to west. The first shock was quite heavy and lasted about ten seconds. The second shock followed in quick succession and lasted for about the same duration of time, and perhaps longer, but those in the new Wailuku courthouse and the County Building at the time did not care to wait until the second shock had died out, for the solid building of reinforced concrete seemed to shake from its very foundation and appeared to sway to and fro. The occupants ran outside post haste and from the outside watched for further demonstrations, but luckily the buildings stood the test as well as other buildings of similar character in Wailuku. The new church of the Good Shepherd stood the test nobly, as also did the new Wailuku Union Church under course of construction.

 Many of those in wooden frame buildings even flew outside in almost double quick time. It is many years now since Maui was visited by such severe earthquake shocks.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1911

%T Marvelous whirlpool of fiery lava forms at Halemaumau--gorgeous sight for the scientists

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 07/15

%K eq.1911/07/14.mauideep?, kl.hm.1911, mech.lava lake.circulation.temperature, hvo.buildings

%X Hilo, July 14.--The tremendous activity in the pit of Halemaumau of the last few days has brought about a startling phenomenon, something which has never been seen before in the history of the volcano. Yesterday the molten lava took the semblance of a whirlpool until the revolving center of the disturbance was sucked down, leaving a hole into the depths. Into this, from both sides, the lava is pouring in two Niagaras of living fire, with a roar that is heard miles distant from the pits. The hole is almost in the center of Halemaumau, directly under the arch junction of the two floating islands.

 Prof. F.A. Perret the volcanologist, has a theory that the maelstrom is caused by the lighter subfluids being forced down by the heavier surface lavas, forming the viscous crust, the result being that two levels have been formed in the pit.

 . . . .

 The scientists have finished their task of stretching the wire cable across the fire pit, the cable being twelve hundred feet from post to post. The first instrument to test the temperatures of the lava will be lowered probably early next week. The work of erecting a cottage-observatory on the brim of the fire pit is well under way.

    Earthquake is experienced

 All Hawaii visited by earthquakes yesterday and reports are coming in of special activity at Kilauea.

 The Advertiser received a wireless last evening from Hilo to the effect that the volcano was much more active than usual.

 Honolulu felt the quake just before noon, its duration being 20 seconds. It was felt throughout the city, but nowhere was it severe. 

 From Wailuku, the Bulletin received a wireless that two severe shocks were felt there at eleven-thirty o'clock, the same time that the shock was registered here.

  The shock in Honolulu was felt distinctly at the capitol, and out in the Punahou district it was apparently more severe than downtown.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1911

%T To measure volcano heat; Professor Perret has strung cables and station is completed; "Waterfall" has disappeared

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 07/20

%K eq.1911/07/14.mauideep?, kl.hm.1911, instrument.temperature

%X The earthquake of Friday morning [July 14], which was felt on all the islands of the group and was quite severe in Honolulu, was not noticeable at Halemaumau, according to Professor Frank A. Perret, the volcano expert who is stationed there.

  The rest of the article describes the current action in Halemaumau and Perret's preparations to measure its temperature.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1911

%T Shock felt at crater; Professor Perret tells of rapid drop in surface of molten lava after earthquake on Tuesday

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 07/27

%K eq.1911/07/25.klcal0-5?, kl.hm.1911

%X An earthquake which took place at the Kilauea volcano Tuesday morning at 10:32 and which was observed by Frank A. Perret, was the cause of considerable commotion in Halemaumau. The shock was quite noticeable at the station which has recently been erected and was immediately followed by a rapid drop in the surface of the molten lava. Mr. Perret noted a fall of twelve feet in a short space of time. The shock lasted for three-fourths of a second.

  The rest of the article confirms unusual activity at Halemaumau as manifested by a strong glow seen by passengers on the inter-island steamer "Mauna Kea".





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1911

%T Temperature of live lava recorded

%B Hawaiian Gazette

%P p. 1

%8 08/01

%K kl.hm.1911.temperature

%X The temperature of Halemaumau was recorded at 1010Á C, on the third attempt after losing two thermocouples. [The temperature is probably low by at least 100Á--a platinum thermocouple was used, shown by later lava lake studies to take in iron on contact with molten lava, thus causing a low temperature reading.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1911

%T Pele on a rampage

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 12/28

%K eq.1911/12/26.klcal0-5?, kl.hm.1911

%X The fire pit of Halemaumau is exhibiting unusual wonders. Seldom has the Kilauea volcano been more active. . . . A few days ago the molten lava was within 65 feet of the rim. On Tuesday afternoon [Dec. 26] three earthquakes rattled the crockery in the Volcano House and the lava lake sank 20 feet. Immediately afterwards the floor of fire started to rise again, and rose 50 feet in less than a day. Now it is within 35 feet of the observation hut of Prof. Perret . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1912

%T Preparing for the lava flow; topographers to be sent into the volcanic region to map out the hollows

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 02/03

%K hc, mapping.topography, hazard.lava flow

%X A report of the first topographic survey of the island of Hawaii and the implications for better predicting where lava flows from the next Mauna Loa eruption will go. The article also discusses the value of new topographic data for the drive to create a "Kilauea" National Park.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1912

%T Earthquake felt yesterday in Hilo

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 04/11

%K eq.1912/04/10.southhawaii

%X The earth shivered perceptibly at exactly four o'clock yesterday afternoon.

  Hundreds of people noticed the quiver of the crust of nature.

  Those located in their homes and offices mentioned the phenomenon more especially; the folks on the streets not paying any particular attention to the occurrence. 

  . . . , but yesterday afternoon's shiver was particularly perceptible.

  The motion was from west to east for about seventeen seconds, with an interval of five seconds and then another shake enduring for about twenty seconds. After that there was an interval of probably half a minute with a following of three slighter trembles of about 10 seconds each with brief intervals of 2 or 3 seconds.

  In this connection it may be stated that Kilauea is very active, not more active than in the last three or four weeks, but active in a way somewhat different from the recent activity. The liquid lava seems to be changing its manner of eruptive expression and seeking new avenues of escape. The scientists' prophecy of an imminent eruption of Mokuaweoweo appears about to be fulfilled. [This didn't come about until 1914.]

%O Repeated in the Hawaiian Star of Apr. 13.



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1912

%T Quakes at Hilo, crater erratic

%B Hawaiian Star

%P p. 8

%8 04/13

%K eq.1912/04/10.southhawaii

%X The earth shivered perceptibly at exactly four o'clock yesterday afternoon.

  Hundreds of people noticed the quiver of the crust of nature.

  Those located in their homes and offices mentioned the phenomenon more especially; the folks on the streets not paying any particular attention to the occurrence. 

  . . . , but yesterday afternoon's shiver was particularly perceptible.

  The motion was from west to east for about seventeen seconds, with an interval of five seconds and then another shake enduring for about twenty seconds. After that there was an interval of probably half a minute with a following of three slighter trembles of about 10 seconds each with brief intervals of 2 or 3 seconds.

  In this connection it may be stated that Kilauea is very active, not more active than in the last three or four weeks, but active in a way somewhat different from the recent activity. The liquid lava seems to be changing its manner of eruptive expression and seeking new avenues of escape. The scientists' prophecy of an imminent eruption of Mokuaweoweo appears about to be fulfilled.

%O Quoted from the Hawaii Herald of Apr. 11.



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1912

%T Hilo's heaviest quake since this island's last lava flow

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 04/18

%K eq.1912/04/17.southhawaii

%X Hilo shuddered yesterday afternoon.

  She shook!

  At 5:08 p.m. Hilo trembled with the heaviest quake since 1899, which olden shake was accompanied by a lava flow.

  On Waianuenue street a number of business men ran out of their stores, into the streets, fearing the buildings were about to fall.

  The quiver did not last more than about five seconds, but it was severe while it lasted.

  A peculiar incident in connection with this shock is the way animals behaved. The roosters back of Demosthenes' Hotel [Hilo Hotel] crowed lustily. The hens ran in circles. Several persons who felt the temblor were affected with a feeling of sickness at the stomach.

  Strange to say nobody in the Hackfield building felt the tremor.

  A member of the topographic survey was taking a bath when he felt the shock. He thought a safe had been let loose of its fastenings and was running amuck. He cannot explain why he thought that, but that is what he thought.

  Two men in a printing office were conversing. Of a sudden the machines and the type shelves quivered and the men looked at each other imagining that somebody had discharged a load of dynamite in the vicinity without producing a sound, if such a thing were possible..

  In Leo Toma's cigar store the proprietor thought at first that something had fallen on the roof. Captain Duval, in his office on Waianuenue street, declared it was the heaviest quake he had ever felt..

  A gentleman in an automobile in the act of coming out of the Volcano stables, thought there was something wrong with the machine. His excitement was explained later when he heard about there having been an earthquake.

  Telephone communication with various parts of the island brought forth the information that the shiver of the earth's crust was felt in many sections.

  Some people declare they felt a long succession of quivers after the first violent shock. The observation of the writer was that after the big shake at 5:08 o'clock, there was a very slight fading-away series of tremors, but that may have been imagination borne of the nervous effect of the first violent shock.

  The opinion has been expressed that the motion was north-southerly, and the probabilities are that it was about that direction.

%O Not listed in Honolulu Station Bulletin (Hazard, 1913)



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1912

%T Quake defaces scenery

%B Hawaiian Star

%P p. 1

%8 05/06

%K eq.1912/04/28?.hil?

%X It appears that the shock reported at Hilo on Sunday week [Apr. 28?] was severely felt on the Kau coast as well.

  The quake was distinctly felt aboard the steamer Kilauea, lying at Honuapo, and from that vessel was witnessed the rare sight of a portion of the land scenery being precipitated onto the sea by the quake, as if it had been blown out by a heavy blast of dynamite.

  "I was talking with the mate at the time," Purser Logan of the Kilauea said last night, "when we felt the deck trembling under our feet, while at the same time a deep rumbling sound could be heard.

  "What's that?, I asked the mate and he replied that it was likely the fireman starting the boilers. But just then we happened to look toward the shore, where we saw a mass of debris rumbling from the bluff into the sea, making a cloud of dust. The ragged crest of the bluff that overlooks the ocean had been shaken down by the quake."

%O Repeated in the Hawaii Herald of May 16.



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1912

%T Quake tumbles bluff

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 6

%8 05/16

%K eq.1912/04/28?.hil?

%X It appears that the shock reported at Hilo on Sunday week [Apr. 28?] was severely felt on the Kau coast as well.

  The quake was distinctly felt aboard the steamer Kilauea, lying at Honuapo, and from that vessel was witnessed the rare sight of a portion of the land scenery being precipitated onto the sea by the quake, as if it had been blown out by a heavy blast of dynamite.

  "I was talking with the mate at the time," Purser Logan of the Kilauea said last night, "when we felt the deck trembling under our feet, while at the same time a deep rumbling sound could be heard.

  "What's that?, I asked the mate and he replied that it was likely the fireman starting the boilers. But just then we happened to look toward the shore, where we saw a mass of debris rumbling from the bluff into the sea, making a cloud of dust. The ragged crest of the bluff that overlooks the ocean had been shaken down by the quake."

%O Quoted from the Hawaiian Star of May 6. Not listed in Honolulu Station Bulletin (Hazard, 1913)



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1912

%T Hawaii shakes in quakes; volcano belching smoke

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 05/24

%K eq.1912/05/22.ksf?

%X Hilo, May 23--An earthquake shock was felt here and in all the adjacent towns and villages which, while it worked no apparent damage, was the heaviest the locality has experienced for many years and created little panics in a number of places. A report comes from Pukoo that Mokuaweoweo is belching smoke, and during the brief but pronounced tremor a rumbling sound was heard in many parts of Hilo and Kau.

  The effect of the earthquake on ponds and streams was pronounced and it is said to have caused miniature tidal waves on the small bodies of water. Livestock and the residents of the districts where the shock was felt were equally terrorized by the quake and here was a veritable epidemic of runaway horses and cattle.

  The quake, which is undoubtedly intimately connected with the recent activities of Kilauea, has been preceded by numerous slight tremors, excessive heat and other omens. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1912

%T Earthquake did but little harm on the Big Island

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 5

%8 05/27

%K eq.1912/05/22.ksf?

%X Hilo, May 23--A severe shock of earthquake was felt in Hilo at eleven o'clock Wednesday night. The tremor seemed to travel from west to east and, while it lasted, the rumbling was most uncanny. The shake lasted some seven seconds and, in town, many people were much alarmed. Very little damage was said to have been done by the quake, and the articles broken were confined to bottles and glasses, that were left standing too near the edge of tables and shelves.

  There was little or no warning before the quake struck Hilo. The first indication was a faint rumbling that could be heard a long way off. It seemed something like a shower of rain on tin roofs, and only old-time residents knew what was coming.

  As the rumbling noise approached, mules and horses confined in stables, began to bray and neigh. Roosters also started to crow and there was a noticeable noise all around. The first tremors were very faint, but the main shake soon came along. Then there was a straining and groaning of wooden houses, and everything swayed back and forth.

  The hard part of the shake did not last long, however, and things soon resumed their normal quiet Hilo way. The rumbling of the quake could be heard going away in the distance, and that finished the shake.

  Many newcomers, who are not used to small earthquakes, were very scared and a great desire for company was expressed by several persons who, while declaring that they were not frightened, seemed anxious not to be left alone for the rest of the night.

%O Text repeated in The Hilo Tribune of May 28.



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1912

%T Pele preparing play from summit crater

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 05/30

%K eq.1912/05/22.ksf?, precursor.eruption.seismicity

%X . . . .

  The energetic trembler of Wednesday night last [May 22] was, without doubt, . . . the heaviest since that memorable shake of a few years ago [Sept. 20, 1908] when considerable damage was done to household effects and to some buildings.

  At precisely 11 o'clock at night last Wednesday's quake came. It was preceded by a queer roaring sound, as of a great wind starting from a far distance and gathering speed as it rushed onward. Perhaps this endured, or seemed to endure, as near as the ear could detect, for four or five seconds; and then came a pregnant lull, like the space between the beginning and the ending of a giant sneeze. It was this lull, to one who was in a position to feel full force of the shivering earth crust and who had felt these things before, that was the most uncomfortable period of the phenomenon.

  Then came the tremble, nor was it any baby spasm. The force was huge but brief. It could be imagined that damage would be accomplished by the same force if sustained. Mercifully it was brief and not repeated. Not more than ten seconds it lasted, the quaking; possibly eight seconds would cover the period. One does not pull out ones watch and hold the second-ticker on earthquakes.

  Those who had borne in mind the prophecies of the scientists, who have been studying this island's volcanoes, were reminded that such quakes were necessarily preliminary to the promised outbreak of Mokuaweoweo; that such an outbreak is scheduled and is about due. Sure enough, next morning was reported smoke from Mauna Loa's crater, Dr. Schute of Puu Oo ranch being the first to sight the column of smoke.

  There will likely be other quakes before Mokuaweoweo gets into the full swing of a real exhibition of pyrotechnics. . . .

  Two gentlemen were comfortably ensconced at a round table on the veranda of Demosthenes Hotel [Hilo Hotel], Waianuenue street, when the shock came. One was a Hiloite, the other a stranger to Hawaii. "What's that?" suddenly inquired the stranger, gripping the arms of his chair. "Why," replied his friend, strangely enough looking behind him (northward), "It sounds like--." He hesitated, trying to say what it sounded like. Then the pause between the roar and the shakes, and as the first quiver came, the stranger bolted from the veranda. A horse on the street, fifty yards away, gave an odd scream and madly tugged a hack up hill, his driver, awakened by the rattling of iron roofs, gathered in the lines as he went. A late diner rushed from the restaurant, a plate of sandwiches in one hand and a bottle of beer in the other, and in the midst of the quake, sat down at the veranda table, saying: "This is no time to be alone." A tall two-by-two brick chimney, apart from the house vibrated sickeningly.

  In the Elk's club, over The Tribune office, a Hilo man was entertaining the Italian Saxophone quartet which had for the first time in Hilo showed at the Gaiety theater that night. They knew something of old-world earthquakes, but had never experienced the Hawaiian brand. They were out of their chairs in an instant and scrambling for the doorway. The Hilo man ordered them back. They were frightened enough to obey any commanding voice.

  A man walking home in Waiakea, about a mile from the Hilo post office, suddenly felt his knees weaken. He felt quakes before. He saw the waters of a large pond, usually placid, jump up and break into waves with a strange slapping and slopping sound, breaking on the banks as if a giant hand had altered the pond's entire contents.

  A game of cards was proceeding it a certain house when one frame wall rattled as if it was separate from the rest of the building; then the whole structure wobbled, rocking chairs rocked vigorously and crockery and ornaments gave out a weird clattering noise. The players, speechless, waited for a repetition of the quivers, though there was but the one series. Pictures in many houses were disarranged on the walls and everywhere sleepers were awakened, jumping out of bed and hastily gathering clothes.

  Telephone intelligence from many sections of the island was forthcoming the day following. The quake had been generally felt. It was at first thought that some damage might have been done in Kau, for it is that district that the quakes are usually felt most severely. But descriptions of the incident, from that part of the island, revealed the fact that Hilo felt the seismic disturbance quite as heavily as did Kau. No damage anywhere outside of fright has been recorded.

  Some people are talking of an increase in the activity in Kilauea crater, but are apparently not familiar with what the volcanologists have been teaching of late, for when the quakes begin to be numerous and strong in Hawaii, it is to Mokuaweoweo that the Big Islanders must look for action. The quake of last Wednesday night must have been simultaneous with the Mauna Loa crater activity, for the morning revealed a broad ribbon of smoke from Mokuaweoweo and that crater is still smoking generously. There have been many very moderate vibrations of the earth's crust in the last week, not severe enough to occasion serious remark. The opinion, however, is that Mokuaweoweo is preparing for a big exhibition.

%O Not listed in Honolulu Station Bulletin (Hazard, 1913)



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1912

%T Jaggar on the way to Hawaii; Recent shakes in Hawaii-hurry him-expects predicted outbreak soon

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1, 4

%8 06/07

%K hvo.research

%X The article summarizes Jaggar's plans for the new observatory.

%O Repeated in Hawaiian Gazette of the same date



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1912

%T Jaggar on the way to Hawaii; Recent shakes in Hawaii-hurry him-expects predicted outbreak soon

%B Hawaiian gazette

%P p. 1, 8

%8 06/07

%K hvo.research

%X The article summarizes Jaggar's plans for the new observatory.

%O Repeated in Pacific Commercial advertiser of the same date



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1912

%T Earthquake felt on all islands

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 9

%8 10/15

%K eq.1912/10/13.aledeep?

%X Wailuku, October 14--A severe earthquake was felt throughout Maui yesterday morning, the shock coming at half past five o'clock.

  A wireless to the Star-Bulletin yesterday states that the shock was felt throughout the island of Hawaii and that increased activity of the volcano is reported. The shock, as reported in the Sunday Advertiser, was felt throughout this city [Honolulu], being especially strong in the Kaimuki district.

  Full particulars of the records made by the seismograph at the Technology Station [HVO] will be received in the regular weekly report to the Advertiser from Professor Jaggar, and, in all probability, the connection between the earthquake and the increased activity at Kilauea--if there be any connection--will be explained.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1912

%T Locals

%B Maui News

%P p. 5

%8 10/19

%K eq.1912/10/13.aledeep?

%X The earthquake on Sunday last [Oct. 13] was felt throughout the group. It was most severe on Maui.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1912

%T Many shocks at the volcano; instruments record series of minor quakes through all of last week

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 10/21

%K eqs.1912/10/15.klcal0-5?, eq.1912/10/13.aledeep?

%X A swarm of earthquakes were recorded during the past eight days [beginning Oct. 14] by the seismographic instruments at the Technology Station, Kilauea . . . None of the shocks were at all strong, the one most noticeable being recorded on the morning of Sunday the thirteenth, which same shock was felt in Honolulu and throughout the group.

  . . . .

Shook the Territory [This information duplicates that given in Jaggar, 1947, p. 44]

  Early in the morning of the 13th of October and earthquake was distinctly felt at the Volcano House by several persons, including the writer [H.O. Wood]. The motion communicated to the second story of the hotel was gentle and relatively slow, yet sufficiently strong to waken light sleepers. This was a multiple shock, eight distinct maxima being counted by L.A. Thurston at the Volcano House. It is doubtful if this could be due to a peculiar response in the swaying of the structure. Owing to an unaccountable stopping of the driving clock of the major tromometer, this shock was not registered properly, and the time of its occurrence or its duration were not measurable. The maximum amount of its motion indicates that it was a shock of only moderate strength. Approximately its time of occurrence was about quarter to six in the morning. It has been reported that this shock was felt lightly in Honolulu and distinctly in Hilo. Whence the writer concludes, since the area of sensible motion was fairly large and the motion nowhere strong on land, that this was a submarine shock of fairly deep origin and relatively slight energy. The geographical position of the origin cannot be estimated.

  Throughout the forenoon of October 13 the pendulum of the major tromometer swung irregularly with long period indicating relatively rapid and irregular movements of tilting at the edge of the Kilauea sink at this time. These movements were superimposed upon the normal diurnal tilting.

[The article concludes with reports of more quakes, duplicating information in ESPHVO for that week]





%0 Journal Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1912

%T Seismological notes

%J Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America

%V v. 2

%N no. 2

%P p. 144-145

%K oahu, seismology, seismograph.milne, eq.1909-1910.ha

%X "EARTHQUAKES AT HONOLULU, 1909-10.„In the Report of the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey's Magnetic Observatory, near Honolulu, prepared by Mr. Daniel L. Hazard, there is given in addition to the magnetograph records a short note on the behavior of the Milne seismograph belonging to the Seismological Committee of the British Association. This was transferred from Oahu College to the Magnetic Observatory in April, 1903. The pendulum points north, recording east-west motion. The pendulum period is between 19 and 20 seconds, and the sensitiveness or amount of tilt corresponding to a displacement of 1 millimeter at the end of the pendulum has been determined at various times. A table of the earthquakes recorded during 1909 and 1910 is given, covering in all 259 disturbances. The phases are given in Greenwich mean time, counting from midnight. Nearly all of the disturbances recorded were tremors of short duration and small amplitude. In many cases a mere swelling of the line without well-defined phases has been tabulated as the beginning of the principal portion." The remainder of this short note lists earthquakes by number, not by date and time. One earthquake (no. 588) is described as being felt generally on the island of Hawaii.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1913

%T Earthquake at Hilo worst in many years

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 7

%8 05/20

%K eq.1913/05/18.ksf?

%X Hilo, May 19--Old residents claim that the earthquake at about 8 o'clock Sunday night [May 18] was one of the sharpest ever experienced here, although of very short duration. The quake interval was for about half a minute, coming with a most decided shock from sea to mountain, followed by two others which seemed to be from Puna toward the Hamakua coast.

  So roughly did it jar frame buildings that there was considerable evidence of fright, especially among strangers who rushed into the middle of the streets. But by the time most of the people were in the streets the quake was over. It is claimed that of recent years there has only been one other so severe and that was five years ago when large articles were shaken from shelves of buildings. The quake was not felt at Volcano House. [This last statement is refuted by the report from HVO.]

%O Nearly identical text in The Hawaii Herald of May 23, 1913



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1913

%T Sharp earthquake Sunday evening

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 05/23

%K eq.1913/05/18.ksf?

%X Some old residents claim that the earthquake at about 8 o'clock last Sunday night was one of the sharpest ever experienced here, although of such short duration that it had no opportunity to cause any damage. The quake interval was for about half a minute, coming with a most decided shock from sea to mountain, and just as severely two quickly followed which seemed to be from Puna toward the Hamakua coast.

  So roughly did it jar frame buildings that there was considerable evidence of fright of people in Hilo, especially among strangers who rushed to the middle of the streets. But by the time most of the people were in the streets the quake was over. It is claimed that of recent years there has only been one other so severe and that was five years ago [Sept. 20, 1908] when large articles were shaken from shelves of buildings. The last quake was not felt at the Volcano House. [This last statement is refuted by the report from HVO.]

%O Nearly identical text in The Honolulu Star-Bulletin of May 20, 1913



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1913

%T [no title]

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 6

%8 09/10

%K eq.1913/09/08.kao??

%X A very sharp and short earthquake shock was felt in Hilo Monday morning just before noon.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1913

%T Volcano gets ready to give brilliant show

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 10/25

%K eq.1913/10/25.ksf

%X Hilo, Hawaii, Oct. 25.--An earthquake shock, felt for eighteen or twenty seconds last night, alarmed Hilo residents slightly. Two small cracks were caused in the Masonic building. signs of activity are reported at the crater of Kilauea.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1913

%T Earthquake lasting twenty seconds is reported from Hilo

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 10/29

%K eq.1913/10/25.ksf

%X Returning passengers from Hilo yesterday by the steamer Mauna Kea brought particulars of a rather severe earthquake which was felt in the southern metropolis Saturday morning at one o'clock. Oldtimers claim the quake was by far the most severe experienced there since 1880 when Mokuaweoweo erupted and the lava flow reached within half a mile or the rear gates of the city.

  Saturday morning's earthquake is said by some to have lasted fully twenty eight seconds. Editor Santos of O Luso, who returned yesterday from Hilo, states it duration was fully twenty seconds and that for a considerable time after the actual quake there was a pronounced oscillation of the land.

  Two easily visible cracks appeared on the walls of the Masonic building, which is a concrete structure reinforced by steel. A large plate glass in one of the show windows of the Peacock building, a big two-story brick structure, was cracked from top to bottom. Curiously, no damage was done in many of the stores. In the country most of the old-fashioned stone bread ovens were demolished.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1913

%T Instruments broken by quake; Professor Jaggar, from Kilauea, tells of Earth tremors that awakened Hilo--people of other islands asked to send in reports whether or not they felt the shocks

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 9

%8 11/03

%K eq.1913/10/25.ksf, eq.location.magnitude.intensity

%X Much of this article describes what happened at Kilauea, particularly in the Whitney Laboratory of Seismology, during October. Descriptions of the October 25 earthquake duplicate what is published in the weekly and monthly HVO Bulletins (Bevens and others, v. 2, p. 62, 64). 

  Under the subtitle of "Want people to aid," Jaggar makes the following plea:





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1913

%T Professor Jaggar wants data; man who watches Kilauea seeks information regarding earthquake

%B Maui News

%P p. 5

%8 11/08

%K eq.1913/10/25.ksf, eq.location.magnitude.intensity

%X Professor Jaggar is interested in obtaining from the public as much information as possible about the earthquake of October 25, 1913. "We want to get an idea of the distribution of earthquake intensity," said Professor Jaggar. "What we learn from this will be valuable for us when later on we distribute simple observation instruments at various points on the island."

 . . . . Professor Jaggar asks that those interested will cut out the list of questions, paste it on a piece of paper and write out the answers in the space opposite each question. Here are the questions and the directions.

Earthquake of October 25, 1913; Information Blank.

What is your name, occupation, and P.O. address ?

Did you feel the earthquake October 25, 1913, about 1 a.m.?

How many shocks did you feel?

At what locality were you? Describe place as exactly as possible.

Were you indoors or outdoors, and if indoors, on what floor of house?

Were you walking, riding, standing, sitting or lying down?

At what time did the shock or shocks occur, as nearly as you know?

How long, in your judgment, did the shock or shocks last?

  At your locality.

(1) Was the earthquake felt by few or many persons ?

(2) Did doors and windows rattle, or buildings creak?

(3) Did hanging objects, like pictures swing ?

(4) Did plaster crack?

(5) Was furniture moved about?

(6) Did bottles, vases, etc., fall?

(7) Did church bells ring?

(8) Were people generally awakened?

(9) Were pendulum clocks stopped?

(10) If so, in what direction did the pendulum swing? (answer north-south,  east-west, etc.)

(11) Were many people frightened?

(12) Were many people made dizzy or sick?

(13) Did trees, doors, etc., swing slowly, or did they quiver?

(14) Was water in tanks observed?

to swing slowly, or splash quickly ?

(15) Did chimneys fall?

(16) Did brick masonry crack?

(17) Did window glass break?

(18) If so, what directions did most of the broken windows face?

(19) Did concrete masonry crack?

(20) Were any buildings destroyed?

(21) Was there any damage to wooden buildings?

(22) Were there any landslips, cracks in the earth or new springs formed?

(23) What noise did you hear, if any, before, during or after the earthquake?

(24) Was there general evidence that objects shook or fell in one direction or one line of direction, as north-south, east-west, etc.?

(25) Were animals or fowls restless, noisy or unusually quiet before the earthquake?

(26) Were there any other noteworthy happenings?

(27) Persons of scientific training who receive this are invited to write here a complete brief description of phenomena observed.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1913

%T Signs of the quake

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 11/09

%K eq.1913/10/25.ksf

%X New slides about Kilauea, generated by the earthquake of October 26 [sic], 1913, have been discovered near the base of Waldron's ledge, where a single large block has fallen out near the trail, and from the low cliff west of the foot of the trail leading from the Volcano House to the crater. This last place is a broad fresh notch, marking the scar of a landslip of considerable magnitude, as shown by the talus heaps beneath. Very respectfully, 

  T.A. Jaggar Jr.,

            Director





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1914

%T Heavy downpour covers islands; Earthquake accompanies storm that is reported to have been general

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 03/30

%K eq.1914/03/29.molokai?

%X Most of the article describes a regional storm.

  "An unusual accompaniment of the storm was an earthquake shock which jarred houses and startled the occupants but did no damage. Reports of the temblor came to the Advertiser from G.W.R. King and W. Hole of Kaimuki and W.R. Castle of Tantalus road, Punahou, and in varying degrees of severity it was felt in all parts of the city."

%O Repeated in Hawaiian Gazette of Mar. 31, 1914, p. 2



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1914

%T Severe quake felt

%B Maui News

%P p. 1

%8 04/04

%K eq.1914/03/29.molokai?

%X On Sunday night last [Mar. 29] at seven minutes past eight o'clock a severe shock of earthquake was felt in Wailuku. The tremor appeared to come from the north and traveled toward the south. It lasted for about six seconds. Two shakes were felt at an interval of a second or two.

  The earthquake was the most severe felt on Maui for a long time, and there were many conjectures as to where the trouble originated. Some people thought that either Kilauea or Mauna Loa had broken out afresh. However dispatches from Washington show that the seismograph recorded a severe shock there.

  It is now surmised that there has been a big eruption in some isolated place and that, later on, news will come of the outbreak. People in Hawaii do not feel nervous as they knew Kilauea is a safety valve.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1914

%T Kilauea's fires brilliant sight

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 04/17

%K eq.1914/04/15.kao?, kl.hm.1914

%X A description of the lava lake in Halemaumau occupies the first several paragraphs, succeeded by the following:

  A slight earthquake shock was felt by a number of persons in Hilo shortly before 2 o'clock last Tuesday morning [Apr. 15]. The say it was only one brief tremor, noticeable in their homes but having no material effect and causing no damage.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1914

%T Earthquakes

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 2

%8 05/05

%K eq.1914/04/29.mlmok?

%X Hilo had a mild earthquake shock last Wednesday afternoon [Apr. 29]. It was of long duration, but not strong enough to be felt except by people seated or lying down. On the following Saturday [May 2] Honolulu was shaken, as shown by the following in the Sunday Advertiser [May 3, 1914]:

  Two earthquake shocks a few seconds apart were recorded in all parts of the city and environs last night at 6:43 o'clock. The first shock was light, very much like the vibration from a heavy blast. The second shake a few seconds later, was short and quick also but heavier than the first. Telephone reports to the Advertiser revealed that the earth tremor was distinctly felt in all parts of the city as well as the adjoining country districts. So far as is known no damage was done.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1914

%T [no title]

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 5

%S Brevities

%8 06/05

%K eq.1914/06/01.ksf?

%X Hilo experienced another mild earthquake last Monday morning [June 1] about 6:20 o'clock. There were two distinct tremblors, the first being the heavier and quite noticeable but the second, several minutes later was so faint that only a few observed it. They caused no damage or excitement.

%O Nearly identical text in The Honolulu Star-Bulletin of May 20, 1913



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1914

%T Sixteen quakes at the volcano; Scientific observers testing theory of moon's influence on seismic phenomena here--the lava rising

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 6

%S Brevities

%8 07/14

%K eqs.1914/07/05.kao??

%X Technology station, July 9, 1914-- . . . .

 During the week ending July 8 sixteen local earthquakes were registered. All but two of these occurred within a period of forty-eight hours on July 5, 6 and 7, eleven of them between 2:44 p.m. July 5 and 1:41 a.m. July 6. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1914

%T [no title]

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 5

%S Brevities

%8 07/24

%K eq.1914/07/20.mlmok??

%X An earthquake that was felt from Hilo to the volcano was experienced Monday morning [July 20] about 4 o'clock. It was sharp, coming in three distinct tremblors and continuing several seconds. An unusually fine display of rising lava was reported from the crater the previous evening. The shock caused no damage.

%O Nearly identical text in The Honolulu Star-Bulletin of May 20, 1913



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1914

%T Earthquakes are felt around Hilo

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 10/02

%K eq.1914/09/27.hil?

%X Two rather severe earthquake shocks were felt in Hilo last Sunday [Sept. 27] and the first, in the morning time, lasted for about fifteen seconds. The shake traveled from north to south and began at 10:14 a.m. The second tremor was felt at 1:17 p.m. and was not quite as pronounced as the first one.

  Reports from outlying districts are to the effect that the earthquakes were felt both in the morning and the afternoon. The direction of the shakes in some places seems to have been from east to west.

  The increased activity of the volcano is thought to have something to do with the recent tremors of the earth.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1914

%T More earthquakes felt in Hilo

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 11/20

%K eq.1914/11/13.kao??, eq.1914/11/15.kao??

%X Earthquakes are becoming frequent, and the laymen wonder if Mauna Loa is due for an eruption soon, or whether Kilauea is going to play up more than usual. Besides the shakes felt at Paauilo and Laupahoehoe last week, there have been quakes experienced in Hilo lately.

  On Friday evening last [Nov. 13] at 7:50 o'clock there was a shake that lasted about 15 seconds. It was distinctly felt at Puueo where pictures hanging from walls swung to and fro. The shake alarmed some malihines but did no damage at all.

  On Sunday afternoon before one o'clock in the afternoon, there was a more severe shake [than the one on the 13th] which seemed to travel from south to north. The tremor lasted about ten seconds, rattled windows and threw pictures out of plumb again.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1915

%T Hilo is shaken by earthquake; damage slight

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 8

%8 03/29

%K eq.1915/03/28.kao??

%X Hilo, March 29.--Hilo was shaken by a severe earthquake at 8:30 Sunday morning [Mar. 28]. The tremor was felt all over the Island and was palpable to all, houses shaking, dishes being hurled off tables and shelves, and windows rattling. Slight damage was done to many houses. Nobody was injured.

%O Repeated in Maui News of Apr. 4, 1915



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1915

%T Very severe earthquake; a shake-up that was heavier on this side of the island than the other

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 03/30

%K eq.1915/03/28.kao??

%X An earthquake here was the severest felt here for a number of years, occurred at about half past eight on Sunday morning [Mar. 28]. Many a house was quickly emptied of its inhabitants by a rush for the streets. The shock was of such long duration that those who started quickly could get out-of-doors before it was over. Though some old-timers declare it the severest they ever felt here, many think they recall harder shocks, and the damage this time was practically nothing, while a shock of seven or eight years ago did great damage in drug stores and among household glassware.

  At the Volcano House the shock was not as heavy as in Hilo, judging by the reports of those who felt it. But it was too heavy for the instruments at the Observatory to record it,--the "needle went off the tape" and the record is soon lost after the shake began.

  Professor Wood stated at the Observatory yesterday that the shock was lighter at the Volcano, than the one of a year ago last October. "It appears from reports I have received to have been more severe in Hilo than on the Pahala side," he said. "It was the second shock we have had since the Observatory started, that was too severe for our instruments to complete a record of it."

  In a few Hilo homes vases were toppled over, and in the drug stores some bottles fell. The shock was remarkable for its duration as well as for the severity reached at its climax.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1915

%T Hilo has a shock

%B Maui News

%P p. 5

%S On the other islands

%8 04/03

%K eq.1915/03/28.kao??

%X The town of Hilo was shaken by a severe earthquake at 8:30 Sunday morning [Mar. 28]. The tremor was felt all over the Island and was palpable to all, houses shaking, dishes being hurled off tables and shelves, and windows rattling. slight damage was done to many houses. Nobody was injured.

%O Repeated from HSB, Mar. 29. 1915



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1915

%T [no title]

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 6

%S Brevities

%8 05/28

%K eq.1915/05/26.a3035

%X There was a slight shock of earthquake felt in Hilo at five o'clock on Wednesday morning [May 26]. Another quiver of the earth's crust was experienced at about half past seven o'clock on this same morning.

%O Also noted in the Hilo Tribune of Jun. 1



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1915

%T [no title]

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 6

%S Brevities

%8 06/01

%K eq.1915/05/26.a3035

%X There was a slight earthquake felt in Hilo at five o'clock on Wednesday morning [May 26]. Another shock was experienced at about half-past seven o'clock on the same morning.

%O Also noted in the Hawaii Herald of May 28



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1915

%T [no title]

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 6

%S Brevities

%8 08/20

%K eq.1915/08/15.a2025

%X There was a sharp shock of earthquake at five-fifteen last Sunday morning [Aug. 15]. It was felt more in Puueo than in other parts of the town.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1915

%T Dewey crater showed signs of activity

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 09/24

%K eqs.1915/09/20.easthawaii

%X The beginning of the article reports smoke from Dewey crater and speculates on the possibility of a new eruption in Mokuaweoweo. The article concludes as follows:

  . . . A series of earthquakes had been felt on Monday [Sept. 20] along the Hamakua coast and, more specially, at Kukaiau Ranch, where five temblors were felt within three hours. In Hilo small shakes had been felt on Sunday [Sept. 19] and Monday . . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1915

%T Broke the record for earthquakes

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 09/28

%K eqs.1915/09/25.klerz?, subsidence.hm

%X L.A. Thurston, who returned from the Volcano yesterday morning, reports a continuance of the rapid sinking of the lava in Halemaumau and a record-breaking series of small earthquakes registered by the instruments at the observatory. "Up to yesterday morning a days record of 87 shocks was shown by the instruments," said Thurston, "and this is not counting 137 tremors not heavy enough to be recorded as shocks. This is the largest number ever recorded since the observatory was  started. Professor Jaggar is inclined to think the earth's shaking is due to adjustments down below resulting from the downward flow of lava in the crater."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1915

%T Dewey steams

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 10/01

%K eq.1915/09/25.mk?

%X The first two paragraphs discuss smoke see at Dewey crater, speculating on the possibility of a new eruption in Mokuaweoweo.

  There have been several rather severe earthquake shocks during the past week and one on Sunday last [Sept. 25] was rather strenuous. It was felt at Honokaa and Kukuihaele more than at places near Hilo. Other quakes have been felt along the [Hamakua?] coast and in fact all over the island.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1916

%T Quake tears down old stone house

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 02/29

%K eq.1916/02/15.kao?

%X H.O. Wood, volcano observer, has been informed that an earth temblor strong enough to destroy a stone house on the trail from the volcano to Mauna Kea occurred on February 15. Extracts from the weekly volcano report telling of the quake are given below:

  An earthquake has been reported to the writer, strong enough to throw down a rude stone house situated on the trail leading from Kilauea to Mauna Kea at a point not far from the course of the Mauna Loa rift belt. This occurred in late evening of February 15. There is no report that this shock was felt except by ranchmen who happened to be in camp along the trail. This is of interest as a shock almost surely emanating from the northeast segment of the Mauna Loa rift system. The anticipation of eruption on this flank adds to its interest.

  A light earthquake was felt at the Volcano House in the early morning hours, at about 4 o'clock, on February 23.

  There were, of course, no seismic records of these or other shocks. 

[HVO seismographs were out from a storm that occurred around January 13, 1916. Seismic registration did not begin again until March 26.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1916

%T [no title]

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 5

%S Brevities

%8 04/07

%K eq.1916/04/03.mlmok?

%X There was a rather severe shock of earthquake felt on Sunday night [Apr. 3] and it appeared to be worse in the Puueo district than anywhere else.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1916

%T [no title]

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 2

%8 04/10

%K ml.swr.1916, eqs.1916/04/09.mlmok?

%X Several communications datelined Volcano House quote T.A. Jaggar as announcing [erroneously] the beginning of an eruption on Mauna Loa, following a series of earthquakes widely felt throughout the district.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1916

%T Mokuaweoweo crater breaks out in grand display

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 05/19

%K ml.mok?.swr.1916

%X [subheads: Mauna Loa's lofty crater erupts steam, smoke, 20,000 feet; lava flow reported]

 An account of the May 1916 eruption on Mauna Loa's upper southwest rift zone. Eruption began in Mokuaweoweo on Friday [May 19] at 7 a.m. [Star-Bulletin Hilo correspondent] or 7:15 a.m. [Inter-Island steam Navigation company's Hilo correspondent]. There is no mention of earthquakes. 

 Later reports indicate the eruption was at 11,000 feet on Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone, accompanied by earthquakes.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1916

%T Majestic volcano of Mauna Loa in eruption and reports say lava flows after outbreak

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 7, 9

%8 05/20

%K ml.mok?.1916, ml.swr.1916, kl.hm.1916, eqs.mlswr.1887

%X [subheads: Dense volumes of 'smoke' are shot into air; One crater of 'fiery island' supposed to be Mokuaweoweo. Again 'blows off'; caldron of Kilauea fills simultaneously; Indications are that lava flows, if such there be, is on Kahuku side]

 An account of the May 1916 eruption, beginning high on Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone at 7 or 8 a.m. [reported times vary] May 19 and lava was reported flowing toward Kona.

    Kilauea very active

 A brief mention of activity in Halemaumau lava lake

    No earthquakes reported

 Usually earthquakes precede an outbreak of Mokuaweoweo, but none of the many wireless messages received here yesterday report temblors of any kind. Preceding and accompanying one of Mauna Loa's great eruptions, that of 1887, almost four hundred earthquakes were felt at Pahala, Kau, fissures being afterwards noted in many parts of the district. The plantation water system was entirely disrupted, the pipes being forced apart at the joints, in many places.

 . . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1916

%T Mauna Loa is quieting down from all signs

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 9, 12

%8 05/21

%K ml.mok?.1916, ml.swr.1916, kl.hm.1916, eqs.1916/05/19.mlswr, eq.1916/05/18.mlmok?

%X [subheads: Professor Jaggar, from Volcano house, reports no new evidence of outbreak; Kau had series of quakes yesterday; Fire pit of Kilauea presenting a most spectacular sight for tourists]

 Hilo, Hawaii, May 20.--An account of the ending of the first stage of the May 1916 eruption, high on Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone, and possibly in Mokuaweoweo as well.

    Kau has earthquakes

 At Pahala, Kau, six earthquakes were felt between one and three o'clock this afternoon [May 19]. They were of short duration and no damage was done.

 It was learned today that on Thursday night [May 18] a short but severe, earthquake was felt at Waimea, South Kohala.

 The remainder of the article describes activity in Halemaumau lava lake.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1916

%T Mauna Loa erupts; big lava flow moving mile an hour toward Kau

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 05/22

%K ml.swr.1916

%X [subheads: Mauna Loa's lofty crater erupts steam, smoke, 20,000 feet; lava flow reported]

 An account of the May 1916 eruption on Mauna Loa's lower southwest rift zone. Eruption began at 7000 feet on May 21 at 11 p.m. There is no mention of earthquakes.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1916

%T Triple fiery streams of molten lava are flowing to the sea down Mauna Loa; eruption gaining strength as it devastates district of Kau and threatens homesteads and towns

%B Hilo Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 05/23

%K eqs.1916/05/20.mlswr?, ml.swr.1916

%X An account of the May 1916 eruption on Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone. Eruption began about 11:15 Sunday night [May 21]. An earlier gas eruption began near the 11,000 foot level on Friday [May 20] at 7:15 a.m. At that time six distinct earthquakes, following each other at an interval of  a few minutes, shook the district of Pahala, Kau.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1916

%T See streams of lava flow from Mauna Loa in eruption

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 7, 9

%8 05/23

%K ml.swr.1916, damage.lava flow, eqs.1916/10/21.mlswr, ml.mok?.1916

%X [subheads: Bertelmann ranch is destroyed and cattle in danger; Three streams of molten rock pour out of fissures and down mountainside; Courses are along tracks of old flows; Country of Kau district south of Volcano being devastated by fiery rivers]

 An account of the ongoing eruption from Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone and the damage caused to ranches. The original outbreak on May 19 lasted five hours. A paragraph on p. 9 states: "Almost continuous slight earthquakes [May 21] have convinced Professor Jaggar that a second outbreak of Mauna Loa is momentarily possible."

 The new eruption broke out at 11:30 p.m. on May 21 at 7,000 feet altitude.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1916

%T Lava burst from Mauna Loa

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 9, 12

%8 05/25

%K ml.swr.1916, eqs.1916/10/20.mlswr?, precursor.eruption.seismicity

%X [subheads: Clouds of vapor accompany flow of fiery liquid; Molten rock makes way down slope toward Papa and crashes through forest; Terrific outbreak at night brilliant; Streams on south side apparently have halted, although heat is intense]

 An account of the ongoing eruption from Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone. 

    Outbreak long expected

 Jaggar is quoted as saying "We have been long expecting this outbreak and realized at once that this was the great main flow of lava. It follows the course of the outbreak in the crater of Mokuaweoweo of December 1914. That outbreak was the premonitory symptom of the main eruption which we now have. . . .

    Six distinct earthquakes

 Jaggar repeats information regarding the six earthquakes felt in Pahala, identifying them as an expected precursor of eruption.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1916

%T Many 'quakes on Big Island, Wood reports

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 06/05

%K eqs.1916/06/04-05.klerz?

%X Hilo, Hawaii, June 5.--Many earthquakes are being recorded at the Volcano Observatory. H.O. Wood, Prof. Jaggar's associate observer, describes them as "a flock."

 Kilauea's crater is very active now.

 Smoke has been seen coming from Mokuaweoweo at the top of Mauna Loa.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1916

%T Volcano lake's fall giving grand display; rise expected soon, Prof. Jaggar predicts

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 06/06

%K eqs.1916/06/05-06.klerz?

%X Hilo, Hawaii, June 6.--This is declared to be the most spectacular day in the history of the volcano of Kilauea since 1894.

 Late yesterday the "bottom fell out of Kilauea" as enthralled spectators expressed it and the lava sank 300 feet in four hours.

 The earthquakes are continuing, the sides of the crater crushing down to the bottom of the pit, falling in great masses into the seething sea below the rim. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1916

%T Kilauea's lake of molten lava drops many feet

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 8

%8 06/09

%K eqs.1916.klcal

%X Kilauea, not to be outdone by Mauna Loa's craters, gave a splendid exhibition on Monday and Tuesday last [June 5-6] when the "bottom" fell out of the crater and the sides went tumbling down to a spot 675 feet below, where the remains of the lava still seethed and boiled with "Old Faithful" doing his best to liven things up.

  The beginning of the fall of the lava was on Sunday night [June 4], but it was on Monday that some lucky spectators sat for hours and watched the huge shelves and ledges of lava break off and thunder down to the bottom of the pit. It took about four hours for all the lava to fall from the three hundred foot mark. As the lava ran out, the benches or shelves of rock higher up broke off and tumbled down below. The sight was an awe-inspiring one and those who saw it will never forget it. As the depth of the funnel-like pit became more and more, the confined lava in many a cave began to run and fall like a beautiful cascade of fire into the pit. The noise of the falling rocks and the splashing of the molten streams of lava could be heard for a long distance.

  Earthquakes accompanied the phenomenon and the seismograph at the Volcano Observatory registered hundreds of shocks. Professor Wood describes the shakes as being a regular "flock" of earthquakes.

  The pit of Kilauea is a wonderfully changed sight now-a-days and is well worth a visit. The huge vent has assumed the aspect of a funnel which is wide at the top and narrow at the bottom.

  That there is a direct connection between the craters of Mauna Loa and those of Kilauea seems certain, and the supposition is that as Mauna Loa relieved herself of accumulated lava through the many flows of a couple of weeks ago, Kilauea's supply is being drawn upon and is going to fill a vacuum created by the expulsion of Mauna Loa's mass of molten rock.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1916

%T Earth's tremors stir up things

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 8

%8 06/16

%K eq.1916/06/12.ksf?

%X When the earth began to shake last Monday morning [Jun. 12] at about six forty-five o'clock, there were some badly scared people in the Puueo district. The tremors of the earth were not as severe as those experienced a little over a year ago [Mar. 28, 1915], but all the same, they made people and animals sit up and take notice.

  The quake seemed to come from the south and travel in the direction of the north and the shake was sufficient to scare malihinis. It also scared the life out of a certain fox terrier pup belonging to a Puueo man. The animal was terrified by the shaking and ran howling from the front of the house to the kitchen. Not finding the cook there, the dog gave up all hope and simply sat on its haunches and waved both its legs in the air in hopeless fashion.

  When the quake attained its full strength pictures swung from the walls and crockery rattled in the pantries of the Puueo households. The sensation was not a nice one for ten or fifteen seconds and citizens wondered what was doing at the volcano.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1916

%T [no title]

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 5

%S Brevities

%8 07/14

%K eq.1916/07/11.ksf?

%X There was a severe shock of earthquake at 9:55 p.m. on Tuesday evening last [Jul. 11] and the quakes lasted for almost a minute. In the Puueo district the tremors were felt more than in other suburbs.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1917

%T Hilo is rattled by big earthquake; was severest experienced in several years

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 08/01

%K eq.1917/07/28.ksf?

%X An earthquake shook Hilo until the buildings quivered and people ran into the streets, Saturday evening [Jul. 28] shortly after eight o'clock, according to reports reaching here yesterday. The quake began with a long tremble gradually augmenting in force until the windows literally rattled.  It was the severest earthquake the city has felt in years, and was more or less generally felt over the island. 

  A second quake followed six hours later and again buildings shook and people ran into the streets. No damage is reported except near Laupahoehoe, where a huge stone rolled from its place into the road between the railroad and station and tore up the road for a few feet.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1917

%T [no title]

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 5

%S Brevities

%8 08/03

%K eq.1917/07/28.ksf?

%X There was a rather severe shock of earthquake experienced in Hilo on Saturday evening last [Jul. 28] at half past eight o'clock.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1917

%T Lava column at Kilauea rises slightly during week; Most conspicuous object in the pit is great central crag mass which has slowly risen during summer to 76 feet above lake

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 5

%8 09/25

%K kl.hm.1917, eq.1917/09/15/klcaldeep??

%X Most of the article documents changes in the level of Halemaumau lava lake.

  "The seismographs of the Whitney Laboratory for the week ending at 10 a.m. Sept. 21, 1917, registered two local earthquakes which occurred two minutes apart in the very early morning of Sept. 15 and were generally felt in Kau and Hilo."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Pele, furious, flows into crater

%B Daily Post-Herald

%P p. 1, 6

%8 02/23

%K kl.hm.1918

%X [subheads: Two streams of fiery lava are reported to be pouring out of pit and covering roadway; four feet of lava now fills space where the automobiles have been parking; sudden rise early this morning; actual overflows began about five o'clock today after lava had trembled on brim of crater for several days.]

  An account of the first overflow of Halemaumau since the pit became continuously active in early 1907.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Lava wells over rim of pit onto floor of crater

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1, 5

%8 02/24

%K eq.1918/02/23.southhawaii, kl.hm.1918

%X [subheads]: Automobile parking corral filled level and fiery floods threaten to blot out crater road as far as bottom of gravel banks; lake now higher than ever before in history; earthquake felt in Hilo yesterday may mean apex of climax, but Jaggar believes overflow has not yet satisfied pressure.

  The article describes the rise and overflow of lava from Halemaumau onto the crater floor. This is the first time that the lava lake has overflowed since Halemaumau became continuously active again near the end of 1907. The third paragraph reads as follows:

  At 12:55 p.m. yesterday a sharp earthquake shock was felt in Hilo, indicating, perhaps, said Professor Jaggar, the apex of the crisis.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Many flows spread from Halemaumau into crater

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 02/24

%K kl.hm.1918, eq.1918/02/23.southhawaii?

%X [subheads: Auto road into crater threatened by latest reported flow, which broke over fire pit lip at six o'clock last night--phenomena of 1894 being repeated--tourists see marvelous sights]

  An account of the first overflow of Halemaumau since the pit became continuously active in early 1907.

 "There was a slight earthquake at the volcano, perceptible at Hilo, last night."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Volcano again overflows into road covering piece of land

%B Daily Post-Herald

%P p. 1, 6

%8 02/25

%K kl.hm.1918

%X   A continuing account of the first overflow of Halemaumau since the pit became continuously active in early 1907.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Quake shakes observatory

%B Daily Post-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 02/26

%K eq.1918/02/26.klcal0-5?, kl.hm.1918, hazard.lava flow

%X   [subheads: spectacular display feature of busiest night Goddess has had for many years; Professor Jaggar issues warning to visitors the crater to keep off new lava flows as they are dangerous; fresh overflows into southern basin; publicity expert L.W. de Vis Norton compliments police department upon efficient manner in which they have handled the crowds at Volcano]

    Late crater news

 A heavy local earthquake shook the Volcano observatory this morning shortly before 10 o'clock, throwing the needles off the rollers and upsetting the instruments.

 Professor Jaggar issued a warning to the visitors to the Pit against walking on the new lava flows. the type of lava, he says, is thin and exceedingly brittle, making it very dangerous to venture upon it unless one is thoroughly familiar with the conditions

  The lake overflowed from the southeast basin this morning.

 A broad stream of lava is reported to be flowing out of an old cone under the west bench.

 Beginning at 9:45 this morning and lasting for several seconds a severe earthquake shook the entire vicinity of the Volcano Observatory, throwing the needles of the seismographs off the rollers and in some instances upsetting instruments.

 As a rule these shocks when the lava lake is high are indicative of a coming subsidence of the level, but this morning Professor Jaggar declared that other indications lead him to believe that the lake will not fall for some time to come, and may indeed raise considerable more.

 The article continues with description of the overflow.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T New flow blots out another 400 feet of highway

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1, 2, 6

%8 02/26

%K kl.hm.1918

%X [subheads: Lava lake maintains it unprecedented level and brims over from its basin four more times since Saturday night's spill; Fearful pressure from beneath visible to all; Most suggestive aspect of Pit now is evidence of powerful upthrust held back by weight of main floor of Kilauea crater]

  The article describes the continuing rise and overflow of lava from Halemaumau onto the crater floor.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Two-thirds of volcano trail buried in lava; Hilo experiences sharp earthquake--Halemaumau displays intense activity

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 02/26

%K kl.hm.1918, eq.1918/02/26.klcal0-5?

%X [subheads: Auto road into crater threatened by latest reported flow, which broke over fire pit lip at six o'clock last night--phenomena of 1894 being repeated--tourists see marvelous sights]

  An account of the first overflow of Halemaumau since the pit became continuously active in early 1907.

 "At 9:25 tonight [Feb. 25] there was a sharp earthquake." [date/time disagrees with ESPHVO-2/26 9:42 am]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Crater crags 90 feet above lake; two more short flows and sharp earthquake but upthrust of whole area is most significant sight

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 02/27

%K kl.hm.1918, mech.lava lake.endogenous growth, eqs.mlswr.1916, eq.1918/02/26.klcal0-5?

%X The article describes the continuing rise and overflow of lava from Halemaumau onto the crater floor. The following quoted passages concern the process of magma rise.

 "But the most noteworthy symptom . . . was the extraordinary elevation of benches, crags and the floor of Kilauea itself. The highest crag of all had been lifted to a level where the topmost pinnacle was fully ninety feet above the pit rim.

 "A sharp local earthquake yesterday, so abrupt that it jarred the needle of the seismograph off the record chart, testified to a new adjustment of the rising column of stiff magma below the level of the lake.

 "Professor Jaggar is inclined to think that grinding friction between the magma and the walls that contain it may account for the earthquakes of much greater amplitude, during periods of rising, as well as do subterranean collapses in periods of depression. Just before the 1916 eruption of Mauna Loa, there was a whole flock of minor quakes registered at the Volcano Observatory, as the Mauna Loa column slowly forced its way to the surface."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Kilauea overflows into old crater; many changes are made by Pele

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 2

%8 03/01

%K eq.1918/02/26.klcal0-5??

%X The article describes the first overflow of Halemaumau [Feb. 23, 1918] since lava disappeared at the end of 1894. Lava continued to overflow on Feb. 28 and Mar. 1.

  "Beginning at 9:42 a.m. Tuesday [Feb. 26] and lasting for several seconds a severe earthquake shook the entire vicinity of the Volcano Observatory, throwing the needles of the seismographs off the rollers and in some instances upsetting instruments."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Former Kilauea scientist invents cannon detector

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 04/02

%K hvo.staff, seismology.history.instrument

%X Washington, April 1--H.O. Wood, formerly associated with Professor T.A. Jaggar, Jr., at the Kilauea Observatory, Hawaii, and now employed here by the Bureau of Standards, is engaged in perfecting an instrument whereby the tremors of the earth occasioned by the discharge of heavy guns can be used to determine the approximate distance and general direction from the point of observation. In his work he is using data gathered while he was seismologist at Kilauea.

  [This work led to the development of the Wood-Anderson seismograph, which, in the 1930's, became the standard instrument used to calibrate earthquake magnitudes.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Great lava lake of Halemaumau drops 150 feet

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 04/02

%K kl.hm.1918.subsidence

%X [subheads]: Swiftly and gently mighty core of volcano subsides, till summits of crags no longer are visible from the site of the [Volcano House] hotel; floor of crater looks like abandoned quarry; opening of crevasses and undercutting of walls present precarious aspect, with promise of tremendous avalanches to come.

  The article describes the rapid draining of Halemaumau lava lake beginning March 26, 1918. Earthquakes accompanying the collapse are mentioned in the Hilo Daily Tribune of April 9.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Lava lake stops falling, period of rising begins

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1-2

%8 04/09

%K kl.hm.1918.subsidence, eqs.1918/03/26-04/05.klcal0-5?

%X [subheads]: Halemaumau core subsides till pit resumes its old aspect of craggy hills and bubbly expanses of fiery lakes of lava; plunger of well sinks 260 feet in nine days; retrogression so gentle, yet swift, that spires and pinnacles of molten lake maintain balance while being carried down.

  The article describes the rapid draining of Halemaumau lava lake beginning March 26, 1918, and ending April 4. The lake moved down as a coherent mass, carrying  crags and islands intact. 

  "Numerous localized small earthquakes accompanied the movement of subsidence, increasing in vehemence as it increased and ceasing completely when recovery began. During the maximum these jars were quite perceptible at the edge of the pit."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Quake shakes Hilo; sharp vibration also felt in other parts of island

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 05/22

%K eq.1918/05/21.klcaldeep?

%X A sharp shock of earthquake was felt in Hilo at 3:31 yesterday afternoon. The quake was felt in many different parts of this island and from Kau, Kona, the Hamakua, Puna and north Hilo came reports of the shock being registered. The motion of swaying objects in Hilo showed the movement to have been on a north-south line

  Judge Quinn's court was sitting at the time of the earthquake and for three seconds or so the whole federal building shook violently. the temblor was felt all over Hilo and while no damage that can be noticed was done the buildings of the town shook a great deal.

   [The next paragraph describes damage done during the  earthquake of Sept. 20, 1908]

  The shock yesterday was felt slightly at the Volcano, but Professor Jaggar who visited the crater shortly afterward, noticed nothing unusual in the behavior of Halemaumau.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Profound quake sways Big Island; Kau and Kona roads full of loose stones; plates shaken from shelves in Naalehu; probably of distant origin

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 06/15

%K eq.1918/06/14.mlwf?

%X A strong earth movement, probably of distant origin, was distinctly felt In Hilo yesterday, at the Volcano House and in the Kona and Kau districts.

  The sensible duration of the movement In Hilo was about fifteen seconds beginning at 11:18 a.m. It could hardly be described as a shock. Rather did It seem a deep, slow, gentle swaying.

  Between Waiohinu and Kailua, Secretary Lane's party found the road filled with loose boulders that had rolled down hillsides and had been shaken free from dry stone walls.

  At the Crater there were several small slides of rock into the pit, but the movement to the ordinary person, going about his business, appears not to have been so noticeable as It was In Hilo and elsewhere. At Naalehu, for Instance, crockery standing on the shelves of the Aki store was thrown to the floor.

  As soon as Professor Jaggar felt the movement he ran to the seismograph. The pens had been jarred off the paper by the force of the first slip, and one of them was broken, The Professor readjusted the instrument and then stood there watching It write.

  "It was a curious performance," he said later, "to see the Instrument go on writing long after all sensible movement had disappeared. It gave one something the sensation of watching a Ouija board.

  "The first movement lasted 1 minute and 40 seconds, and, after I put the pens back on the chart, they kept writing for 40 minutes more. That is a record, I believe, for this observatory.

  "I haven't studied the charts very carefully as yet, but from the length of the movement and the deep, gentle character of the swaying, I should say that we probably were on the, outer edge of a big quake, possibly at a considerable distance. Unfortunately the pens jumped the start just at the phase that might have told us the approximate distance. However, I may learn more from closer study later. 

  "You know when the San Francisco earthquake reached Nevada It was felt there as, a deep gentle undulation. This movement had the same quality. That is why I think It was not of local origin."

  Swimmers at Coconut Island yesterday noticed that the water was muddy, and there was a jumbled, lumpy sea running, unlike the usual measured swell.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Secretary F.K. Lane enjoys volcano and quake

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 6

%8 06/21

%K eq.1918/06/14.mlwf?

%X . . . The earthquake which was felt in Hilo shortly after 11 o'clock yesterday morning, rocked the West Side like a boat at sea . . .

  It played havoc with the road in the vicinity of Manu-ka . . . The roadbed was disrupted, rocks were thrown into it, and crevices were opened. The condition was so bad that Secretary Lane's party attempting to pass that way later on was halted for some time while the road was being cleared . . .

  . . . .

  A tank of water which stood near where the road was torn up, was upset. Also, at Keokea a saloon had all the liquor bottles shaken off the shelves. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Pele's moods; lava lake slowly subsides, with no sign of rising as equinox of next week draws near

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 4

%8 09/17

%K kl.hm.1918, eq.1918/09/08.southhawaii

%X The article speaks mostly of the levels of Halemaumau lava lake during the week ending Sept. 13, 1918.

 "In the Whitney laboratory of Seismology the week has been a notable one in that three pronounced seismic movements have tested the new instruments satisfactorily. [The first, at 7 a.m., was a teleseism]. "About eight hours later a pronounced earthquake wave [T-phase of the teleseism] raised the waters of Hilo Bay some four feet and was observed in the Wailuku River . . . .

 "The next morning, Sept. 6 [sic; 8] about 7:40 a.m., a local earthquake felt generally in the southern part of the island was admirably registered on the rebuilt drum of the Bosch-Omori instruments, showing for the first time in routine registration at this station every detail of the timing and amplitude of the first preliminary tremor of a local earthquake.

 The seismograph was adjusted on Sept. 13 so that the smoked paper under the writing boult moved at the slow rate of only 3.5 centimeters in twenty four hours. . . . [Continues with description of the tilt motions of the Bosch-Omori].





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Hilo rattled by earthquake, but the damage is slight

%B Daily Post-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 11/02

%K eq.1918/11/01.kao

%X   At 11:33 last night there was one of the sharpest earthquakes felt in Hilo for a long time. The shake lasted for at least half a minute and while it was in progress people jumped from their beds and made their way to the tops of the stairways and out onto lanais, dressed in costumes that might be all right in Samoa for street wear but not in Hilo.

 The shake was a very severe one, yet there was not much damage done anywhere. In the Puueo district, where earthquakes are always felt more than on the city side of the Wailuku river, there were showers of crockery at some homes. Pictures swung out of line on the walls, clocks stopped, dogs barked and chickens began to wake up thinking they heard the morning rattle of dishes in the houses.

 The clock in the Post-Herald office stopped on the dot of 11:33 and other timepieces in the city did the same.

 Out along the North Hilo coast and in the Hamakua district the shock was a very sharp one. At Honokaa there was a real lively time. The mules in the plantation stables hee-hawed their heads off and horses squealed with fright.

 At Waimea . . . the quake woke everybody up . . .

 At the Hawaii Drug company it was reported that some slight damage was done to the stock

through the earthquake. Some bottles were shaken off the shelves but not broken.

 One lady, when the quake came to Puueo, made a leap for the window and only for the intervention of her husband would have suffered a serious fall.

  . . . it was a stiff shake at Honuapo, but no damage was done. . . .

 L.A. Aungst of Holualoa said the quake was felt good and stiff over in Kona, but that no damage has been reported so far.

 The guards at Kuhio wharf report a severe shock and, judging from all reports, it was felt heavier there than elsewhere. They report that there were three shocks in all, lasting over half a minute. The structure being on made ground no doubt made for the severity of the shake there.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Quake splits open Kilauea lava floor

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 11/03

%K eq.1918/11/01.kao, kl.hm.1918

%X [subheads]: Fire fountains active hundred feet and more back from Halemaumau edge--lava flows running toward and into pit; whole Big island gets severe shock; culmination of three days steady rising of crag islands and tilting up of center of Kilauea floor--no damage reported

  Hilo, November 3--The island of Hawaii shook Friday night from Hilo to Kohala, an earthquake of unusual sharpness occurring at eleven-thirty o'clock, attracting the attention of all and alarming some in the districts of Hilo, Kona, Kau, Hamakua and Kohala.

  Simultaneously the lava floor of Kilauea, which has been gradually tilting, was heaved upwards and on Saturday morning it was seen that the floor had been torn with wide cracks over a wide area.

  New lava outlets; Through these new orifices, lava was being expelled in great quantities, particularly at points near the site of the old rest house, a hundred feet back from the edge of the fire pit of Halemaumau and near the old stone house corral, where tourists used to leave their mounts during their visits to Pele's fiery shrine. . . .

  The seismic disturbance and the unusual activities at Kilauea are the culmination of three days steady rising of the inner crag islands in the fire pit with a pronounced back tilt of the whole floor of the crater from the fire lake in the center.

  The earthquake was a severe shake for this island, but no damage is reported greater than the shaking down of stone walls throughout many miles and the temporary blocking of some of the highways by the boulders rolled onto the roads.

  Most severe in years; Manager Monsaratt of the Kapapala Ranch reported that the quake of Friday night was the most severe shock for his section of the island since 1887, twenty-four? distinct tremors being counted. A half-mile long stone fence on the ranch was shaken down and water pipes were broken,

  At Mahukona doors were rattled as the houses twisted and the howling of frightened cows added to the midnight confusion of the shake. In may instances people leaped from their beds and dashed into the open, fearful lest the building might crash down upon them.

  Chairs in houses at Kawaihae slid across the floors of rooms.

  The damage was very small, consisting mainly of broken crockery and glassware at various points.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Worst quake since '87 says Julian Monsaraat

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1, 8

%8 11/03

%K eq.1918/11/01.kao, earthquake.aftershock

%X [subheads]: Water tank dished, stone wall tumbled, pipes broken and houses out of plumb at Kapapala; sleepers rush from beds at Mahukona. Twenty-six separate tremors felt in Kau; entire island shaken to core by disturbance originating at Kilauea, but damage done confined to breakage of glassware and crockery

    Originating in a volcanic disturbance which Professor Jaggar says lay directly under the mound of Halemaumau in Kilauea crater, Friday night's earthquake traveled straight through the vast bulk of Mauna Loa and Mauna Kea to the outermost margins of the Kohala coast, shaking the entire Island to Its very core.

  Reports of fright and astonishment flowed into Hilo from the different districts of the island all yesterday. Apparently the quake was felt in greatest force In Kau, where 26 shocks were counted, water pipes were broken and a stone wall shaken down.

Doors Slam, Dogs Howl.

  At Mahukona, doors slammed and  the houses rocked so violently that sleepers jumped from their beds and I ran out into the night, while the dogs howled dismally, as the earth swayed under their paws. At Kawaihae chairs slid across the floor and standing objects were toppled over.

  As in Hilo, the shock began at Kawaihae with a gentle swaying movement and ended with a sudden grinding wrench, accompanied by heavy subterranean noises. A strong gale sprang up Immediately after and was still blowing great guns last night.

  At Waimea, Senator Desha was  sufficiently roused to jump outdoors in his night clothes. Others in the same house slept through the whole disturbance.

Tenement Dwellers Affrighted

 The general impression in Hilo was that the final spasm was more severe than any shock felt here for several years past.

  Along the Hamakua coast no damage whatever was done, and in Hilo little beyond the breaking of small amounts of crockery. In some of the Japanese tenements, the effect of the  main shock was intensely felt, and the inhabitants were greatly alarmed. In one case, where there were  several children, and where the  crockery was broken, the children broke into cries, which the frightened mothers found it hard to quell.

  At the Waiakea house lots, the water tanks swayed and the water swished against the sides of the tanks but practically no damage was done. All around town the same reports were made, that no harm was done, but that fear followed the tremors.

  Considerable damage was done in Kau, according to a statement made by Julian Monsarrat, manager of the Kapapala ranch, where the shocks numbered 26. There were four very severe shocks, followed by six of a lighter degree, and then came sixteen more which might be classed as light, with an additional number not of sufficient force to warrant noting.

  The worst effects of the four severe shocks were the smashing of all the water pipes in the vicinity of the ranch manager's house, the demolition of the water tank and the casting down of approximately half a mile of stone wall. This much could be seen by Mr. Monsarrat yesterday, but there may be more damage on the outside which has not yet been ascertained.

Houses Out of Plumb.

  When the heavy shocks were felt in the house, everything that was stored loosely crashed to the ground, raising a vast amount of noise. The building itself stood the effect of the earthquake well, but several other structures In the vicinity settled on their foundations slightly, causing them to sag somewhat, but not sufficient to render them dangerous.

  Tables, chairs, beds, and other pieces of furniture were moved in most of the houses. In fact, a piano in the manager's dwelling was shifted between six  and eight inches, while some of the beds and tables moved about one foot.

Worst Shock Since 1887.

  "This is the worst series of earthquakes I have experienced since 1887,"   said Mr. Monsarrat yesterday. "'Then they were much more severe, but this one beats anything meantime. It looks to me as though there will be an outbreak at the Volcano, if there has not already been one. We cannot see from here. as the mountain is very much overcast I would not be surprised to see these shocks repeated, unless there Is an outbreak at the crater.

  "It will cost something to repair the damaged wall here, but aside from that there is not much serious damage. Owing to the smashing of the water pipes, we are without water just now."

  With the exception of the report from Kapapala ranch, little damage seems to have been done in Kau. From Waiohinu, it is reported that no  damage was done, and similar reports come from Naalehu, Pahala and Meila. A strong wind is blowing at Waiohinu, in fact, almost a gale has raged for the past few days.

Clocks Stopped at Kealakekua.

  South Kona reports a hard shock, but no damage at Kealakekua or Napoopoo; nothing more than the stopping of a clock at the latter place. The intensity of the shock alarmed people, but nothing further.

  At Kailua, M.M. Springer states that the earthquake lasted about thirty seconds strong but of an easy rocking motion. It was felt all over the North Kona district, and at Honokohau rocked water tanks sufficiently to spill the water.

  People at Honokaa were frightened, but the tremor soon ceased and as it began very slightly and then only Increased a little, the fear soon died down.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Temblors felt on Oahu

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 3

%8 11/04

%K eq.1918/11/01.kao, earthquake.aftershock

%X The Island of Hawaii was shaken by not less than 26 seismic waves between 11 and 12 o'clock Friday [Nov. 1] night, one of the heavier vibrations being felt at Waikiki and at other points along the shore of this island, Renewed activity in Halemaumau cauldron, observed Saturday morning, suggested that as the center of the disturbance, although the vibrations appear to have been heavier on the west side of the mountains around Kapapala ranch and toward the Konas and Kau. Julian Montserrat, manager of the Kapapala ranch, reports that the shocks were the heaviest felt there since 1887. There was no property damage so far as is known.

  Earthquake shocks on the west half of Hawaii of those of the intensity of Friday night may indicate activity in Mokuaweoweo, near the top of Mauna Loa, although not necessarily so. Shocks have come from Kilauea many times before when there were no manifestations whatever in the region of the mountain top, but any disturbance in Mokuaweoweo is responded to at once in similar activity in Halemaumau.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Earth shakes Maui folk out of dreams

%B Maui News

%P p. 1

%8 11/08

%K eq.1918/11/01.kao

%X [subheads]: Sharp seismic disturbance felt all over Territory last Friday--Most severe on Hawaii--Kilauea opens new outlets for lava.

  Many persons on Maui were shaken from their slumbers about 11:30 o'clock last Friday night [Nov. 1] by a real, goodness-to-gracious earthquake. the tremblor was one of the sharpest that has been felt on Maui for years, making dishes in the pantry rattle and pictures on the wall shake ominously. No danger however, has been reported and the disturbance did not last long.

  The quake, which probably originated in connection with volcanic disturbances on the Island of Hawaii, was more severe there than here, being reported to have been one of the heaviest in 20 years. Roads were blocked by rocks shaken from the hills and  a lot of stone fences in Kau and Kona were tumbled down, but otherwise there was little loss of property reported.

  The most interesting feature of the shock is in connection with the behavior of the lava pit in Kilauea volcano. The pit has been very full, and the earthquake apparently opened a number of large cracks in the floor of the main crater through which lava is flowing into parts of the big crater that have seen no live lava for many years. The old stone rest house is reported overwhelmed as well as the stone shelter for horses not far distant.

 On Oahu no less than 26 waves of earthquake were recorded.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1918

%T Mme. Pele has sinking spell; crags and lake sink fifty feet in twelve hours; one small quake

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 11/15

%K eq.1918/11/14.klcal0-5?, kl.hm.1918.subsidence

%X The article describes the draining of Halemaumau lava lake, similar to the subsidence of the preceding April.

  "One slight earthquake, not reported yesterday in Hilo, was felt at the volcano early in the morning."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Earthquake on Monday

%B Maui News

%P p. 1

%8 01/31

%K eq.1919/01/27.molokai?

%X A very brief but sharp earthquake shock was felt on Maui on Monday afternoon [Jan. 27] at 5 o'clock by many persons in different parts of the island.

  According to the Honolulu papers the shock was felt also on Oahu. Professor Romberg, of the College of Hawaii, is quoted as of the opinion that the shake was local on Oahu, within a radius of perhaps not over 20 miles.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Earthquake hits Maui

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P second section, p. 1

%8 02/02

%K eq.1919/01/27.molokai?

%X A very brief but sharp earthquake shock was felt on Maui on Monday afternoon [Jan. 27] at 5 o'clock by many persons in different parts of the island, says the Maui news last Friday [Jan. 31].

  According to the Honolulu papers the shock was felt also on Oahu. Professor Romberg, of the College of Hawaii, is quoted as of the opinion that the shake was local on Oahu, within a radius of perhaps not over 20 miles.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Pele had quieter moods last week; reaction from recent high gas pressure causes sinking spell

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 3

%8 02/05

%K kl.hm.1919, eq.1919/01/27.molokai?

%X The article speaks mostly of the levels of Halemaumau lava lake during the last week of January, 1919.

 " . . .the seismographs have registered a near shock on the afternoon of January 29 [sic-Jan.. 27], which was felt in Honolulu. . . ."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T New crater trail again covered by overflow of lava

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 02/26

%K kl.hm.1919, kl.cal.1919, eq.1919/02/25.ksf?, mech.earthquake

%X [subheads: Outpouring of two streams from southeast heap followed by sharp earthquake felt throughout Island]

 The article describes the overflows that began the 9-month-long overflow onto the Kilauea caldera floor.

 "At 9:35 last night a sharp, grinding, abrupt earthquake was felt in Hilo, at the Volcano House, in the Puna district generally, and even in the Kohalas. Kawaihae noted that it was strongly felt at the wireless station."

    Reason for the earthquake

 "Like the last earthquake felt throughout the Island, the present disturbance came during a period of high pressure relieved by an overflow, and probably is to be accounted for in the same manner--a slump in the column of semi-solid lava caused by release of support when the imprisoned liquid found a vent and gushed out onto the floor of Kilauea."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Two-thirds of volcano trail buried in lava; Hilo experiences sharp earthquake--Halemaumau displays intense activity

%B Pacific Commercial advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 02/26

%K kl.cal.1919, eq.1919/02/25.ksf?

%X Hilo, February 25--Two streams of lava began overflowing from the crater of Halemaumau at 5 o'clock tonight. The flows are on the southeast side and already have buried two-thirds of the newly-constructed trail. At 8 o'clock tonight the flows were still in progress.

 At 9:25 tonight there was a sharp earthquake.

%O Repeated in Maui News of Feb. 28, 1919



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Treacherous lava crusts trap feet of crater hikes

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 02/27

%K kl.hm.1919, kl.cal.1919, eq.1919/02/25.ksf?, eq.1918/09/08.southhawaii, hazard.lava flow, mech.earthquake

%X [subheads: Jaggar says brittle blisters of latest flow where it covered trail should be broken in by County; Three trig stations out of four useless; Tuesday night's earthquake explained as product of upward thrust of main lava column, not backslip]

 The article describes the overflows that began the 9-month-long overflow onto the Kilauea caldera floor.

    Upward pressure caused quake

 " . . . Nor was the local quake, as recorded by the instruments, similar to that of last fall, which also occurred during a period of rising.

 "That shock [earthquake of Sept. 8, 1918, felt over the southern half of the island] came from a slip or slump of the Earth's crust, after the interior pressure had been relieved by the flow and the semi-solid column of lava sank abruptly to lower levels." Tuesday night's quake appeared to be the product of upward pressure, which still continues."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Pele feels very lively

%B Maui News

%P p. 5

%S On the other islands

%8 02/28

%K kl.cal.1919, eq.1919/02/25.ksf?

%X Hilo, February 25--Two streams of lava began overflowing from the crater of Halemaumau at 5 o'clock tonight. The flows are on the southeast side and already have buried two-thirds of the newly-constructed trail. At 8 o'clock tonight the flows were still in progress. At 9:25 tonight there was a sharp earthquake.

%O Repeated from Pacific Commercial Advertiser of Feb. 26, 1919



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Explores summit Halemaumau dome; Prof. Jaggar gives graphic description of view into heart of volcano

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 7

%8 06/10

%K kl.hm.1919.subsidence, kl.cal.1919, eq.1919/06/02.hil?

%X  The article describes a minor subsidence in Halemaumau accompanying the 9-month-long overflow onto the Kilauea caldera floor.

    Local earthquakes

 "The seismographs of the Whitney Laboratory for the week ending June 6 have registered local quakes-May 31 1:49 a.m. and 5:16 p.m.; a very pronounced shock of large amplitude at 4:14 p.m. June 2, not felt here, but felt strongly in the district of Kau to the south; slight shocks 1:38 a.m. June 4, 10:15 p.m. June 5, and 4:50 p.m. June 6."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Torrents of lava downward rush

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 5

%8 06/17

%K kl.hm.1919.subsidence, kl.cal.1919

%X [subheads: Prof. Jaggar gives graphic description of Volcano activities for week past; Molten falls all aglow; Notwithstanding a continual emptying of lakes they do not lower]

 The article documents continuing subsidence of the Halemaumau lava column associated with the ongoing eruption on the floor of Kilauea caldera. Earthquakes reported are all slight.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Volcano sinking walls and lakes

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 4

%8 07/09

%K kl.hm.1919.subsidence, kl.cal.1919

%X [subheads: Prof. Jaggar gives graphic description of subsidence, lava; floors falling; Lava fountains active; Famous Postal river of fire slowly drying up as substance pours into depths]

 The article documents continuing subsidence of the Halemaumau lava column associated with the ongoing eruption on the floor of Kilauea caldera. Earthquakes reported are all slight.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Islands are shaken up by earthquake

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 09/15

%K eq.1919/09/14.hil?

%X Hilo, Hawaii, Sept. 15.--A severe earthquake was felt here Sunday afternoon [Sept. 14] at 5:22 o'clock. Slight damage was reported by the drug stores, where many bottles were broken. At the same time a large cliff at Kilauea volcano fell into the crater.

 According to Professor Arnold Romberg of the College of Hawaii a severe shock was registered in Honolulu at exactly the same time by the seismograph at the college. The shock was so severe, he said that he believed that many people must have felt it in the city.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Big Island has regular old style Pele shakeup

%B Daily Post-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 09/15

%K eq.1919/09/14.hil?, earthquake.damage

%X   At Hilo and the surrounding districts right up to the Volcano in one direction and Waimea in the other, received a great shakeup yesterday afternoon at 5:22 o'clock when an earthquake that lasted for about 6 seconds was experienced. The first rumbling of the earthquake was heard a second or two before the actual shake. then came a minor quiver which was followed by a much stronger one which eventually died down to about the strength of the first one.

 At the Waiakea homestead tract the earthquake worried many of the farmers, whose houses are not yet complete. Other householders were also frightened that their tanks would be thrown down from their high perches, but nothing like that happened.

  In Hilo the quake was felt distinctly and some damage was done through bottles of drugs being thrown from the shelves in the Hilo and Hawaii Drug Stores. A plate glass window in the first named store was also broken. In all, the Hawaii Drug company lost about $200 worth of drugs and glassware and the Hilo Drug company, including the window, about $150.

 In the local board of health office two jars . . . broke . . .

 Visitors to the crater of Halemaumau yesterday afternoon say that at 5:21 there was a strong quake felt and a huge cliff of lava fell with a great splash into the pit. . . .

 At the Volcano House the quake was severe and guests state that the whole building swung to and fro.

 The Hilo police courthouse was moved back and forth for quite a time and the groaning of the ancient timber in the structure was heard a good distance away.

 . . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Earthquake does great damage at Kau plantations; Mills damaged, flumes broken and reservoirs cracked by the worst temblor in years

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 09/16

%K eq.1919/09/14.hil?, earthquake.damage

%X The most severe earthquake in the history of the plantations of that district visited Kau, Hawaii, at 5:56 o'clock Sunday evening, damaging mills, breaking flume lines, cracking reservoirs and wrecking stone fences.

 A letter sent before a full damage assessment had been made reported that reservoirs mauka were cracked by the shock, which is described as a "twister." Upper flumes were dislocated and broken and the dwellings of four of the skilled employees were twisted from their underpinnings. some of the pipes in the mill were twisted and broken . . . 

 No reports yet from Kapapala Ranch or Hutchinson Sugar.

 The shock was felt over most of the island of Hawaii, but was probably heaviest in Kau.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Whole island is shaken by quake; Expected: Jaggar

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 09/16

%K eq.1919/09/14.hil?

%X Subheads: Approach of Equinox Should Bring Temblor Volcanologist Says as He Departed for Visit to Honolulu.

  Effect on fire pit to be seen shortly

  Seismograph Unable to Record Entire Shock; Minor Damage in City; Kohala Stone Walls Fall.

  Sunday evening's earthquake was to be expected at the approach of the equinox., said Professor T.A. Jaggar Jr., yesterday. It Is always at that time that the Volcano shows extra activity, and tremblings of the earth , follow, the vagaries of Madame Pele.

  No change was visible in Kilauea crater Sunday evening as, result of the quake, but Professor Jaggar says evidence of' the temblor probably will be apparent In the fire pit within a day or two. . . . .

Came at 5:22

  The earthquake came at 5:22 Sunday afternoon at the Volcano. The seismographic Instruments at the observatory recorded It up to the peak and then flew the track, so that it was impossible to obtain a complete record. The action of the instruments shows the severity of the shock, which Professor Jaggar said was harder than the one of last November, which startled so many Hilo inhabitants and did damage all around the Island.

  Early diners in restaurants, pedestrians on the streets stay-at-homes, and travelers all felt the quake Sunday. At the Hawaii Bakery a number of gobs were enjoying a meal when the shake began. Nearly all of them began a rush for the door .but returned to their seats before actually forsaking their food In favor of the middle of the avenue.

Benches Swaying

  People sitting In parks felt the benches sway under them, and some of. the high lumber piles along Kamehameha Avenue fell with a crash. Bottles went down from the shelves In the drug stores, and a plate glass window was broken In the Hilo Drug Co. Clocks stopped all over the city, doors opened and shut In uncanny fashion, and dishes fell from cupboards and broke in a number of homes.  No water tanks were wrecked at Waiakea, though many of the homesteaders were afraid of such a mishap. The quake was felt all over the Island, from Kohala on the north to Puna on the south. At Puna the shock was not sharp, but strong and of long duration, and the movement seemed to have a corkscrew twist at intervals. Faint shocks could be felt a minute and a half after the first quake.  

  A number of stone walls fell in Kohala, which suffered the same sort  of damage from the November earthquake. Minor damage was done in all districts of the Island but no serious mishaps occurred, according to reports obtained yesterday.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T ?

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. ?

%8 09/18

%K eq.1919/09/14.hil?, earthquake.aftershock

%X  [an] extremely heavy earthquake shock felt throughout the island of Hawaii, Maui and Honolulu; ground motion continued for one hour, slow swaying like teleseism; 22 hours of aftershocks in Hilo; probably deep-seated





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T New volcano at Kaumana began riot

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 09/19

%K eq.1919/09/14.hil?

%X The article describes the panic engendered by the earthquake of Sept. 14.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Light earthquake shocks felt here

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 3

%8 09/19

%K eq.1919/09/14.hil?, eq.1919/09/18.hil?, earthquake.aftershock

%X [subheads: Second temblor in week wakes people at 3:40 yesterday morning; Heavy quake at Puu Oo; Naalehu and Waimea report no disturbance; rouses Peter at Volcano House]

 Three shocks of earthquake, two of them comparatively light, were  felt throughout Hilo at 3:40 a.m. yesterday, but no damage was done in the city. A great many persons were awakened from their morning slumbers by the severity of the third shock, but it was not as strong as that experienced on Sunday last {Sept. 14, 1919].

 In one home . . . two little girls were frightened by the shaking of the house and burst into screams. . . .

 Although the shocks were severely felt in Hilo, reports from Naalehu and Waimea yesterday stated that no quake was felt in those places. If there was a shock it was too light to waken anyone from sleep.

    Other places felt shock

 A long but not heavy shock was felt at Puu Oo, but no damage was done . . . The quake was not severe at Kapapala, and no damage was done there, but some stone walls ere said to have shaken down in Pahala.

 At the Volcano House the shock awakened Peter from sleep . . . Peter said that this shock was only the fifth which had been ever severe enough to be felt since he went to the Volcano House.

    Sunday's quake at Kau

 Letters to Honolulu from James Campsie, manager of the Hawaiian Agricultural Company, at Kau, stated that the quake of last Sunday [Sept. 14, 1919] twisted and broke pipes in the mill, broke upper flumes, and twisted some buildings from their underpinnings, as reported in the Star-Bulletin.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Mauna Loa flow subsides; glare vanishes; activity continues for 24 hours, then stops, says wireless from Big Island observers

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P second section, p. 1

%8 09/28

%K eq.1919/09/14.hil?, ml.swr.1919, earthquake.aftershock

%X An account of the beginning of the 1919 Mauna Loa southwest rift eruption. A report from Kawaihae places the beginning at 6:30 p.m. on Friday [Sept. 26].

  "The extremely heavy earthquake shock felt throughout the island of Hawaii and even on Maui and here in Honolulu, was undoubtedly the warning sign of an approaching equinoctial crisis, according to L.W. de Vis Norton of the Hawaiian volcano Research Association. The shock took place at 5:20 p.m. on Sunday the 14th of September and the actual movement of the ground continued for more than an hour afterward in slow period swayings resembling a teleseism, while the swarm of felt aftershocks, continuing with gradually decreasing intensity at Hilo for some 22 hours after the primary shock, proved that the origin was deep-seated. Another shock took place on September 18, and the appearance of these earthquakes with maximum effect between Kilauea and Mauna Loa pointed very strongly to a crisis at the equinox a few days later."

  The remainder of the article speculates on the relation between Kilauea and Mauna Loa. de Vis Norton opines that the 1919 Mauna Loa eruption is a continuation of the aborted 1916 eruption and that, following the end of Mauna Loa activity, Kilauea will subside from the high level sustained since 1918.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Flame-red lava spouting 250 feet in air found at source of flow; hundreds along coast of Kona are menaced by tidal wave

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1, 5

%8 10/03

%K tsu.1919.ml, ml.swr.1919

%X [subheads]: Carlsmith family hurled into sea by rush of water; scores of others in peril in submarine disturbance extending from Kailua to Hoopuloa; revolt by Neptune cause, say Hawaiians; fifteen-foot backwash leaves bed of ocean bare and thousands of fish are seen flopping around

  From Hoopuloa--where the family of C.S. Carlsmith had a narrow escape from death--to Kailua the Kona coast was swept by a tidal wave early yesterday [Oct. 2].

  In the backrush of water which followed the waves were from 4 to 15 feet in height according to the various distances from Alika, where the lava from Mauna Loa is cascading into the sea.

  At Hoopuloa, where four members of the Carlsmith family were caught and nearly perished, the waves were fully 15 feet in height. At Keauhou, where the lanai of Thom White's beach house was washed by the waves their height was about 8 feet. when the back rush of waves swept the beach at Kaiolua, nearer the northern end of the Kona coast, their height was not more than 4 feet. . . .

  The disturbance of the sea is attributed to the Mauna Loa eruption, either because the pouring of water into the water at Alika, not far from Hoopuloa, or to the opening of a crack at sea, because of volcanic action, into which the water was sucked.

[The remainder of the article gives detailed accounts of the waves at different points]

%O A separate article entitled "Big eruption on Mauna Loa traced to 8,000 foot elevation" gives details of the eruption from Mauna Loa's southwest  rift zone.



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Tidal wave on Hawaii plays queer pranks; tank carried out to sea and returned intact

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 10/06

%K tsu.1919.ml, ml.swr.1919

%X [subheads: Hilo attorney Carlsmith and his wife narrowly escape death--Madame Pele also displays peculiar vagaries]

  An account of a tidal wave at Hoopuloa, associated with the 1919 eruption of Mauna Loa





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Kilauea getting ready for more fireworks, report; Jaggar reports activity is due; lava flow down Kona side is great spectacle

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 10/16

%K ml.swr.1919, eqs.1919.10/15.hil?

%X A brief account of the continuing flow into the sea from the eruption from Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone.

 "There was a recurrence of small earthquakes or tremblors measured at the United States observatory yesterday."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Fear, admiration run close race in Hilo when Mauna Loa's glare lights up heavens over Island

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1, 6

%8 10/16

%K ml.swr.1919, eqs.1919/10/15-16.hil?

%X [subheads: Professor Jaggar in explanation--says fume cloud over Kilauea flattened out at proper elevation to serve as refracting mirror, thus throwing almost full glare of the flow in Kona in view of residents of this city--no danger here, he says; Kona phone manager reports creeping flow burning all in path; Kau rancher tells of seeing sight from lanai of home 20 miles away--view similar to that on night Alika stream broke away on dash to sea--volcanologist tells of visit to source and why he thinks lava cannot climb ridge and come down this side]

 A description of the ongoing eruption from Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone includes the following section covering the associated seismic activity.

    Swarms of small quakes

 One notable feature is that during the past 48 hours there has been a swarm of small earthquakes, which were recorded at the observatory. This may signify the beginning of the end. It may be the settling of the Mauna Loa center, which I [Jaggar] would be inclined to credit, if there should be any sinking shown by the lava in Kilauea. But as Kilauea is active and high, it may be that these shocks indicate more activity on the part of Mauna Loa. In view of this I am in doubt as to whether it is a gentle shaking down to the finish or getting ready for more outbursts."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Sharp earthquake shock felt on Maui

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 11/26

%K eq.1919/11/25.maui?

%X Wailuku, Nov. 26--A sharp earthquake was felt here last night at three minutes after 10 and lasting several seconds. It started as a heavy jar, rattling the doors and windows. No damage is reported.

  Whether or not the shock was felt in Honolulu is not known, because the instrument for registering earthquakes at the college of Hawaii has been out of order, according to Professor Arnold Romberg.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Volcano crater drops 400 feet; Hilo is shaken

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 11/26

%K eqs.1919/11/28.klerz?

%X Hilo, Nov. 28--The crater of Halemaumau collapsed this morning at 2 o'clock and sank 400 feet making the pit much larger than formerly. Crags fell continuously. There were ten earthquakes.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Maui gets jarred by sharp earthquake

%B Maui News

%P p. 1

%8 11/28

%K eq.1919/11/25.maui?

%X Perhaps the sharpest earthquake shock on Maui in many years was that which occurred about 10 o'clock last Tuesday night [Nov. 25].

  It came as a heavy jolt or jar which set doors and windows to rattling, and the vibration continued in diminishing strength for several seconds. Persons in the upper floors of frame buildings felt the quake especially, many being awakened by the trembling of the buildings and the noise of loose objects in the rooms.

  Those who were awake describe the shock as comparable to the concussion of a heavy explosion, with the resulting vibration as things settled back to normal.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Bottom drops out of volcano pit, lowering lava 500 feet; subsidence occurs early this morning following series of sharp earthquake shocks, Prof. Jaggar announces; heavy gas pressure released by fissures

%B Daily Post-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 11/28

%K eqs.1919/11/28.klerz?, kl.hm.1919.subsidence

%X   Unusual activity of both lakes at Kilauea last night, followed by a number of quite severe earthquake shocks, some of which were felt at Waiakea, preceded a sudden drop of the lava to a point about 500 feet below the crater's rim at 2 o'clock this morning. . . .

 The rest of the article describes the subsidence.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Sharp earthquakes in early morning arouse Volcano residents and herald disappearance of fire pit

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1, 6

%8 11/29

%K eqs.1919/11/28.klerz?, kl.hm.1919.subsidence, halemaumau crater.dimension

%X Sharp local earthquakes, strongly and almost continuously felt at the Volcano House and at Twenty-nine Miles preceded and accompanied the collapse yesterday of Halemaumau. A. T. Short, of the Crater Hotel, counted 32 distinct shocks. "Jim," the. Japanese bookkeeper at the Volcano House, said he got no sleep after half past one, so rapidly did one tremor follow another.

  H.B. Mariner, who was spending the night in his cottage at Twenty-nine Miles, was wakened by a severe shock at 1:25 a.m. "At first I thought it was the wind swaying the house," he said, "but getting wider awake and finding the house swaying continuously, I knew it was an earthquake. The swaying continued until 3 o'clock, when I went to sleep again. I was surprised on my return to Hilo to learn the shocks had not been felt here."

  Several persons [in Hilo?] reported to the Tribune last night that they believed they had felt light tremors early yesterday morning.

  Professor Jaggar, in his cottage adjoining the observatory, was roused between 1:30 and 2 o'clock. By the time he could get to a vantage point nearby, the domelike mass marking the summit of the Halemaumau column could be seen in the glow of the surrounding fire lakes, slowly sinking. While he still gazed, it disappeared below the rim of the pit. The entire subsidence had taken not more than half an hour, and by the time he could dress, drive down into the crater and walk to the pit, the lakes, domes, crags separating walls between the lakes, and pressure ridges enclosing them, were down 400 feet.

  . . . .

  . . . In the final paragraph, Jaggar is quoted as saying: "It is now a pit 1200 feet across at its greatest diameter and roughly a mile in circumference, with a depth of about 500 feet. . . ."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Crater bottom falls 400 feet on Big Island; Jaggar watches Halemaumau pit subside--quakes shake isle for two hours

%B Pacific Commercial Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 11/29

%K kl.hm.1919, eqs.1919/11/28.klerz?

%X Hilo, November 29--(Special to the Advertiser)--Beginning at 2 o'clock yesterday morning, Halemaumau crater sank 400 feet within an hour, leaving an elliptical pit approximately a mile in circumference. The walls are perpendicular and for the most part follow the former contour of the crater.

 A sharp earthquake roused Professor Jaggar, government volcanologist, who, leaping to his window, was able to see the crags and central cone still silhouetted in the glow from the sinking lakes. Before the government expert could reach the pit, however, the domes, crags, pressure ridges and all other familiar landmarks noiselessly vanished.

 The new walls of the crater glowed red after the sinking, while tunnels and pockets spirited lava into the depths. A continuous succession of sharp local quakes kept the guests of Volcano House and other residents of the neighborhood awake for two hours. There was no disturbance at Hilo.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Jaggar pleads for maps to forestall menace of flows

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1, 6

%8 12/02

%K hazard.lava flow, hazard mitigation

%X [subheads: U.S. Geological Survey willing to spend dollar for dollar with Territory on improvement, he says; Present records are held to be inadequate; Ad club members hear talk on how property may be protected from lava; Extension of present record would aid in forestalling menace, claim]

 A plea from Jaggar for more topographic mapping, particularly on the Big Island where lava flows present a danger. Residents need the maps to know exactly what of their property was destroyed after a lava flow moves through the land.





%0 Journal Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1919

%T Seismological notes

%J Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America

%V v. 9

%N no. 4

%P p. 141

%K eqs.1919.klcal

%X Kilauea, Hawaii, November 25,1919.„The Associated Press announces a collapse in the crater of Kilauea accompanied by earthquake jars. The lava is said to have fallen four hundred feet.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1920

%T Hilo rocked by quake; residents somewhat shaken by disturbance

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 03/14

%K eq.1920/03/13/ksf??

%X A slight earthquake shock was felt in Hilo at 11 o'clock last night, of sufficient force to shake desks and chairs in the Tribune office and send the occupants hurrying to the doors. It was also felt in the resident districts of the city. Neither the observatory or the hotels at the Volcano could be reached by telephone.  A Japanese who answered the phone at Nineteen Miles Olaa said the shock was not felt there.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1920

%T Hard earthquake wakes sleepers--no damage done

%B Maui News

%P p. 4

%8 05/21

%K eq.1920/05/15.maui?

%X Hundreds of persons on Maui were awakened from their sleep between 2 and 2:30 o'clock last Saturday morning [May 15] by one of the sharpest earthquake shocks felt on Maui in years. The tremblor lasted for several seconds and caused some alarm among the more nervous individuals. No damage has been reported.

  The shake was felt in Honolulu where as reported in the Honolulu papers it appeared to be two distinct shocks. If it was also felt on the Big Island, as seems likely from its violence, no mention was made of it in the Hilo papers--perhaps for the reason that they are used to earth shocks over there, and also for the reason that Hilo people, like those of San Francisco, are somewhat sensitive on the subject.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1920

%T Earthquake and eclipse early today

%B Daily Post-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 10/27

%K eq.1920/10/27.ksf?

%X The first two paragraphs discuss an eclipse of the sun.

  Following the eclipse, and occurring at 5:35 a.m. there was a pronounced earthquake shock, three distinct rocking motions being observable, followed by a somewhat lengthy shivering. Houses tipped back and forth and sleepers were awakened. The tremor was felt in all districts of Hilo.

%O Reprinted verbatim in Hawaii Herald of Oct. 29



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1920

%T Earthquake and eclipse early today

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 8

%8 10/29

%K eq.1920/10/27.ksf?

%X The first two paragraphs discuss an eclipse of the sun.

  Following the eclipse, and occurring at 5:35 a.m. there was a pronounced earthquake shock, three distinct rocking motions being observable, followed by a somewhat lengthy shivering. Houses tipped back and forth and sleepers were awakened. The tremor was felt in all districts of Hilo.

%O Text verbatim from Daily Post Herald of Oct. 27



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Earthquake shock furnishes thrill; Japanese workmen worried; Puueo housemaid fails to grasp elusive clothes pole

%B Daily Post-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 02/21

%K eq.1922/02/21.ksf?

%X The earthquake that shook Hilo this morning found many citizens in an uncomfortable position.

  One resident reports that he was just descending the stairs when the tremor came, and he descended more rapidly than gracefully.

  One of the housemaids in Puueo district was putting out the morning washing, when suddenly the clothes pole began to sway back and forth wildly. The girl grasped frantically for the wandering pole, but it continued to evade her until the quake had subsided. She picked herself up from the ground.

  A Japanese workman on the new Pacific Bakery was probably the most frightened victim of the quake. He was working on the tower being erected to pour in the concrete, when the tremor caused the tower to shake like a 'Frisco shimmy dancer, the worker greatly frightened hung on with his arms and legs entwined in the rigging until the shock was over.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Severe quake is brief thriller for tourists

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 5

%8 03/14

%K eq.1922/03/12.klcaldeep??

%X On Sunday afternoon [Mar. 12] an earthquake shock, slightly more severe than that of a month ago [Feb. 21], shook Hilo for possibly 30 seconds. Aside from some crashes of china on plate rails no damage was done. Houses quivered slightly and some of the buildings in the business zone did a bit of a "shimmy dance," but that was all.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Great fall in volcano pit at Kilauea

%B Daily Post-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 05/27

%K eqs.1922/05/20-26.klerz, kl.hm.1922.subsidence

%X  [subheads: Lava down to 600 feet below level of rim; tremendous slides into vortex; All danger signs go down with falling rim; Great cauliflower clouds color the air above the tremendous seething mass]

 The lava pit at the Volcano went down with a great rush early this morning and is continuing to fall with tremendous perturbation. . . . Earthquakes are frequent in all the region. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Kilauea erupts near sea

%B Daily Post-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 05/29

%K kl.erz.1922, eqs.1922/05/20-28.klerz

%X  [subheads: Makaopuhi extinct crater breaks out near Kalapana; following days of tremblors felt frequently in Hilo; old crevice becomes alive; tremendous activities in Kilauea; Dr. Jaggar makes report]

 Following nine days of almost continuous tremblors the long dead crater Makaopuhi halfway between Kilauea and the sea broke out with a stream of lava which lighted up the whole vicinity so it was easy to see from Hilo.

 . . .

 Dr. Jaggar said the outbreak was heralded by the numbers of earthquakes which have been felt for a fortnight. He was out all day yesterday in the desert of Kau looking for possible outbreaks to explain the sudden drop in Kilauea lava. He says there are many cracks about Makaopuhi which may become active anytime. He advises people to be prepared along the shore at Kalapana for earthquake shocks. A close watch will be kept daily on the cracks about Makaopuhi where it has not been active before since 1840.

 The rest of the article describes the outbreak at Makaopuhi.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Flow of lava from Kilauea may reach ocean

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 05/29

%K eqs.1922/05/20-28.klerz, kl.hm.1922.subsidence, kl.erz.1922

%X  [subheads: Volcano sinks, breaking out in new place; Fire pit falls almost 1000 feet and lava now flows in old Makaopuhi crater; spectacular collapse at Halemaumau is greatest known in last 36 years]

Hilo, May 29.--The Volcano of Kilauea broke out at 9 o'clock last night at a new point half way between Kilauea and Kalapana. The main lava pit is now down an additional 700 feet.

 The lava broke through the dead Makaopuhi crater, on the upper side in a fissure, two feet wide, much higher than the bed of the crater itself which slopes off toward the sea. The lower rim, it is believed, will soon overflow. should the flow continue it would make a river of lava from the crater to the sea five miles distant. In that event, Kalapana, in the Puna district, would be in danger. The preceding descriptions appears to apply to Napau, not Makaopuhi, crater.

 . . . .

 Previous to the outbreak there were daily earthquakes every half hour for several days.

 The article continues with more description of the eruption in Makaopuhi and the collapse at Halemaumau, claiming it as the biggest since 1886.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Still another old crater fills with lava; great sight; roar of cascading molten rock is heard far away--fiery stream recalls the famous Alika flow

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 05/30

%K kl.erz.1922, kl.hm.1922.subsidence

%X A description of the eruption in Napau crater, beginning about 9:30 p.m. on Sunday May 28, and the accompanying subsidence of Halemaumau.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Volcanic activity in Puna district increasing

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1, 3

%8 05/30

%K eqs.1922/05/20-25.klerz.ksf?, kl.hm.1922.subsidence, kl.erz.1922, mech.eruption

%X  [subheads: Kilauea lava draining into old craters; Molten rock is now pouring into two ancient pits and others are smoking; Jaggar does not believe underground flow will 'bleed' Kilauea to death]

 The article describes the continuing eruption in Panau [sic-Napau] crater. Jaggar believes the [eruption] "was caused by a series of earthquakes of daily occurrence throughout two weeks preceding last Sunday, causing a rupture of the underground tube that feeds Halemaumau, permitting the lava flowing from a higher level to find a new exit in a place of least resistance."

 The article continues with further accounts of the eruption. As part of Jaggar's official report, the following statement is made:

 "The spectacular sinking reported last week continued at about the same rate until May 25. Swarms of earthquakes were registered by instruments, many of them felt at the Volcano, and finally some of these were reported from Hilo, Honomu and Waiohinu."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Ancient craters awaken to life and stage spectacular pyrotechnic displays; streams of molten lava burst through Halemaumau pit and sweep seaward down the slopes to Makaopuhi and Napau; great excitement occasioned here; hundreds rush to view thrilling sight

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 05/30

%K kl.erz.1922, eqs.1922/05/28.klerz

%X An account of the eruption at Makaopuhi crater, beginning about 6 p.m. on May 28, and the subsidence of lava in Halemaumau, accompanied by earthquakes.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Old craters in Puna now lakes of lava; may sweep to ocean

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1, 10

%8 05/30

%K kl.erz.1922, kl.hm.1922.subsidence

%X [subheads: Makaopuhi is aflame with fiery flood running over the brim; Hilo sees glow of fire in sky; heavy bookings made on inter-island boats as news spreads]

  An account of the eruption on Kilauea's east rift zone that began about 9 p.m. Sunday May 28, 1922, and the accompanying subsidence of Halemaumau lava lake.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Lava flow is expected to go to coast; activity of volcano seemed much lessened last night; remarkable changes in crater reported; holiday rush to watch Pele's "tantrums"

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1, 6

%8 05/31

%K kl.erz.1922, kl.hm.1922.subsidence

%X An account of the eruption at Makaopuhi crater, beginning about 6 p.m. on May 28, and the subsidence of lava in Halemaumau.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Kilauea left dead by new lava outflow

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 05/31

%K eqs.1922/05/20-31.klerz, kl.hm.1922.subsidence

%X  [subheads: Jaggar says outbreak at ancient pit may change whole volcanic situation; Famous Halemaumau firepit, drained of lava, is smoking hole in earth]

 The article describes the aftermath of the great draining of Halemaumau lava lake. The article closes by noting that "All earthquakes, which presaged the outbreak, have now ceased."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Halemaumau reported as practically dead

%B Maui News

%P p. 1

%8 06/02

%K eqs.1922/05/20-06/02.klerz.klcal?.ksf?

%X Honolulu, June 1--The article describes Halemaumau as "dead," and the east rift eruption over, concluding with a statement that "all earthquakes, which presaged the outbreak, have now ceased."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T New outbreak said to show on Mauna Loa

%B Daily Post-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 06/20

%K ml.mok.1922?

%X A false report of an eruption on Mauna Loa.[See Hilo Daily Tribune of May 29.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Mystery shrouds reported eruption far up Mauna Loa

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 06/21

%K ml.mok.1922?

%X A false report of an eruption on Mauna Loa.[See Hilo Daily Tribune of May 29.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Mauna Loa erupts on Hilo side; sight of glare and smoke reported from various points indicating acitivity in region of Dewey crater  at 11,000 feet

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1, 7

%8 06/21

%K ml.mok.1922?

%X A false report of an eruption on Mauna Loa.[See Hilo Daily Tribune of May 29.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Unusual activity is reported on top of Mauna Loa

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. ?

%8 06/27

%K ml.mok.1922?

%X A false report of an eruption on Mauna Loa. [See Hilo Daily Tribune of May 29.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Story of eruption on Mauna Loa is a false alarm; Explorers who make trip to summit to report on crater find smoke and steam, however; soldiers deceived

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 06/29

%K ml.mok.1922?

%X Observers who went up to Mokuaweoweo saw smoke and steam issuing from vents on the crater's floor, but concluded that the earlier reports of eruption seen from below were an optical illusion.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Earthquake shock is felt in town

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 07/25

%K eq.1922/07/24.hil??

%X There was a sharp shock of earthquake yesterday afternoon at exactly 5 o'clock, and it was more especially noticeable in the heart of the city [Hilo], although no damage was done.

  Nothing unusual was noticed at the Volcano House or in its vicinity at the time mentioned. . . .

  At first, when the earthquake was felt in Hilo, it was thought that there might have been some huge avalanche at Halemaumau, and that a severe earthquake would be reported from there later on. But messages from the Volcano House last night said that there had been no shock felt and that there was no sign of any special activity at Halemaumau.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Yesterday's 'quake a record breaker

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 11/21

%K eq.1922/11/21.ksf??

%X Many kamaainas of the Big Island state that the earthquake which rocked Hilo and vicinity at 3:25 o'clock yesterday [sic-this, to agree with other papers] morning was the most pronounced one they have ever experienced.

 It seemed to come as an echo of or a protest to the false report which had been broadcast over the world the day before that Hilo had been destroyed by an earthquake.

 Yesterday morning's quake, like all the others in the Big Island's history, was of only a few seconds duration and except for the breaking of a few mirrors and dishes no damage resulted. It was felt in all parts of the city and in the vicinity of the Volcano House.

 While the quake yesterday morning was of considerable violence, some of Hilo's citizens contend that the shock which came about four years ago was of much longer duration.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Real quake backs up rumor of one yesterday; Earth has waves like the ocean at 3:27 a.m.; two distinct shocks; felt at volcano

%B Daily Post-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 11/21

%K eq.1922/11/21.ksf??

%X . . . .Throughout Hilo it [an earthquake] was felt. . . 

  Puueo,, which always gets the worst of earthquake disturbances felt this one very keenly. Houses cracked and mirrors were broken, but no real damage was done. Two distinct shocks were reported, the first a slight one, and the second coming in six separate waves. Waiakea, which often does not feel shocks that are noticeable in Puueo, felt both these shocks, although the six waves were not so distinct.

  In the Volcanic region the quake was also felt. P.T. Phillips, of the Volcano House, says the direction was west northwest, indicating the source as Mauna Loa rather than Kilauea. . . .

%O Repeated in Hawaii Herald of Nov. 23



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Yesterday's 'quake a record breaker

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 11/22

%K eq.1922/11/21.ksf??

%X Hilo, Nov. 21.--some excitement was caused in Hilo today by a slight earth shock at 3:37 this morning, not so much due to the tremor, which caused no damage, as to the mainland rumor of the previous day that Hilo had been destroyed. . . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Earth tremor is again felt last night in Hilo; previous quake lasted five minutes according to seismograph in Brothers' school

%B Daily Post-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 11/22

%K eq.1922/11/22.ksf??

%X Again Hilo quivered last night from a slight earthquake which was just about sufficient in strength to waken light sleepers. According to the seismograph at the Brothers' school there were two separate shocks occurring with a slight interval at 12:20 a.m.

  It is further stated by observers of the Brothers' school seismograph that the earthquake of the preceding night lasted for a full five minutes, the first part of the shock being the strongest and practically the only tremor noticeable without the aid of recording instruments. The dying waves of the shock gradually dwindled with a very small variation traced in the seismograph line.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Lava lake is now steadily rising

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 11/23

%K eq.1922/11/21-22.ksf??

%X The lava lake in the Volcano of Kilauea is steadily rising and widening but there has been no exceptional activity of the fire pit in connection with earthquake shocks which were felt in Hilo Tuesday and Wednesday mornings [11/21-22].

 P.T. Phillips, manager of the Volcano House, stated yesterday that the earthquake shocks seemed to come more from the direction of Mauna Loa than from Mauna Kea. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1922

%T Real quake backs up rumor of one yesterday; Earth has waves like the ocean at 3:27 a.m.; two distinct shocks; felt at Volcano

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 3

%8 11/23

%K eq.1922/11/21.ksf??

%X . . . .Throughout Hilo it [an earthquake] was felt. . . 

  Puueo, which always gets the worst of earthquake disturbances felt this one very keenly. Houses cracked and mirrors were broken, but no real damage was done. Two distinct shocks were reported, the first a slight one, and the second coming in six separate waves. Waiakea, which often does not feel shocks that are noticeable in Puueo, felt both these shocks, although the six waves were not so distinct.

  In the Volcanic region the quake was also felt. P.T. Phillips, of the Volcano House, says the direction was west northwest, indicating the source as Mauna Loa rather than Kilauea. . . .

%O Repeated from Daily Post-Herald of Nov. 21



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Sleepers awakened by sharp earthquake

%B Daily Maui News

%P p. 1

%8 01/15

%K eq.1923/01/14.hil?

%X Sharp earthquake shocks were felt by numbers of persons in Wailuku early on Sunday morning [Jan. 14], sufficient to make houses groan and squeak. So far as has been heard no damage was done.

  Shortly after 2:30 o'clock there were two shocks experienced, sufficiently strong to awaken persons. The first was followed after a short but distinct interval by a second of about the same intensity. The time of these quakes has been established by observations of a number of persons.

  Reports of an earlier temblor about 1 o'clock are also heard from several persons . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Island is swept by fatal storm; severe earthquake felt

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1, 3

%8 01/15

%K eq.1923/01/14.hil?

%X [subheads: One woman crushed to death and heavy loss of property reported; Traffic is suspended, street lights are out and railway held up for hours; earthquake shock is felt; no estimate of total damage]

 . . . "there were two sharp shocks of earthquake felt between 2:15 and 2:30 a.m. . . . .

 The remainder of the article concerns the Kona storm.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Wild norther thrashes Hawaii

%B Daily Post-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 01/15

%K eq.1923/01/14.hil?

%X The article mainly covers a severe Kona storm that hit the Island of Hawaii. In the midst of the storm an earthquake struck, as described in the following section:

       Earthquake shock

 Another feature of the storm was the rather severe earthquake that was felt at 2:30 a.m. Sunday morning [Jan. 14]. It is reported as shaking many banana trees to the ground, but this may be exaggerated, the trees having been blown down by the storm. The quake was felt practically all over this side of the island. Reports from Laupahoehoe have stated that the shake lasted for several minutes in that district.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T New lava flow in evidence in Halemaumau pit; Subsidence proved to be short-lived, according to Jaggar's latest report

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 01/17

%K eq.1923/01/14.hil?, kl.hm.1923

%X  Most of the article describes activity in Halemaumau.

 "A strong earthquake shock about 2:30 a.m. January 14 was generally felt on Hawaii, shaking down stone walls and doing some slight damage at Hilea. this happened in the middle of the Kona storm."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Mauna Loa erupts; Rumor partly backed; Cowboys see glare

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 02/01

%K eq.1923/01/30.kao??

%X Hilo, Hawaii, Jan. 31.-- . . .

 Cowboys at Keauhou ranch report an earthquake followed by a distinct flare from the summit of Mauna Loa last night. Tommy white says evidence of an eruption was plainly visible in daylight, in the form of smoke over the crater zone.

 The cowboys were at an elevation of 6000 feet when the reflection of fire was seen. According to their report the eruption is more toward the Waimea side than toward Kona or Hilo. they said they were working above Hualalai when they felt the earth tremor and saw fire.

 No earthquake was felt at Hilo. communication with the Volcano station is interrupted because of crossed wires. Waimea, Huehue and Papa report that no glare was visible tonight.

 [This eruption was unconfirmed.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Mauna Loa clears up under strong winds from Puna; Puu Oo ranch today reports no signs of smoke; Dr. Jaggar thinks eruption doubtful

%B Daily Post-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 02/01

%K eq.1923/01/30.kao??

%O Article repeated verbatim in the Hawaii Herald of the same date



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Report of Mauna Loa eruption is sequel to quake; cowboys of Keauhou ranch say flare of fire followed tremor

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. 1

%8 02/01

%K eq.1923/01/30.kao??

%X Reports reach Hilo yesterday morning that an eruption of Mauna Loa had occurred Tuesday night [unconfirmed]. According to information gleaned by the Tribune, a party of cowboys of the Keauhou ranch felt a distinct earthquake shock at an elevation of 5,000 or 6,000 feet, the tremor being followed by a flare of fire over the crater [Mokuaweoweo] zone.

  The remainder of the article speculates on the possibility of another Mauna Loa eruption.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Mauna Loa clears up under strong winds from Puna; Puu Oo ranch reports no sign of smoke; Dr. Jaggar thinks eruption doubtful

%B Hawaii Herald

%P p. 1

%8 02/01

%K eq.1923/02/01.kona?

%X . . . .

  Mrs. L.S. Aungst, of Kona reported last night [that] earthquake shocks were very frequent. . . .

%O Article repeated verbatim in the Daily Post Herald of the same date



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Twelve killed at Hilo; $1,500,000 damage at Kahului from tidal wave; windward costs of islands swept

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1, 2, 3

%8 02/04

%K tsu.1923, damage.tsunami, photo

%X [subheads: Violent upheaval of Pacific believed due to earthquake, probably at bottom of ocean; Fatalities among Japanese on Big Island reported; Hilo and Kahului waterfronts suffer as vessels are torn from moorings and houses wrecked; instruments record quake]

 An account of damage from the tidal wave of Saturday, Feb. 3, 1923. The earthquake and one aftershock were recorded at Honolulu, HVO and Washington DC; distance estimated at 2200 miles from HVO. Additional articles on p. 1, continued on p. 3 are entitled:

 Fishermen of Sampan fleet are swept out; Loss of life partly confirmed by dovetailing reports, but can not be determined for days

 Steamships tossed by huge waves at Kahului; Between Million and $1,500,000 damage done at Maui port; Kilauea set on beam ends; Mahukona hits bottom

 An article complete on p. 1 is entitled:

 Waterfront [at Honolulu] is disturbed by tidal tricks

 An article on p. 1, continued on p. 2, is entitled:

 Waikiki tides play odd tricks of ebb and flow at time of tidal wave





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Madam Pele shows signs of activity

%B Hilo Daily Tribune

%P p. ?

%8 02/11

%K eq.1923.hc

%X Prospects for a large lake of lava in the crater of the Volcano are somewhat bright following the earthquake of Friday night which caused disturbances and movement of the ground in large quantities there. . . .

  Loosened by the movement of the earth, about 1,000 yards of rock had fallen into the pit from the sides of the crater . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Volumes of smoke reported rising over Mauna Loa; riders on the Hind ranch send word through Aungst that an eruption is in progress

%B Daily Post-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 02/10

%K eq.1923/02/09.hil??

%X . . . .

  The earthquake last night [Feb. 9] was felt all along this line of territory but not at the volcano . . .

  The article mostly speculates about reports of eruption at Mauna Loa's summit. [These were not confirmed.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Activity again in Mauna Loa; smoke is seen

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 02/11

%K eq.1923/02/09.hil??

%X Hilo, Feb. 10--A slight earthquake last night caused a rock cave-in of 1000 yards area in Kilauea, Thomas Boles. superintendent of Kilauea National Park, reported today. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Letters tell of wave's damage on other isles

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 7

%8 02/12

%K tsu.1923

%X An account of damage on Kauai from the tidal wave of Saturday, Feb. 3, 1923





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Bottom falls from Halemaumau; lava flowing from Kilauea pit causes earthquakes and fires trees in six crater district

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 08/27

%K eqs.1923/08/26.klerz?, kl.erz.1923

%X [subheads: Boles and party make attempt to enter devastated region but are driven back by fumes; huge chunks of lava lodge in tree tops; many acres covered; pit fell six hundred feet and little fire is to be seen at bottom; Prof. Jaggar is on Kona trip; sightseers must hike from lava tubes to see latest flow]

  The country bordering on the six craters district southeast of Kilauea volcano was alive with leaping lava and sulphur gases and split asunder with mighty earthquake shocks all day yesterday [Aug. 26] as a result of the sudden dropping of Kilauea Saturday night [Aug. 25], when the liquid lava practically disappeared from the pit in a similar phenomenon to that of a year ago last May.

  A searching party headed by superintendent Thomas Boles reports that liquid lava is leaping from new earthquake cracks that run from three to ten feet in width. . . .

  The article continues to describe the expedition to the eruption site. "When they arrived in the district between Alae crater and Makaopuhi crater they found fresh cracks in the formation. some being as side as 10 feet from which great clouds of fire, fumes and lava were vomiting."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Lava lake drops out of Kilauea; fills old pits; flows toward Puna in fiery flood, repeating 1922 activity, draining crater

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 08/27

%K eqs.1923/08/25.klerz, kl.hm.1923.subsidence, kl.erz.1923

%X . . . .

 Saturday night the level of lava in the Halemaumau pit dropped 600 feet, leaving only a tiny glow of fire in the bottom. The lava flowed underground to the southeast, breaking out in the old pits, and causing terrific earthquakes in the territory between Makaopuhi and Alae craters, opening up cracks from three to 10 feet in width.

 The rest of the article describes the eruption near Makaopuhi, emphasizing its similarity with the eruption in 1922.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Kilauea has active eruption

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 08/27

%K eqs.1923/08/26.klerz, kl.hm.1923.subsidence, kl.erz.1923

%X [subheads: Large area is covered with burning lava; Outbreak comes through fissures caused by recent earthquake; six to seven miles from main pit in direction of Puna forests afire; impossible to approach closer than half mile of volcano's vomiting mouth]

 Hilo, Aug. 26.--A violent eruption of lava on the line of six craters, six to seven miles toward Puna from the main pit of Kilauea occurred this afternoon. Superintendent Thomas Boles of the Hawaii National Park, returning to the Volcano House at 8 o'clock tonight, verifies the outbreak from a new earthquake crack at the east end of the park.

 The entire country immediately west of Makaopuhi crater was badly shattered by the recent tremors and one crack 10 feet wide was formed which is emitting at different intervals clouds of noxious fumes and roaring flames and spattering lava for long distances in some cases festooning trees 200 feet from the crack.

 The remainder of the article describes the eruption, closing with: "The lava in the main pit of Kilauea is still falling and is now down 700 feet."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Inter-island party is treated to wild bombardment at pit

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 08/27

%K eqs.1923/08/24-25.klerz?, kl.erz.1923

%X [subheads: sinking of pit gives excursionists a real treat; Pele in angry mood over weekend]

  Beginning with an earthquake early on Friday morning [Aug. 24], and culminating in a fearsome bombardment at 11:30 on Saturday night [Aug. 25], the fire pit fell into a "sinking spell," which, according to visitors returning from the pit this morning, has left nothing but a mass of clinkers unrelieved by fire.

  An eyewitness account follows:

  "On the way back to the Volcano house, we went over to Uwekahuna for a last look at the volcano. To our surprise there was hardly any glow, and even as we looked the glow seemed to lessen. We decided to 'go look see.' Just as we arrived at the parking place there was a boom like a big gun. the ground shook, walls fell, and what lava there was flowing showed very great activity.

  "For a matter of a half hour this continued the concussions being very heavy, and coming at short intervals, accompanied by the flight of heavy stones across the pit floor. For the first time in my visits to the volcano I felt frightened." . . . At the time of our arrival several fountains were playing. But during the half hour of our stay, the fountains had practically ceased to exist, leaving nothing but livid cracks, fast losing their radiance. friends of mine who visited the pit on Sunday morning [Aug. 27] described it as 'nothing but a mass of clinkers.'"





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Activity at pit craters of Kilauea continues to furnish thrills

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1, 6

%8 08/28

%K eqs.1923/08/26.klerz, kl.hm.1923.subsidence, kl.erz.1923, map.klcal.klerz

%X [subheads: New fissures on mountain slopes ejecting great clouds of gas and steam; crowds visit erupted area which covers hundreds of acres]

 The article describes the continuing east rift eruption of Kilauea.

    Hundred new cracks

 . . . A heavy roar was heard from the cracks on Sunday [Aug. 26]. Boles estimates that there are a hundred of these new fissures. Six of them are ejecting gas, smoke and steam while a strong foundry odor comes from others. Many are very deep and of immense length.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Emptying of Kilauea fire pit spectacular phase of activity

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 3

%8 08/31

%K eqs.1923/08/25.klerz, kl.hm.1923.subsidence

%X An account of the subsidence of Halemaumau lava lake associated with the Kilauea east rift eruption of August 1923.

 . . . .

 The seismograph recorded many earthquake shocks too slight to be generally felt, but at 5:30 on Saturday morning [Aug. 25] a sharp one startled all in the neighborhood. From then on the lava fell rapidly during the day, with caving in at the sides accompanying the fall. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Earthquake felt; no harm reported

%B Maui News

%P p. 1

%8 12/28

%K eq.1923/12/25.molokai?

%X In various parts of Maui a sharp but short earthquake was felt about 6:45 on the evening of Christmas Day. In doors the sensation was as if a heavy object had fallen occasioning a sudden jar.

  Honolulu reports having felt the quake also but that it was not felt at Ewa and that on inquiry of Hilo no temblor was felt there. It was thought to have been a local disturbance but the fact of its being felt on this island upsets that theory.

  So far as has been heard no damage was done.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1923

%T Pele rewards holiday visitors with display

%B Hawaii Tribune-Herald

%P p. 5

%8 12/31

%K eq.1923/12/28.mk??, kl.hm.1923

%X The article begins by describing the activity in Halemaumau.

 "Speaking of the earthquake felt last week [Dec. 28] Mr. Finch said it had been exceptionally severe in the district of Kau and asked if it was felt in Hilo. This must have been the same one as that experienced here [HVO] at about 4:30 last Friday and felt along the Hamakua coast as far as Honomu."

 . . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Hilo feels quake

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 03/29

%K eq.1924/03/29.ksf?

%X Hilo felt a pretty strong quake at 1:35 a.m. today. Houses in several parts of the town rocked, but no damage was done.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Earthquakes shake various localities; frighten Puna folk; reports from Kapoho indicate that shocks are more pronounced in that district; men from volcano observatory leave to investigate severity of tremors

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 04/22

%K eqs.1924/04.klerz

%X A description of the earthquake swarm and ground cracking at Kapoho, including various investigations made by HVO.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Numerous earth shocks on Hawaii

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 04/23

%K eqs.1924/04.klerz

%X Hilo, April 22--Fifty earthquake disturbances were registered last night by the seismograph at the Volcano Observatory. Henry Lyman of Kapoho telephoned today that he had counted eighty quakes between 6 o'clock last night and 7:30 a.m. today.

  Japanese residents mauka of Lyman's place report noises coming from the lava cracks. Many tremors were felt at Puueo and in Hilo. Similar disturbances occurred during the last three days at Kapoho, and also in Hilo.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Puna quake more active; earth cracks ten feet deep open today; railway tracks tossed up like waves of sea

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1, 6

%8 04/23

%K eqs.1924/04.klerz

%X A description of the earthquake swarm and ground cracking at Kapoho, including various investigations made by HVO. Ruy Finch predicts an eruption At Kapoho.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Henry Lyman gives information about Puna disturbances; says scene of activity is apparently confined to definite rift in formation

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 04/24

%K eqs.1924/04.klerz

%X A description of the earthquake swarm and ground cracking at Kapoho. Large cracks opened beneath the Railroad Depot, Richard Lyman's house and the Japanese camp. The largest crack, crossing both the Government road and the railroad, is 15 feet wide and one to three miles long. Shocks were coming in at a rate of about one per minute at the rock quarry and one every five minutes at his house.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Four more earth cracks reported as tremors in Puna district continue

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1, 3

%8 04/24

%K eqs.1924/04.klerz

%X An account of the earthquake swarm, ground cracking and subsidence in Puna and the reactions of the local people to these events.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Ground near pavilion at Kapoho sinks 30 feet; Oren C. Wilson gives account of earthquakes; district takes on appearance of war invaded area as quakes drove people out from homes; shifting of earth causes many changes in topography--new pool at Warm Springs

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1, 6

%8 04/24

%K eqs.1924/04.klerz

%X A description of the earthquake swarm and ground cracking at Kapoho.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Quakes cause Puna land to sink ten feet

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 04/25

%K eqs.1924/04.klerz, mech.subsidence

%X Hilo, April 24--According to reports received here late tonight, land on the Hilo side of Puna pavilion sunk ten feet as a result of the hundreds of earthquakes during the past three days. Large trees in that vicinity are also crashing to earth.

  Cracks continues throughout today and there are now hundreds of cracks, many several feet wide and 30 feet in depth, running toward Mauna Loa. Thomas Boles, superintendent of Hawaii National Park, after visiting the quake zone, reported he had heard lava running beneath the earth's surface, using a geophone for his observations.

  disturbances also continued throughout today but are growing less severe, and it is believed they will cease within a day or so.

  Got tired of counting--. . . A resident of Kapoho counted 328 shocks Wednesday evening [Apr. 23] between 5 and 9 o'clock, when he got tired of counting and went to bed.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Earth sinks 90 feet at pavilion--new cracks open; volcano shows new gas spot--wall white hot; park commissioner Boles reports pit wall 400 ft. down; peeling off

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 04/25

%K eqs.1924/04.klerz, kl.hm.1924

%X A description of the earthquake swarm and ground cracking at Kapoho, including various investigations made by HVO.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Earthquakes bring terror to Kapoho; hasty exodus made

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1, 3

%8 04/26

%K eqs.1924/04.klerz

%X [subheads; Natives attribute shocks to removal of stone monuments; district cursed; Myriad cracks, which open wider, split surface  of ground; houses in danger]

  An account of the earthquake swarm, ground cracking and subsidence in Puna and the reactions of the local people to these events.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Earth cracks, sends up heat Kapoho reports

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 04/30

%K eqs.1924/04.klerz, mech.subsidence

%X Hilo, Apr. 29--According to a report from Kapoho late tonight a wide crack in the earth between the railway station and the courthouse took place, making traffic impossible. The opening gives out extreme heat, but no steam. Indications are that lava is running beneath the surface.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Earthquakes replace volcano rock shower; predict tidal waves

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 05/21

%K kl.hm.1924, eqs.1924/05.klcal, eq.1924/05/20.kao?

%X [subheads: Kilauea situation is baffling one to scientists, who are encouraged when an outburst takes place; believe missing soldiers only A.W.O.L.; Kau covered with white dust]

Hilo, May 20--The sudden change at Kilauea is baffling to the volcanologists, who cannot determine Halemaumau's next move. The cessation of eruptions followed today with a series of earthquakes, some of them exceptionally  violent, has shifted the general situation.

  [Ruy Finch] stated that four heavy earthquakes were felt at Hilea during the day and pointed out that the situation may possibly be relieved by a lava flow either in Puna or Kona. He also asserted that Kau indications point toward a possible tidal wave . . .

  Continual quakes-- . . .a resident of Hilea reported almost continual earth disturbances, several being violent. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Volcano situation alarming to Finch; quakes continual

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 05/23

%K kl.hm.1924, eqs.1924/05.klcal.klerz

%X [subheads: says pent up steam pressure may cause outbreak elsewhere; crater quiets down when Governor Farrington and party arrive via planes]

Hilo, May 22--. . . .

  Constant earthquakes are being registered on the seismographs and at the Volcano House.

  Oliver Emerson, assistant observer, with a number of scientists, returned here at 9 o'clock tonight after a day's search for new earth cracks and any lava indications. They reported only discovering immense clouds of dust in Kau.

  According to Lorrin A. Thurston, who made a personal investigation at Puna today, that area remains unchanged save for several slight quakes.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Volcano dangers far from over is Finch's prediction

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1, 3

%8 05/24

%K kl.hm.1924, eqs.1924/05.klcal

%X [subheads: Three explosions during day to relieve pent up gas pressure; visitors are warned by officials to be on alert for sudden burst; Find broken camera which may be evidence of two soldiers' fate; seven army planes at Kilauea; will attempt to land near volcano]

Hilo, May 23--. . . .

  There is no activity at present in Hilo, other than a few scattered and inconsiderable earthquakes. For the past three weeks there have been no earthquakes or activity in Kapoho, Puna, where the previous earthquakes and subsidence were so strong a short time ago. [The statement about Puna contradicts Thurston's report in the May 23 issue of the advertiser]

  Continuous tremble--Hilea, in Kau, which is known as "the home of the earthquakes" which normally has more earthquakes than any spot on Hawaii, is recording an almost continuous tremble on the seismograph but is having no perceptible earthquakes. [This also contradicts a previous report of several earthquakes in this sequence being felt in Kau]

  On the other hand, the Volcano house, which normally has no earthquakes, is experiencing a daily and nightly "flock of earthquakes" . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T But one explosion at Halemaumau Saturday; all spectators warned

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 05/25

%K kl.hm.1924, eqs.1924/05.klcal, hazard.eruption

%X [subheads: Single outburst equal to previous day's activity; rocks tossed 3000 feet distance by quick series, which lasts fifteen minutes; Finch warns tourists of recurrences of 1790 flow; quake s shake Hilo Saturday morning; steam clouds emerge throughout mild day]

Hilo, May 24--. . . .

 Earthquakes were distinctly felt in Hilo last night [May 23-24], but no tremors were reported from any section today. The night was also comparatively quiet.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T The Kilauea "flying field"

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 05/26

%K kl.hm.1924, eqs.1924/05.klcal, hazard.eruption, photo.ejecta

%X A photograph showing three large blocks thrown out of Halemaumau, one of which was still hot when approached. The photo also marks the spot where Truman Taylor was killed. A short remembrance of Taylor is included on an inner page.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Minor explosions comprise crater's faltering action; main outburst at 5:30 last night failed again to cause violence; Emerson makes trip to firepit rim where eight ton boulders are found strewn about the vicinity; lone strong quake felt

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 05/27

%K kl.hm.1924, eqs.1924/05.klcal, eq.1924/05/26.a0513

%X A description of the ongoing explosive eruption.

  A strong earthquake shook the entire Kilauea district at 9 o'clock [a.m. on May 26-daylight savings time?].

Pahala, Hawaii, May 24-- . . . A rather strong earthquake shock was felt here [Pahala] early this morning.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Quake jolts might cause damage here; Finch raps statement that building safeguards are not needed

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 05/30

%K ha.hazard.earthquake, eq.1868.hil. eqs.1924/04.klerz, subsidence.kapoho graben

%X Kilauea observatory, Hawaii National Park, May 26--Exception is taken by Roy [sic-Ruy] H. Finch, seismologist at this station, to a statement published in a Honolulu newspaper to the effect that the Hawaiian islands are not intimately associated along the lines of human economic welfare with the earthquake danger of the Pacific coast and that this is not a region where it is necessary to employ special building construction as a safeguard.

 "It is true," Finch said today, "that the Hawaiian group is not connected intimately with the earthquake lines which border the Pacific ocean. Still, so far as the island of Hawaii is concerned, it had a world-shaking quake in 1868 which was destructive to buildings over a radius of miles. On several occasions quakes have occurred under the ocean west of Maui or Molokai, which were felt not only on those two islands but on Oahu and Hawaii.

    Might cause damage here

 "It is quite possible that such slips occur along a fault of appreciable length and a larger movement, easily possible, might cause a shock that could do considerable damage in Honolulu.

 "The possibility of movement of small land masses anywhere in the Hawaiian islands probably will be admitted by nearly everyone. In most of the cases, no doubt, the movement would be superficial and the resulting earthquake perceptible or destructive over a very small area. A recent example of such a phenomenon is that at Kapoho on this island. A block of land three miles long and nearly one mile wide was in motion and a portion of it, at least, dropped from six to eight feet. the movement of this block was accompanied by numerous quakes that caused but slight damage individually. Their total effects were to separate one part of a building from another leaving them at different levels; to drop a portion of a railroad track eight feet and to cause great fissures in the roads and trails. Such a movement certainly would destroy water and gas mains. At a distance of 10 miles from Kapoho the quakes scarcely were felt.

    Possibilities of movements

 "As was pointed out in the foregoing, world-shaking quakes have occurred on the southwest side of Hawaii. If the possibilities of the movement of large land masses are to be considered it might be well to look at the northeast side of the island. If we are to assume the possibility of superficial movements on any of the islands certainly we must include the slope of the plateau in the ocean bottom from which they arise. Let us suppose a slight break originating a short distance under the ocean floor, say 120,000 feet below sea level in the deep northeast of Mauna Kea. such a break would be felt for only a short distance, perhaps.

 "Suppose again such a break to occur at the same depth below sea level at a point 20 or 30 miles nearer the summit of Mauna Kea, or where the elevation is 10,000 feet. Clearly, such a land block in motion would be more than five miles thick, a mass of sufficient magnitude to shake the entire island group.

 "On Hawaii one would be justified in increasing the cost of his building by 30 per cent (an arbitrary figure) to reduce the earthquake hazard. In Honolulu one would be justified, perhaps, in increasing the cost by 5 per cent."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Professor Jaggar makes inspection of pit this morning; says greater disturbance may occur which will make pit much larger; is pleased with observatory's work in recording activities of present disturbance

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 05/30

%K kl.hm.1924, eqs.1924/05/30.klcaldeep?

%X Jaggar muses on the possibility of another eruption like 1790.

. . . .

  A severe earthquake was felt at the Volcano this morning, another was felt in Hilo at 8:42 a.m. Both earthquakes are said to have occurred at the same time.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Volcano quiet

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 06/01

%K eqs.1924/05.klcal

%X Hilo, May 31--The volcano remained quiet for the past 24 hours, steam from the pit being the only visible activity. An earthquake shortly after 1 o'clock this morning disturbed sleepers at the Volcano House.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T New lava flow seen in Halemaumau

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 07/21

%K kl.hm.1924

%X [subheads: Fountains of molten stone start new activity Saturday; cones are being built in pit; Madam Pele's latest display visited by many Hilo people yesterday--surging magma streams and pools cover many acres is estimate of officials; Lava fires again play in the fire-pit of Kilauea. Breaking forth at 3:30 p.m. Saturday afternoon moulten rock made its first appearance in Halemaumau since February; News of the big "come-back" was received in Hilo with joy, and Hiloites hurried to the rim of the pit to take to Madam Pele's latest offering.]

 The article describes the return of lava to Halemaumau following the big collapse in May 1924.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Hiloites report strong earthquake

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 2

%8 07/21

%K eq.1924/07/20.hilo

%X An earthquake which lasted several seconds and was severe enough in some parts of town to knock pictures and vases down, rocked Hilo yesterday at 1:30 in the afternoon. Puueo residents say that the quake was quite severe in that part of town. A number of persons agree that the quake seemed to come in a wave, which shook their houses in sections at a time as the wave seemed to pass on.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T 'Round-island quake felt

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 08/20

%K eq.1924/08/20.kao

%X An earthquake of several seconds duration rocked Hilo this morning about 6:30. Puueo residents say that the quake was particularly sharp in that section of town.

  According to information received over the telephone from Kona a sharp earthquake was felt in that part of the island at the same time.

  Roy [sic] H. Finch, seismologist at the Kilauea observatory, said over the telephone today that his instruments had registered a very marked tremor at 6:20 a.m. One instrument was dismantled by the force of the oscillation. The disturbance was about 16 miles away from the observatory, Finch added.

  The disturbance was likewise felt at Pahala, dishes being knocked off shelves. No real damage was done there, however.

  The tremor was also felt in the Honokaa region, according to W.G. Lawson, manager of the store there, but the shock was not in the least pronounced.

  According to Henry J. Lyman there was no disturbance in Kapoho, the seat of seismic activities last May which racked the entire region. Word was obtained from the Kapoho quarry, also, that no quakes had been felt there.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Sharp earthquake shock felt at observatory

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 10/29

%K eq.1924/10/28.klcal0-5

%X What was characterized today by Dr. T.A. Jaggar, director of the Kilauea Observatory as "a severe local earth shock: was felt yesterday at 2:20 p.m. in the immediate vicinity of the Volcano House.

  "The quake was unusually hard and it was very local," Dr. Jaggar added. "It was not felt in Kau or Kona. It may have been part of the movement adjacent to the crater proper or perhaps a settling of the blocks around the rim of the big crater along with the general disturbances which have been in evidence since the outbreaks last May. No avalanches were included in the shock and nothing of a volcanic nature has occurred in the pit.

  "The shock reminded me very much of one felt in late October of 1913, only this one was sharper. It shook down vases, overturned chemical flasks and upset bottles."

  Thomas Boles, superintendent of Hawaii National Park, said over the phone today that the quake was entirely local. "People on the Volcano House golf links did not even notice it," he declared.

  Two mild shocks were felt at 11 o'clock this morning, Boles added.





%0 Journal Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1924

%T Seismological notes

%J Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America

%V v. 14

%N no. 3

%P p. 215

%K eq.1924/09/10.mk?

%X Hilo, Hawaii, September 10, 1924.„Two of the severest earthquakes felt on Hilo in years rocked the Honokaa district at 7:10 p.m., September 10th, and sent residents scurrying from their homes and buildings. The shock centered around the Kilauea volcano.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1925

%T "Earthquake week" indicated by tremors

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 8

%8 12/09

%K eq.1925/12/08.hil?, eq.1925/12/08.ksf?

%X Two sharp earthquakes, the severest felt here for many months, rocked Hilo last night, the first at 10:19 and the second at 11:45. Neither quake was strong enough to do any damage, however.

  Both quakes were registered at the Volcano Observatory. . . The first quake was in two waves, the first wave sharp and short and the second longer but equally sharp.

  It is reported from Pahala that the 10:19 shake knocked down books and dishes, and moved furniture across the floors.

  The strongest earthquakes recorded at the volcano within a year were the two which occurred Sunday morning, one at 9:20 a.m. and the other at 11:45. Dishes and books were knocked down and the earthquake machine at the Observatory was dismantled. The first quake was accompanied by a large avalanche of loose rock falling into the pit.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Sharp quakes hit Oahu, Maui Sunday

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 02/08

%K eq.1926/02/07.maui?

%X Honolulu, Feb. 8-- a sharp earthquake shock was felt in Maui and Honolulu at 11:30 a.m. yesterday. The local disturbance was noticeable in three sections of the city. It lasted less than a minute. According to word from Maui the shock there "resembled an explosion and was noted by all of central and west Maui."

  The United States observatory station near Ewa registered a local quake at 11:28 a.m. yesterday. . . .

  If the time was about 11:30 a.m. February 7, only a small and apparently feeble tremor was recorded at the Kilauea observatory.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Maui is shaken by quake Sunday but no damage

%B Maui News

%P p. 1

%8 02/10

%K eq.1926/02/07.maui?

%X Two earthquake shocks were felt on Maui Sunday morning with an interval of about two minutes between them. The second and heavier of the two occurred about 11:30. No damage was done though the heavier quake brought numbers of persons out of doors or peering from windows thinking there had been an explosion.

  The shock was also felt on Oahu, the Advertiser says, and registered on the seismograph at Ewa as having occurred at 11:29:17.

  . . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Earthquake felt all over island of Hawaii Sunday

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 03/01

%K eq.1926/02/28.kao?

%X A 'round the island earthquake of about 10 seconds duration rocked the island yesterday morning at 6:41. It was felt in Honomu more sharply than in other sections. . . .

  The quake was not strong enough to do any damage, although at Honomu dishes were knocked from shelves.

  The seismograph at the observatory was dismantled. The shake occurred at 6:41 and was plainly felt at the Volcano House. [Jaggar quoted]

  Telephone reports received this morning from North Kohala, South Kohala, Ookala, Kona, and from the plantations near Hilo, confirm the fact that the quake was felt in all parts of the island.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Three islands are shaken by earth shocks [Oahu and Maui are shaken by earth shocks]

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 03/20

%K eq.1926/03/19.ale

%X [Subheads: Temblor visits Maui, Hawaii and Oahu; windows in Kalihi rattle from force; Violent motion brings people on Valley Island from homes; no damage] [Temblor visits Islands at 10:34 p.m.; windows in Kalihi rattle from force; Violent motion brings people on valley island from homes; no damage]

   Hilo, Hawaii, March 20--A strong earthquake shook all the island at 10:33 o'clock last night, being hardest in Kohala. In Hilo the buildings swayed slightly. A clear record of a long slow movement was obtained by the volcano instruments. Dr. Thomas Jaggar, in charge of the Volcano Observatory, reports that the center was further away than usual and estimates that the disturbance was on the ocean bed about 80 miles off Kohala in a direction between northeast and northwest.

  No reports of a tidal wave have been received. No damage was done by the earthquake. No volcanic activity was reported.

  This morning at 7:30 o'clock there was a severe, but weaker, quake in the same area.

  Hundreds of local people were aroused from their sleep about 10:30 last night when the islands of Oahu and Maui were visited by the most severe local earthquake shock to be recorded in the islands for many years.

  A certain amount of excitement was occasioned in the residential portion of Honolulu, although no apparent alarm was felt. The temblor, according to all reports, reached its maximum intensity in the Kaimuki section of the city, although it was quite noticeable in Manoa, Punahou and on Alewa and Pacific Heights. In the business district, the shock was quite slight, not being felt by those in the streets, but reported as noticeable in various hotels.

    Shock windows

  Residents of the Kalihi valley reported this morning that the shock had been so severe that there was a noticeable motion to light pieces of furniture and a rattling of windows in many residences, a condition which continued for several seconds during the time the temblor was at its maximum severity.

  A local earthquake of considerable intensity was recorded by the seismograph in operation at the United States magnetic observatory near Ewa, Oahu, at 9:04:16 a.m., Greenwich time, March 20, which is 10:34:16 p.m., Honolulu time, March 19.

  The disturbance reached its maximum intensity 32 seconds later and continued for seven minutes. Although the maximum ground movement at the observatory was only one one-hundredth of an inch the record on the seismograph is very pronounced. The instrumental magnification is 150 for this sort of vibration.

     Waves were short

  The waves were short, averaging less than four seconds. The disturbance was not felt at the observatory although several residents at Ewa reported this morning that they had felt the shock.

  According to radio reports from Wailuku, two earthquake shocks in rapid succession shook Maui at 10:30 last night. The first shock was mild and of but a few seconds duration. This was followed immediately by one more violent, which continued for five seconds and brought many people out of their homes. No damages were reported. Both shocks were of the horizontal variety.

  Another shock was reported by the U.S. magnetic observatory near Ewa as occurring at 7:27:45 this morning. The disturbance was very slight and lasted about two minutes.

%O Titles in brackets reflect different editions of the paper



%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Earth disturbance felt in many sections here: tidal wave is reported

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 03/20

%K eq.1926/03/19.ale

%X Six distinct earth shocks of several seconds duration were felt by hundreds of residents of Kaimuki between 10:30 and 10:33 o'clock last night. Residents of Manoa, Punahou and Alewa Heights also felt the disturbance approximately during those several minutes, but reports indicated the temblor was most severe in Kaimuki. There was no damage.

 The naval radio station at Wailupe. feeling the shock, reported that a miniature tidal wave accompanying it struck their building, jarring it considerably but caused no damage. Two naval operators on duty there last night, said the water rose almost five feet at the instant of the shock.

 The radio corporation plant at Koko Head, according to a message to the Advertiser, reported the disturbance was preceded by a muffled noise, and that the tremor continued at intervals for ten minutes.

 Records on the government seismograph instrument at Ewa will not be developed until today, according to the operator there last night, so the approximate source or direction of the disturbance could not be learned.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Entire territory feels shocks of quake last night; no serious damage is done although disturbance is felt over large area; point of origin in ocean bed says Prof. Jaggar; Honolulu reports small tidal wave

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1, 2

%8 03/20

%K eq.1926/03/19.ale

%X An earthquake of unusual force which was felt quite plainly in Hilo and the island of Hawaii in general was registered throughout the Hawaiian territory between the hours of 10:30 to 10:35 o'clock last night.

  The shock was felt in Hilo at 10:35. It was of sufficient strength to shake a number of ink bottles off a shelf in the upper story of the Tribune-Herald building. 

  It was not strong enough to do any serious damage however and was not accompanied by a tidal wave. The quake seemed to come in two waves, a few seconds apart, and was unusually long. It lasted for about 10 seconds in all, the last wave being longer than the first.

  Word received from Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar, volcanologist at Kilauea, was to the effect that the quake was registered with clearness there. The quake originated about 10 or 80 miles to the north east or north west of Kohala out in the ocean some place, according to Jaggar.

  Word received from Kohala said that the quake had been felt there by nearly everyone and that it was quite strong. Another quake was also felt at Kohala this morning at 7:30 o'clock but was not as strong as last night's shock. No damage was reported.

  Messages received from other parts of the island indicate that the shock was felt generally. No word of a tidal wave at any place on the island has been received however.

  A second shock was felt in Hilo this morning shortly after 7 o'clock. This was a very light quake.

  Honolulu, March 20--Hundreds of residents in various sections of the city and outskirts were momentarily frightened by a series of distinct earth disturbances between 10:30 and 10:35 last night.

  The tremor was stronger from Kaimuki to Koko Head than in other districts. The naval station at Wailupe reported disturbances accompanied by a miniature tidal wave, with the water rising almost five feet.

  Heeia radio station stated that the tremor threatened the radio towers.

  The source of the shock has not been learned as yet.

  Volcano House, March 20--repeats info above

  Honolulu, March 20--The earthquake shocks reported from the island of Hawaii and also felt with severity on Oahu also shook the island of Maui, according to reports received this forenoon.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Quakes fail to awaken Madam Pele; nothing doing as yet at Volcano; slight shock yesterday

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 03/21

%K eq.1926/03/19.ale

%X The earthquake shocks felt in Honolulu on Friday night were also noticeable in Hilo, according to reports from the big island, but apparently there is no unusual activity at Kilauea volcano as a result or for that matter as a cause.

 The shocks on Hawaii were felt all over the island, at the same time that the tremors were felt in Honolulu. Observatory scientists at the volcano and in Honolulu have decided that the center of disturbance was about eighty miles off Kohala in a northerly direction. It is interesting to note that on Oahu the shock was felt most severely in Kaimuki district, the closest part of the island to the supposed point of disturbance.

 While Wailupe reported on Friday night that coincidentally with the quake a large wave rolled toward shore at that point Hilo has not reported any unusual tidal activity.

 At the magnetic observatory near Ewa a local quake was recorded as having taken place at 9:04:16 a.m., Greenwich time, which makes the time of the shock here 10:34:16 p.m. [the previous day]. Saturday morning [Mar. 13] a minor shock was felt about 7:30. This was also reported from Hilo.

 Maui reported two shocks on Friday evening in the neighborhood of 10:30 o'clock, one being mild and the other severe.

 No property or personal damage is reported from either of the other islands.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Earthquake shock of Friday night felt all through Islands

%B Maui News

%P p. 1

%8 03/24

%K eq.1926/03/19.maui?

%X Two earthquake shocks, the first light, the second sufficient to awaken person from a sound sleep were felt on Maui shortly after 10:30 o'clock Friday night [Mar. 19]. There was another shock felt about 7:30 Saturday morning. In Wailuku the vibration seemed to be East and West. Reports from Hilo place the source of the disturbance some 80 miles in a northerly direction from Kahala [sic-Kohala?].

  Hardly more than a slight tremor the first quake attracted little notice but in a few moments there was a severe jolt followed by a rocking or swaying that brought people up standing or even sent some scurrying from their houses. Though general on Maui no damage was reported. Other islands reported that the shock was felt.

  Of the registering of the quake the Star-Bulletin said in part:

  "A local earthquake of considerable intensity was recorded by the seismograph in operation at the United States magnetic observatory near Ewa, Oahu, at 9:04:16 a.m., Greenwich time March 20, which is 10:34:16 p.m. Honolulu time March 19.

  "The disturbance reached its maximum intensity 32 seconds later and continued for seven minutes. Although the maximum ground movement at the observatory was only one-one-hundredth of an inch the record of the seismograph is very pronounced. The instrument magnification is 150 for this particular type of vibration.

  "The wave were very short, averaging less than four seconds. The disturbance was not felt at the observatory although several residents of Ewa reported this morning that they had felt the shock.

  "Another shock was reported by the U.S. Magnetic Observatory near Ewa as occurring at 7:27:45 this morning. The disturbance was very slight and lasted about two minutes."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Police station walls cracked by earthquake

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 03/27

%K eq.1926/03/19.ale, damage.earthquake, aftershock.earthquake

%X To date there has been but one structural casualty following the earthquake shock that excited Honolulu citizens on Friday night. Reports followed the quake that pictures had been shaken off walls and furniture shaken about considerably, but none concerning property damage.

 It remained for the police to discover a crack in the plaster of the walls of the police station, where the shock had separated the plaster. That, so far, is the only damage reported.

 Another shock was recorded at the Ewa observatory yesterday morning at 7:27:45 o'clock Honolulu time, according to E.H. McComb, who is in charge of that station. The tremors lasted for two minutes, according to the records, and the waves were not so short as those of the Friday night disturbance. The shock was about one-tenth the intensity of the latter.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Mauna Loa in eruption

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 04/10

%K eqs.1926/04.mlmok?, ml.mok.1926, tsu.1926

%X Hilo, April 10--Mauna Loa is in eruption.

. . . .

  Preceding the eruption several earthquakes rocked the island, and it is reported that tidal waves swept over the Kona side of Hawaii. . . .

  There was also a tidal wave at Hilo that was four feet high.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Kona residents see fires at night; report activity above spot of Alika flow

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1, 2

%8 04/14

%K ml.swr.1926, eqs.1926/04.mlmok.mlswr, ml.ner.1881, precursor .eruption.seismicity

%X [subheads: L.S. Aungst reports from Holualoa that smoke hanging on mountainside may mark source of fire; no change in situation at Halemaumau]

 A series of dispatches regarding the 1926 eruption from Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone.

 Hilo, Hawaii, April 14 (12 noon).--Reports from the volcano observatory on the edge of Kilauea are that earth movements recorded by the instruments indicate that action can be expected at any time.

 Roy [sic-Ruy] Finch, assistant in charge of the observatory, says that action of the eruption is similar to that of 1881, when the actual outbreak did not occur until four months after the indications started.

 Some of the 'quakes no doubt have been caused by the flow of lava, says Finch.

 The record of earthquakes for the past few days is April 10, 70; April 11, 34, April 12, 72; April 13, 154; April 14, up to 6:30 a.m., 30.

 . . . .

 The Waiohinu telephone operator timed an earthquake shock Tuesday morning [Apr. 13] finding that it was of a full minute's duration.

 Between 3 and 4 o'clock in the afternoon there were about 50 shocks, very slight, at about a minute interval.

 Mrs., E. Vida, from Wood Valley, reports that the quakes were almost continuous on Tuesday, the shocks merging at times. They were mostly slight but some were moderately heavy.

 The same quakes were felt at Kapapala ranch.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Flow similar to outbreak in 1881 expected on Isle

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 04/14

%K eqs.1926/04.mlswr, ml.swr.1926

%X [subheads: Earth movements indicate lava surging down main rift crack of Mauna Loa; Activity in Halemaumau is now expected any time is report of volcanologist]

Volcano House, April 14

 Earth movements and quakes indicate that lava is moving down the main rift crack of Mauna Loa, and records show that this crack is opening, it is stated here today by Roy [sic-Ruy] Finch, assistant volcanologist.

 . . . .

 Many of the earthquakes felt here are probably from movement of lava, and not from ordinary disturbances, it is stated. the quakes are consistently increasing in number, and this is the chief indication of action soon.

 It is very possible that the coming flow will be similar to that of 1881, when the actual outbreak did not come until four months after the first indication, Finch says.

 A quick return of lava to Halemaumau is expected, even if a flow elsewhere should develop, it is stated.

 The record of earthquakes, compiled at the observatory shows a total of 70 on April 10, 84 on April 11, 72 on April 12, 154 on April 13 and at 6:30 a.m. today, 30.

Waiohinu, Kau, April 14--Reports from ranch hands indicating sighting of smoke in the direction of Mauna Loa's southwest rift. This dispatch continues on p. 2 with no mention of earthquakes being felt.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Flow coming down hills; Jaggar to hunt flow; Stream may reach govt. road Friday night

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 04/15

%K ml.swr.1926

%X [subheads: main flow located; is dividing as it drives down Mauna Loa slope; One branch of molten stream is going towards Honomalino, one toward Waiohinu; night glow on wide front seen; residents above Honomalino district moving out as the hear roaring tide]

 A series of dispatches report the progress of the flows from Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T No danger from volcano action, Norton declares; Says Island 'vibrations' hardly felt; instruments record faintest shocks

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 6

%8 04/15

%K eqs.1926/04.mlswr, kl.hm.1926.1927, forecast.eruption

%X  . . . .

 "I [L.W. de Vis-Norton of the Hawaiian Volcano Research Association] believe that too much emphasis is being placed on earthquake shocks and movements of the ground in the vicinity of Halemaumau," said Norton. As a matter of fact, something like 95 per cent of these shocks cannot be felt by human beings but are picked up by the extremely sensitive earthquake recording instruments at the observatory. Very many of these shocks come from distant points, mainly along the rift line on Mauna Loa where it is of course quite certain that there is volcanic activity at the present time."

 He continues with mention of daily crack monitoring at Halemaumau and debunks current stories of the whole island rocking from enormous earthquakes. He forecast that lava will soon return to Halemaumau.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Huge lava flow is sighted

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1, 2

%8 04/15

%K eqs.1926/04.mlswr, ml.swr.1926

%X [subheads: Stream about 1000 feet wide says witness to outbreak aa formation; Rate of speed estimated at one mile in 35 hours--scene is five miles above Government road at present time]

 Dispatches from Waiohinu, Kealakekua, Kamoa and the Volcano Observatory report the ongoing eruption of Mauna Loa from its southwest rift zone. The volcano House dispatch contains the following:

 "It is perfectly clear that the numerous earthquakes of the past few days have portended a flow on the southwest rift, which developed its first activity probably with the formation of dense sulphur smoke April 13, an opening of the crack farther at the time of the sharp earthquake at 7:45 p.m. on April 13 and began vigorous fountains in the Alika source about 8:30 a.m. April 14.

 "On the higher slope of Mauna Loa the earthquakes were abundantly felt, and some of them were felt right at the summit cones which are in the rift belt itself."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Details of flow told in report of volcanologist

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 4

%8 04/15

%K eqs.1926/04.mlmok.mlner.mlswr, ml.swr.mok.1926

%X Under the heading of "The April 10 outbreak of Mauna Loa" Jaggar describes the eruption as having begun April 10 about 3:00 a.m. [This is the time of eruption in Mokuaweoweo, clarifying earlier reports of a later start time, focused on the southwest rift]. He continues with a narrative of the eruption, followed by a section of the earthquake swarm.

    Earthquake swarms come

 "There was a 'swarm' of earthquakes preceding the outbreak, though they have been coming in 'swarms' since. The warning quakes which were widely felt over the eastern half of the Island of Hawaii occurred at 1:50 a.m. and 2:04 a.m. or about an hour before the first appearance of lava. Before the occurrence of these shakes, however, at 1:36 a.m. 'harmonic tremor,' a motion that is recorded on the observatory seismographs, only when there is molten lava at either Kilauea or Mauna Loa, was recorded. This type of tremor became very noticeable after the 2:04 a.m. quake and continued so for that day."

 . . . .

    Many earthquakes reported

 "A total of 376 earthquakes were recorded during the week [ending April 14, 1926], 343 of which occurred during the four days following outbreak of Mauna Loa. The majority of the shakes appear to have had their origin along the extension of the Southwest rift of Mauna Loa into the lower Kau country, though some appeared to originate under Mokuaweoweo the summit crater of Mauna Loa and along the northeastern rift." . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Need for road on Mauna Loa shown by present flow

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 7

%8 04/15

%K monitor.eruption.lava flow

%X A plea by Jaggar for a road to the summit of Mauna Loa, to allow for better monitoring of Mauna Loa eruptions. He emphasizes that no one has ever been able to observe the beginning of a Mauna Loa eruption, particularly those on the southwest rift zone.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Hoopuloa village destroyed; Relief fund is started by Tribune-Herald

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1, 2

%8 04/17

%K ml.swr.1926, hazard.lava flow, map.lava flow

%X [subheads: Lava stream takes all houses in little town; offerings to no avail; Swift moving river now cutting way through new channel on way to sea; many dramatic scenes enacted as havoc is done]

  An account of the destruction wrought by the 1926 eruption from Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Lava flow is nearing sea

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1, 2

%8 04/17

%K eqs.1926/04.mlswr, ml.swr.1926, hazard.lava flow

%X [subheads: Pacific now only 1400 feet from end of fire; Honomalino stream now coming across highway in huge aa avalanche; Hikers warned to use care on trail to point where volcano expected to enter ocean some time today]

 Dispatches from Waiohinu and Volcano House describe the ongoing eruption from Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone. The dispatch from Volcano House reports:

 "Earthquakes of sufficient force to dismantle the seismograph were registered here last night between 11 and 12 p.m. and again between 4 and 5 a.m. Minor tremors have been felt all day."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Kona flow increases; sea boils up; Kau quakes felt; Lava coming down over the doomed village of Hoopuloa

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1, 10, 11, 12

%8 04/19

%K eqs.1926/04.mlswr, ml.swr.1926

%X [subheads: Five huge lava waves roll down at Hoopuloa; Police guarding highways to stop over enthusiastic sightseers; public lookout in trees signal downrush of streams going steadily into sea]

 Accounts of the ongoing eruption from Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone.

 . . . .

 Severe earthquakes at 9:06 and 9:46 this morning were reported from Waiohinu but were not felt at Pahala, Kau.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Signs of new flow on Hilo side; Hoopuloa activity seems halted

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 04/20

%K eqs.1926/04.mlswr, ml.swr.1926

%X [subheads: Pele's wrath appears satisfied by sacrifice of ancient building; Jaggar and Finch go to source of latest activity; crowds of 'lava jaunters' on roads]

 Accounts of the ongoing eruption from Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone.

 . . . .

 The earthquakes registered at the Hawaii Volcano Observatory are still continuing, although there is a slight decrease in their number. From April 14 to the morning of the 18th, there were 250 recorded, none of them of great strength, however. On the average there are about five or six a day strong enough to dismantle the seismograph. Most of the stronger quakes seem to originate on Mauna Loa, about 20 miles from the observatory.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Flow heads toward ranch; earth tremor shakes this side of island

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 04/22

%K eqs.1926/04/22.kaodeep?, ml.mok.1926

%X [Subheads: Severe quakes felt in several parts of island; Shock Coming at 4:40 a.m.; felt Severely in Puueo, Hilo; nothing Felt in Kohala; Activity near Mokuaweoweo says Finch, seismologist on duty at Volcano Observatory]

  An earthquake of unusual violence which was felt In many parts of the Island was registered with force in Hilo and vicinity, especially in the Puueo district at 4:40 this morning. The shock was so great that in many homes bottles and other articles on shelves or tables were toppled to the floor. Immediately  after the quake struck a cry of "Earthquake," could be heard, people jumped out of bed and turned on the electric lights to see what was happening.

    Quakes Last Ten Seconds

  The quake lasted for about ten seconds, starting with a sudden heavy shock which was followed by another. shock of less strength then settling Into a series of. weaker ones which finally died away.

  Reports from other parts of the island indicate that the quake was felt generally except In the Kohala district.

    Severe Quake Felt

  VOLCANO OBSERVATORY, April 22-Roy [sic-Ruy] A. Finch, seismologist, reports that a quake of great force dismantled the seismograph here at 4:40 o'clock this morning. The shock caused considerable excitement around the Volcano House and at first it was thought that Halemaumau was active again.

  According to Finch no activity Is noticeable in the pit but avalanches of considerable force were still going on. The quake felt this morning according to Finch, who bases his belief on Information received from all parts of the Island, had Its origin under the northeast slope of Mauna Loa or under Mokuaweoweo.

No Quake at Hawi

  HAWI, Kohala, April 22-No earthquake was felt here early this morning by anyone In the district, although reports of a shock of great strength in other parts of the island have been received.

  HONOKAA, April 22-An earthquake of unusual force was felt here at 4:40 this morning. The people here think that Halemaumau has broken out again. Rumors to that affect are everywhere.

  KAPOHO, Puna, April 22 - Two earthquakes were felt here early this morning. The first came at 4:40 o'clock. It was quite strong. The second quake came at 5 o'clock but was not unusually powerful.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Flow wreaks big damage; ranch lands swept; fear hundreds of cattle cut off; sharp earthquake at Hilo

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 04/22

%K eq.1926/04/22.kaodeep?, ml.swr.1926, map.lava flow, damage.lava flow

%X [subheads: New activity is heralded in smoke, quake; Heaviest shock in years felt; renewed smoke is seen on Kona side; Second flow seems to be flowing; may not reach Government road]

 Accounts of the ongoing eruption from Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone and the damage incurred, principally on local ranches.

 . . . .

    Sharp shock felt on Big Island

Hilo, Hawaii, April 22 (9:35 a.m.)--A very sharp earthquake was felt this morning both at Honomalino and here.

 At Hilo the shock was the sharpest in years. A small garage in Hilo was displaced eight inches.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Activity to last for some time is expert's opinion

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 04/23

%K ml.swr.1926, map

%X [Subheads: Similarity of present flow to Alika stream of 1919 is basis of claim of Jaggar; Noted volcanologist walks to within 50 feet of hot lava while on trip of exploration]

   A brief review of the aftermath of the eruption from Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone. a sketch map shows the path of the lava to the sea, where it overran Hoopuloa village.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Kilauea report No. 745; week ending April 21, '26

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 04/23

%K eqs.1926/04.mlswr

%X  . . . .

 Numbers of local earthquakes per 12-hour interval, beginning the morning of April 14 were 32, 24, 51, 32, 37, 29, 16, 12, 8, 12, 8, 18, 2, the last being the night of April 20-21. The total is 310. . . . Intensity of earthquakes increased as numbers diminished. Three of the quakes of the 20th were of Halemaumau origin.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Two small tremors felt

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 04/24

%K eqs.1926/04.mlswr?

%X Hilo, Hawaii, April 24.--The Volcano observatory at Kilauea last night recorded two small tremors centering under Mauna Loa. . . . The headline implies that these were felt at Hilo.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Mauna Loa lava flowing slowly

%B Maui News

%P p. 1

%8 04/24

%K eq.1926/04.kao?

%X Most of the article describes the lava flow on Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone.

  "Thursday morning [Apr. 22] about 4:30 Hilo was shaken by a severe quake lasting ten seconds. A shed was moved several inches off its foundation."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Best ranch lands hit by flow, says report from Holualoa

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 04/24

%K eq.1926/04/22.kaodeep?, ml.swr.1926

%X Holualoa, Hawaii, April 22.-- . . . .

 The earthquake felt throughout the district Thursday morning was very slightly felt at Honomalino. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T All Hawaii thrilled by volcano eruption

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1-8

%S Volcano Special Edition

%8 04/25

%K eqs.1926/04.mlswr, ml.swr.1926, map.photo, hazard.lava flow, damage.lava flow

%X  This Sunday supplement covers the 1926 eruption from Mauna Loa's southwest rift zone in stories, sketch maps and photographs. Story heads as follows:

p. 1

 Complete story on volcano is told by expert; Professor Thomas A. Jaggar relates events leading up to great upheaval; History of Mauna Loa activity of deep interest to all; party closely follows every move

 The continuation of this story on p. 5 contains the following:

 "The earthquakes have become fewer and stronger as both felt and recorded. there was a sharp earthquake felt at Kilauea and elsewhere about 9 a.m. on the 19th.

 "The last earthquake appeared to have been almost simultaneous with the observed stoppage of the flow at Honomalino. . . ."

 Awesome view has varied effect on army of viewers; News of activity causes human stampede toward source of great stream of red fire; No one disappointed by huge show staged by Goddess of old, famous Madam Pele

 Refusal to give fish to Pele is cause of losses

 History of present Mauna Loa flow is told in complete story of activities

 Kona Boy Scouts render real aid at Hoopuloa flow

 Fire in pit may be had for cash

 Landing field at south Point used as airplane base

p. 2

 History of Mauna Loa reveals many disturbances on Island

 Tribune-Herald staff man still ready for lava

p. 3

 Tribune-Herald aided by worthy army of workers; Jazz Gelknap, speedy member staff, tells to whom credit for many dispatches is due; Cooperation of everyone given by many in District where volcanic activity descended

 Graphic record of lava flow seen in photos

p. 4

 Property damage in ill-fated town set at $10,000; Cost to replace will be twice amount, is estimate; people refuse to remove wares; Total destitute is about 60; help for unfortunate given by friends near ruined area

 Many witness sad sight of village burned by lava

 Detailed story of eruption told by viewer

p.8

 Glorious sight greets party at source of flow

 Details of trip taken by Finch full of thrills

 Connection over lava to be ready soon says report

 Halemaumau asks Mauna Loa for lava; Imaginary conversation between Halemaumau and Mauna Loa





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Hard earthquake is felt all over Big Island today

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 06/09

%K eq.1926/06/09.kao

%X A strong earthquake was felt throughout the island of Hawaii at 9:35 this morning, registering with the greatest force at Kapapala.

  The quake was felt all over Hilo, coming the [sic] three successive shocks. At Kapapala articles resting on shelves were toppled over. The seismograph at the Volcano and the one at Hilea were both dismantled by the shock, according to Roy [sic] Finch, assistant volcanologist.

  According to Finch. although the force of the quake was considerable no sign of unusual activity is noticeable at Halemaumau which remains dormant.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Volcano glow is reported in Kau; Rumors of eruption not verified; many see light in sky

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. ?

%8 10/25

%K ml.mok?.1926

%X A glow was seen on Mauna Loa from Honuapo.





%0 Magazine Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Mauna Loa's eruption of 1926

%B Hawaiian Annual for 1927

%P p. 40-46

%K hc.ml, WT, ml.mok.1926, ml.swr.1926, eqs.1926.mlswr

%X An eruption lasting only a few hours occurred on April 10, 1926, on the southwest rift zone of Mauna Loa near the South Pit of Mokuaweoweo. On April 14, lava broke out on the southwest rift zone at about 8,000 ft, sending a flow toward Waiohinu and another into Kona. The latter lava entered the bay at Hoopuloa on April 18. The author quotes descriptions of the lava flow and source area from The Volcano Letter (Fiske and others, 1987). An earthquake swarm (70-90 events per day, diminishing to 1-17 events per day) occurred between the times of summit and rift outbreaks. Kilauea remained quiescent.





%0 Journal Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1926

%T Seismological notes

%J Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America

%V v. 16

%N no. 2

%P p. 160-161

%K eqs.1926.mlswr

%X Hilo, Hawaii, April 10, 1926.--An eruption of the volcano Mauna Loa, near Hilo, Hawaii, on April 10th, during which the village of Hoopuloa was completely wiped out by lava flow, was preceded and followed by several earthquakes of intensity sufficient to dismount the instruments at the Kilauea Observatory.



Hilo, Hawaii, April 22, 1926.--Terrific earthquakes continued to shake the district of Kilauea during the ten days that Mauna Loa was in eruption. Shocks occurred at 5:10 p.m. on April 20 caused enormous avalanches in Halemaumau.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1927

%T Sharp quake wakes island; no harm done; Disturbance purely local, reports U.S. station at University

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1, 2

%8 03/21

%K eq.1927/03/20.mkosdeep

%X Honolulu residents were awakened shortly before 5 o'clock yesterday morning by an earthquake shock which is reported as being the heaviest felt here in many years. All day yesterday telephone inquiries poured into the Advertiser to learn if any damage had been done by the temblor or whether Kilauea volcano had resumed activities again. The quake was felt about equally in all parts of the island. An extensive check-up of all sections of the city and windward Oahu showed no damage of any nature. Radio advices received by the advertiser last night from Maui stated that two severe shocks were felt on the Valley Island yesterday morning. The first shock was felt at 6:15 [time wrong according to HVO and HMO records-should be 4:52 and 5:59-see below] and lasted five seconds. shortly afterward another shock was recorded which lasted 23 seconds. No damage was reported.

 Lieut. J.H. Peters of the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey in charge of the seismological station at the University of Hawaii said that the disturbance was purely local, centering on the island of Oahu.

 There were two distinct shocks as recorded by Lieutenant Peter's instruments, the first starting at 4:51:07 a.m. Sunday. this shock reached its maximum at 4:51:50 and died away at 4:59:00.

 The maximum amplitude of the quake was 103 millimeters, equivalent to an earth movement of 1/25 of an inch or 2/25 over all.

 This shock was followed by a second, which began at 5:59 and lasted approximately seven minutes, according to Lieutenant Peters. This shock had the center of its disturbance at a greater distance than the first one.

 Lieutenant Peters said that the shocks were not sufficient to cause any sort of damage.

 The last earthquake on Oahu strong enough to be perceptible occurred almost exactly a year ago.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1927

%T Earthquakes felt all over islands; two strong shocks occur on Sunday morning; no undue activity at volcano

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 7

%8 03/21

%K eq.1927/03/20.mkosdeep?

%X Two earthquake shocks occurred early yesterday morning and were felt throughout the Islands. The first shock came between 4:51 and 4:59 while the second came at 5:59 and lasted until 6:06 a.m.

  The first shock was strongly felt all over the island of Hawaii according to reports received from various districts. The seismographs at the Volcano Observatory and the Saint Mary brothers school in Hilo were both dismantled by the shock so that the exact duration of the quake could not be learned here. According to observatory officials at the Volcano the quake was evidently of local origin.

  H.M. Wilson, assistant to Dr. Thomas Jaggar, volcanologist, stated . . . that there was no undue activity at the firepit of Halemaumau and that no other shocks have been felt since Sunday morning.

  The quakes awakened many people but did no damage according to reports.

  Washington, D.C., March 21--Georgetown University today registered earthquakes of severe intensity, which were estimated as centering about 4800 miles from Washington.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1927

%T Severe shock jars Hawaiian Island group

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 03/21

%K eq.1927/03/20.mkosdeep?

%X [Subheads: Heaviest quake in years felt on islands; volcano seismograph dismantled; No damage reported; dishes thrown from shelves on Big Island, however]

Washington, March 21--The seismograph at Georgetown University early yesterday registered earthquakes of severe intensity centering about 4800 miles from Washington.

  Two earthquake shocks occurring early yesterday morning were felt generally throughout the islands . . . . On various points of Oahu the first temblor was sufficiently intense to rouse residents from early morning slumbers, while on Hawaii, the shock dismantled the seismograph instruments at the Volcano observatory.

  The first shock occurred at 4:51:07 a.m., reached its maximum intensity at 4:51:59 and died away at 4:59, according to records at the United States seismological station at the University of Hawaii. A second shock was recorded at 5:59 and lasted approximately seven minutes, records in charge of Lieut. J.H. Peters of the U.S. coast and geodetic survey showed.

  No undue action in the firepit of Halemaumau was reported from the island of Hawaii.

  In Honolulu the first shock was intense enough to rattle dishes and windows, and it was reported that guests at various hotels became alarmed and rushed into the hallways.

  [reference to recording at Georgetown university]

  No damage has been reported as resulting from the quake.

  Hilo, Hawaii, March 20--A severe earthquake occurred here this morning at 4:52 a.m. The shock was felt all over the island, according to reports from the various districts and lasted for nearly a minute. No damage was caused although in many homes bottles and other articles were shaken from shelves.

  [repeats info from hvo]

  Volcano House, Hawaii--A rather severe earthquake shock was recorded on the seismographs at the observatory at 4:52 this morning, of sufficient magnitude to dismantle the recording mechanism so that only the preliminary movement was recorded. Although R.M. Wilson of the local station was awakened by the shock guests at the Volcano House were not disturbed by the tremor. Phone reports from Hilo state that the quake was strong enough in certain localities in town to cause the falling of dishes and in several instances people were frightened to the extent of fleeing from their houses.

  Honokaa, Hawaii, Mar. 20--A very sharp earthquake was felt here this morning at 4:56 o'clock which lasted for several seconds. . . . 

  Wailuku, Maui, March 21.--A severe earthquake shock of 10 seconds duration was felt at 4:55 o'clock Sunday morning throughout the whole island. It was reported to be most severe in Paia and Haiku. No damage was done. The shock was not as severe as the shock which was felt exactly a year ago at 10:30 o'clock at night.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1927

%T Islands shaken by hard quake; Sunday morning slumbers disturbed; felt through group but no serious damage is reported

%B Maui News

%P p. 1

%8 03/23

%K eq.1927/03/20.mkosdeep?

%X Maui residents were abruptly aroused from their matitudinal slumbers about ten minutes of five o'clock Sunday morning and came up standing or leaping from their beds. There was an earthquake shock so severe that scarcely anyone slept through it, one of the most severe quakes that Maui felt in years. It was felt throughout Maui of greater or less intensity and on Molokai, it became known after the arrival of the Claudine early Monday and with the arrival of the Honolulu papers Monday evening and Tuesday morning it was found to have been general throughout the Islands and to have been indicated by apparatus as far away as Washington D.C.

  Those who were awake shortly before the quake was felt heard a rumbling noise . . . Buildings creaked and squeaked and groaned but no damage is reported to have occurred any where on Maui.

  It is coincidence that the quake of Sunday morning occurred on the day of the anniversary of one of about equal severity. On March 20, 1926 there was a disturbance of about equal violence and length at 10:30 at night. The earth movement seemed different, however, being vertical rather than horizontal. A year ago there was a wider sway, the motion of Sunday being rather up and down. The climax or "twist" seemed to be about the same intensity.

  Following the shake-up in Wailuku there was bedlam among the canine residents . . . .

  In Lahaina side and in West Maui generally the shock was severe. . . . in the vicinity of Honolua the pheasants were thrown into a state of consternation . . .

  Joseph Herrscher of Hana said the shock was felt there but that it was not severe.

  . . . .

  Several from Haiku maintained that it was severest and longest in that section, others contended that it was felt more in Paia and then some of the Kahului and Wailuku residents maintained these two centers bore the burden of the shock . . .

  . . . The shock was severe at the Kilauea observatory, sufficient to dismantle the delicately arranged seismographic instruments, On that island dishes were thrown from shelves and bottles upset.

  At the University of Hawaii in Honolulu the instruments recorded the start of the quake at 4:51:07 and the maximum intensity at 4:51:50 and that it had completely died away at 4:59. A slight shock was recorded there an hour later but appears not to have been noticed on Maui.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1927

%T Lava returns to Halemaumau; crowds of people rush to scene of activity

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1, 7

%8 07/07

%K kl.hm.1927, precursor.eruption.seismicity.crack

%X [subheads: Without any warning, molten rock reappears in world-famed fire pit; Brilliant glow seen in skies gives first intimation of weird activity; night watchman at volcano house is first to see spectacular drama unfold at the crater of Kilauea]

Volcano House, July 7-- . . .

 Starting at approximately 12:45 a.m., without any of the usual earthquakes or other activities, three huge fountains started spurting molten lava into the air. . . .

 The remainder of the article summarizes the activity in Halemaumau and the following seismic observations:

 "An inspection of the seismograph at the Kilauea observatory this morning revealed the fact that there had been very slight earthquakes at 11:13 and 11:46 p.m. last night. A more severe quake occurred at 3:31 a.m. today.

 "A few days ago a large crack developed in the pit area, and this was followed by several avalanches. It was not thought at the time that this was an indication of lava near the surface, however."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1927

%T Volcano stirs; pit is filling

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1, 2

%8 07/07

%K kl.hm.1927, precursor.eruption.seismicity

%X [subheads: Lava spurts 'full blast' at Kilauea; Halemaumau pit breaks out at 1 in morning after slight tremors; Four fountains, 125 five [sic] feet high, play as fire rolls into great hole]

 The article recounts the return of lava to Halemaumau.

 . . . There was no perceptible earthquake to mark the start of the flow, but a rumbling noise was heard at the Volcano. . . .

 . . . .

 Study of the seismographs at the volcano observatory disclosed slight tremors at 11:13 and 11:46 p.m. and a series of slight tremors from 10 p.m. to midnight, as is customary preceding a flow of lava into the pit.

 The seismograph also registered and earthquake at 3:21 o'clock this morning, which woke a few people in Hilo.

A harmonic tremor at 12:32 a.m. was the closest indication of any activity at the pit, as it showed that lava was active underground. The eruption occurred between that time and 1 o'clock.

 Additional articles entitled "Eruptions of 1924 recalled by lava flow" and "With Dr. Jaggar on Alaskan trip Pele gets busy."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1927

%T Lava flows again into Kilauea pit

%B Maui News

%P p. 1

%8 07/09

%K kl.hm.1927, precursor.eruption.seismicity

%X An announcement of a new eruption in Halemaumau, beginning at about 1 a.m. Thursday morning [Jul. 7].

. . . .

 "Prior to the resumption of activity Thursday morning there were no violent quakes, though between 11 and midnight there were mild ones registered by the seismograph." . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1927

%T Avalanching gains at Halemaumau; new activity expected since slides and shakes which occurred Sunday

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 07/25

%K eq.1927/07/25.mlnf??, eq.1927/07/25.hil?

%X A great increase in avalanches along the north and northeast walls of Halemaumau pit were noted yesterday. These avalanches and two earthquakes which rocked the island this morning are taken as an indication by some that renewed activity may soon be expected at the crater.

. . . .

  The first earthquake felt was registered at the volcano seismograph at 2:07 a.m. and the second at 6:13 a.m. Both quakes, while light, were felt in Hilo as well as in the volcano district.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1927

%T Island of Hawaii rocked by severe earthquake today

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 08/03

%K eq.1927/08/03.hil?

%X Subheads:

Tremor is claimed to be worst felt throughout Big Island for many months

Kona and Hilo seismographs as well as Volcano instrument report strong shake

  A sharp earthquake which struck Hilo and all of the Big Island at 9:42 o'clock this morning is said by officials at Kilauea Volcano Observatory to have been the most severe of [illegible] for many months and possibly exceeding the strong shake of March 20.

  Reports from Captain Woods, in charge of the seismograph at Kona, and from the observers of the seismograph at the Brothers School in Hilo tallied with the Volcano Observatory instruments in indicating equally strong tremors at each point. In this circumstance, the officials work indicates that the quake was most probably felt in all of the islands, but so far they have not received reports from elsewhere.

  The shake dismantled both of the seismographs at the observatory, so that only the beginning of the shake was recorded and the officials cannot tell how long the duration was.

Hilo is alarmed

  From all parts of Hilo reports came here of residents being alarmed by the shock, but as far as can be learned no damage was done by the tremor.

  . . . .

[The rest of the report discusses unfounded rumors of volcanic activity associated with the quake]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1927

%T Quakes herald volcano action, belief in Kau; Increase of shocks in lower districts thought of significance

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 7

%8 08/05

%K eq.1927/08/03.hil?, precursor.eruption.seismicity

%X Pahala, Hawaii, Aug. 3.--That Pele is grooming herself for another spectacular outburst either at the crater of Halemaumau, where she recently appeared in all her glory or on the top of Mauna Loa, is the belief in Kau, with the increase in frequency of earthquake shocks.

 At 9:42 o'clock this morning, standard time, one of the severest earthquakes ever felt here shook the district. In fact, old timers feel that it was the hardest shock felt since the Alika flow took place in 1919. No severe damage was caused by the shock, except for some breakage, when glassware and other merchandise fell from the shelves of the Kau stores.

 Many residents claim that the shock traveled east and away from the point of greatest activity above Kahuku. J. Silva, a luna in Pahala, who happened to be in one of the fields furthest west, heard the movement of the earth in the direction of Kahuku a few seconds before the shock was felt.

 Other shocks were felt during the day in Kapapala country. the shocks are only a continuance of a series of earth movements felt during the last few weeks.

    Less severe at Volcano

Volcano House, Hawaii, Aug. 4.--an earthquake of magnitude to dismantle the seismographs at the Kilauea volcano observatory was recorded at 9:42 a.m. Wednesday.

 Although felt by only a few guests at the Volcano House, it was more violent at Kona and Hilo, from where reports came of the dislodgment of dishes and rattling of windows. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1927

%T Hard quake has center at Kilauea; seismic activity may precede outbreak at volcano

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 08/06

%K eq.1927/08/03.hil?

%X An abstract of the Hilo Tribune Herald article of August 3, with no additional information. [Unfortunate lack of confirmation as to whether the earthquake of August 3 was felt on other islands]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1927

%T Slight tremor is felt in Kona area; no damages done though newer teachers in school are excited

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. ?

%8 10/21

%K eq.1927/10/16.kona, eq.1927/09/27.kao

%X Kealakekua, Oct. 21 (special)

  At 5:58 p.m. last Sunday evening a slight earthquake was felt in Kealakekua and the surrounding district. It was only of a few seconds duration.

  Consternation reigned among the new mainland teachers at Konawaena. They rushed from the room when they felt the house quiver. They declared the walls and windows were nearly shaken loose. In the high school laboratory several electrical instruments were jolted out of commission.

  However not great damage had been reported.

  This is the second noticeable tremor felt in Kona since September the first. The other, early in September, was just a trifle more violent than the one last Sunday evening.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1928

%T Pele fails to show up after big earthquake

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 4

%8 12/28

%K eq.1928/12/25.ksf?

%X [subheads: Heavy shock on Christmas night aroused hope that pit would be active; Many residents in District are awakened from slumber by violent shake]

Volcano House, Dec. 28--(special)--Despite the hope that the violent earthquake of Christmas night was a forerunner of activity at the pit, no signs of the return of Madam Pele to Halemaumau are noted today.

  The disturbance occurred at 10:15 on Christmas night and was of such intensity as to almost dismantle the seismographs at both the volcano and Uwekahuna observatories. Many residents of the district were awakened by the shake, but no damage was reported at any of the homes.

  Officials in charge of the observatory express the belief that the quake originated somewhere in the vicinity of the volcano. This led to the predictions that Madam Pele was about to stage a comeback, but so far there has been no actual sign of her return.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Quake centering at Halemaumau rocks Big Isle

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 02/05

%K eq.1929/02/05.klcaldeep

%X Hilo, Hawaii, Feb. 5.--A sharp earthquake rocked the Big Island at 2:25 a.m. today. The quake was felt as far as Kohala and Kona.

 Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar, Jr. says the tremblor had its center at Halemaumau and he was surprised at its wide sweep. Although it was felt only a minute, instruments recorded it as lasting for 10 minutes.

 Jaggar said it may be an indication of impending activity in the volcanic pit of Kilauea, although this is uncertain.

 No damage was done.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Great avalanches tear away landmarks at Halemaumau

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 5

%8 02/11

%K eq.1929/02/05.klcaldeep, kl.hm.1929

%X Examination of Halemaumau. February 2, showed the rim gone to a depth apparently 15 feet more or less south and southeast, carrying away such landmarks as the old burned boards of the 1918 outhouse and the pinnacles just inside the rim, as well as the south station. The bronze datum bench mark southeast is on cracked dangerous ground at the extreme edge of the pit. A new tourist viewing platform for viewing the pit has been built at the east rim. The south talus was struck by the great avalanches and set in motion a landslide so as to cover the whole south half of the lava floor. this is much like what happened just a year ago, January 11, 1928. At that time. however. liquid lava was pressed up.

 . . .

 . . . one strongly felt earthquake (intensity IV Rossi-Forel scale) occurred at 2:25 a.m. February 5 so as to awaken sleepers generally. This shock was also felt at Hilo and Kohala, appeared to be local to Kilauea seismographically, and hence may represent a deep earthquake under the east side of the island.

 Tilt for the week was moderate ENE. All the seismographs showed an apparent easterly tilt at Kilauea during the earthquake. This suggests that if subterranean lava was concerned with the earthquake at all, the lava movement was one of rising. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Three quakes send Hiloites into streets; Shock lasts 7 seconds but no damage done; Jaggar says there's no danger

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 06/18

%K eq.1929/06/18.kao?, eq.1929/06/18.kona?

%X Hilo, June 18.--Three earthquakes shook Hilo at 8:43, 9:30 and 9:32 a.m. today. The last shock was strong and lasted seven seconds.

 The earthquakes caused much excitement, but no damage. Citizens rushed out of stores and houses into the street.

 The shocks were so strong that they dismantled the seismographs at Kilauea observatory. Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar, in charge of the observatory, stated that the tremors were not alarming, but "just a waving motion." He estimated the seat of disturbance to be 20 or 30 miles away, toward Mauna Loa.

 . . . .The quake caused some avalanching [in Halemaumau]. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Three quakes are felt here this morning

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 06/18

%K eq.1929/06/18.kao?, eq.1929/06/18.kona?

%X [subheads: T.A. Jaggar estimates that center of disturbance was 30 miles away; Many call newspaper; reports indicate tremors are noticeable in many parts of city]

  Three earthquakes were felt in Hilo today--one sharply defined and two mild.

  According to Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar, in charge of the Kilauea Observatory, seat of the disturbance was from 30 to 40 miles distant from the observatory, probably somewhere in the Mauna Loa region.

  It was 8:43 o'clock this morning when the first tremor occurred. This was barely noticeable in Hilo.

At 9:30 came a second shock. It lasted only a second, but was sufficiently strong to shake buildings.

Two minutes later, at 9:32, the third shock was felt. this one lasted 7 seconds, according to several persons who said they timed it here [P and S of one quake?].

  All Hilo and vicinity felt this third tremor . . . It was especially noticeable in the downtown business section, and shook some of the loosely constructed frame buildings, so that their timbers creaked and rattled.

  Officials and clerks on the second floor of the County building on Waianuenue avenue and Keawe street felt the third quake . . .

. . . .

  . . . "I know we felt the shocks sharply here at St. Joseph's parish house," says Father Sebastian.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Kona fears eruption of Mauna Loa

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1, 2

%8 09/24

%K eqs.1929/09.hu

%X Hilo, Sept. 23--Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar reported to the Volcano observatory at Kilauea National Park this afternoon at 3:15 that the center of earthquake shocks that has been rocking the Kona side of this island has been located at the northwest side of Hualalai, and that he believed that there was a possibility of volcanic activity taking place on the Kona side of Mauna Loa.

  The volcanologist declared that the same conditions exist now as in 1801 at the time of the Hualalai flow.

  The seismographs at the volcano observatory today registered 60 earthquakes as having taken place between 2 a.m. Sunday [Sept. 22] and 8 p.m. today.

  Frank Greenwell reported that more than two hundred shocks were felt during the same period at Holualoa, and that today more than 100 took place, most of them more severe than those of Sunday. There was a particularly strong shock reported at 10:31 this morning.

  Reports from all sections indicated that the temblors were strong at North Kona, and mauka of Waikii and Kohala but were quite slight at Kailua. A few shocks were felt in the Puueo section of Hilo on Sunday night.

  Jaggar on Hand; Hilo, Sept. 23--Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar, government expert on volcanoes, is inclined to believe that the continued earthquakes on the Kona side point towards activity probably on the slopes of Mauna Loa rather than Hualalai, it was said at the volcano observatory today.

  Dr. Jaggar is now in the Kona area.

  The observatory instruments indicate the origin of the quakes to be 18 to 30 miles from the observatory.

  They are characterized as typically volcanic, indicative of a rise or fall in the lava column under Mauna Loa.

  Several of the quakes have been felt slightly in Hilo.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Hawaii eruption Looms; on Hualalai predicted by Dr. Jaggar

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1, 2

%8 09/25

%K eqs.1929/09.hu, eq.1929/09/24.hu, periodicity. earthquake, forecast.eruption

%X [subheads: Hawaii volcano becoming active, says expert, back from Kona quake survey; "Almost anything likely to happen," he declares, calling attention to eruptions throughout the world; tremors are increasing]

  Returning late this afternoon from the Kona region, Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar, government volcanologist, declared that "it looks as though Hualalai is becoming active."

  Dr. Jaggar added that earthquakes around Hualalai are ten times as numerous as those recorded at the observatory. He said that the people of the Kona district are extremely nervous.

  "Something is happening over there," the volcanologist declared, "and it looks as though Hualalai is becoming active, but the situation is very complex. Seismic records indicate the seat of activity at Mauna Loa, while surface indications point to Hualalai. Almost anything is likely too happen."

  The article concludes with discussion of the timing of the earthquakes at the equinox and a discounting of the possibility of a summit eruption of Mauna Loa.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Quake damages Kona; Holualoa city threatened by terrific spasms

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 09/26

%K eqs.1929/09.hu, eq.1929/09/25.hu, forecast.eruption

%X [subheads: Entire island shaken by heavy tremor; landslide plunges into ranch house; Residents flee in terror as buildings rock; Jaggar predicts even heavier shock and eruption within month; mountain climbers find fences and water tanks wrecked by temblor]

  Holualoa, Hawaii, Sept. 25--Several homes and stores were reported damaged tonight when a terrific earthquake rocked the Kona district. Extent of the damage could not be ascertained. The earthquake occurred about 6:23 p.m.

  Hilo, Sept. 25--The entire island of Hawaii was shaken by a heavy earthquake--the strongest recorded during the present disturbance--at 6:23 this evening. Reports indicated that the Kona region bore the brunt of the tremor.

  Reports from Puuwaawaa said a landslide, caused by the shock, plunged down onto the Hind ranch house, smashing part of the foundations. Considerable damage to crockery was reported by residents of Puueo and Waiakea. Hundreds of persons, especially in Kona, fled their homes.

  A party, headed by Luther Aungst, telephone company superintendent, which was climbing Hualalai, where experts expect an eruption, returned toward Kona, reporting that the earthquake had shaken the mountain with terrific force.

  The climbers, who had reached the 4,000 foot level when the tremor occurred, said they found stone walls and water tanks on the slopes of the mountain wrecked by the force of the quake.

  They reported meeting Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar, government volcanologist, who warned them that they could expect still heavier shocks later on.

  Dr. Jaggar was on his way to Puuwaawaa to make observations. He was quoted in the afternoon as saying:

  "We may expect an eruption possibly from the northwest flank of Hualalai within a month, if the earthquakes which have shaken the island of Hawaii for the past five days, particularly in the Kona District, continue."

  Mrs. L. Lucas telephoned from Puuwaawaa that the landslide caused a small panic among the ranchers.

  All buildings were immediately vacated, and the occupants, fearing a larger slide, refused to return for several hours.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Lull in quakes may be forerunner of eruption

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 09/28

%K eqs.1929/09.hu, forecast.eruption

%X [subheads: Temblors on Hawaii lessen in intensity; Jaggar says this may presage lava outbreak; Kona district still nervous; Hotel's water tank cracked by Wednesday's tremor]

  Hilo, Hawaii, Sept. 27--Earthquake shocks that have rocked the Island of Hawaii for eight days decreased in intensity--a lull that, in the belief of Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar, may be the forerunner of an outbreak of lava in one of the Big Island's volcanoes.

  Both Kona and Hamakua experienced one fairly heavy shake this morning, but it was followed by an afternoon of comparative quiet.

  . . .

  Dr. Jaggar, government volcanologist, who is making observations in Puuwaawaa, reported a quiet day in the Kona area, adding that persons returning from a trip up Hualalai said they found no evidence of either fire or gas in the crater.

  The government expert said he still expects a quake even heavier than that of Wednesday.

  Reports from the Kona region showed that reports of damage resulting from the earthquakes have been exaggerated. One item not previously reported was a large crack which appeared in the water reservoir at the Kona Inn.

  Thomas Strathairn, Hilo agent of the Inter-Island S.N. Company is now making a survey of the entire region.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Army experts study best method of carrying out Thurston lava curb plan; Engineers to  report today on cost of proposal to control havoc from eruption by blasting tubes with TNT charge

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1, 2

%8 09/28

%K hazard.lava flow; hazard mitigation, lava diversion.bombing

%X A report of a meeting convened to consider the cost of an experiment to test the feasibility of Thurston's plan to divert Mauna Loa's lava flows by setting of explosive charges in skylights of a flow that has developed a lava tube system.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T More than two hundred shocks felt; Kilauea observatory reports extraordinary total for week

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 2

%8 09/28

%K eqs.1929/09.hu

%X An extraordinary large number of seismic disturbances have occurred during the week ending Sept. 25, the total count being 221. . . . The earthquakes appear to originate in North Kona district on the west side of the Island of Hawaii, but are felt all over the island, intensity increasing with distance. Due to crowding and overlapping lines on the seismograms some shocks could not be counted.

Table of earthquakes:

        Number of earthquakes recorded at Whitney

Date very feeble  feeble  slight  moderate

9/18      3          -       -        -

9/19      6          -       -        -

9/20      3          1       -        -

9/21     19          1       -        -

9/22     51          3       3        -

9/23     51          4       1        -

9/24     32         15       6        2

9/25     13          4       3        -





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Eruption imminent, says Jaggar; new quakes hit Hilo

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1, 2

%8 09/29

%K eqs.1929/09.hu, eq.1929/09/25.hu, forecast.eruption

%X [subheads: Hilo region experiences big shocks; Lava outbreak expected at any time now; Hawaii people still nervous; Three families vacate homes in order to get sleep]

  Hilo, Sept. 28-- . . . .

  The Hilo district experienced several heavy shocks during the day, particularly in Puueo and Kaumana, the strongest tremors occurring at about 7 a.m. and 2 p.m. And the volcano observatory on Kilauea announced that between 50 and 60 quakes were being recorded there daily. One quake, which apparently lasted between two and three minutes, dismantle the seismograph.

  Dr. Jaggar, who is in the Kona district, advised the observatory today that there had been several heavy tremors at Puuwaawaa. He said he looked for volcanic outbreak to come from either Mauna Loa or Hualalai, or from some point between Mauna Kea and Mauna Loa.

  A spirit of nervousness still pervades the entire island, for the people are awaiting with considerable apprehension the extremely heavy quake which Dr. Jaggar believes will precede the impending eruption.

  In fact three families, finding they could get little sleep, have vacated their homes in Puueo to seek some quieter district. Ironically enough, two of the three groups have decided to go to the Volcano house on Kilauea, all of the experts having agreed that there is virtually no chance of an eruption there.

  Reports from Kona indicate that many persons are still sleeping outdoors, as the result of the heavy quake last Wednesday [Sept. 25].

  In Kohala several earthquakes, two of them heavy, were felt last night and today. Other districts report light tremors of wide frequency.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Eruption on Hawaii may be delayed

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 09/30

%K eqs.1929/09.hu, eq.1929/09/25.hu, forecast.eruption, damage.earthquake

%X [subheads: Series of quakes are growing less frequent; Big landslide is described; Captain tells how wall of Kealakekua cliff fell]

  Hilo, Hawaii, Sept. 29--Quiet reigned on Hawaii's "earthquake front" tonight.

  Following the two heavy tremors that rocked the Kona and Hilo districts yesterday, the quakes diminished both in frequency and intensity today, resulting in a statement by Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar that the expected volcanic eruption may be delayed.

  From the Kona area where he reported all quiet the government volcanologists telephoned that the flow of lava which is causing the earthquakes may have found a new underground tunnel, with the result that, if the tremors continue to diminish, the eruption may be delayed.

  He added that the comparative scarcity in earthquakes may indicate a longer period intervening between heavy temblors.

  Dr. Jaggar's instruments showed that the two shocks yesterday afternoon were even more severe than that which caused considerable damage last Wednesday [Sept. 25], but were dissimilar in nature.

  An account of how a section of the cliff at Kealakekua was hurtled down by Wednesday's quake was brought to Hilo this morning by Captain J.K. Bruns of the motorship Kailua.

  The ship was anchored in Kealakekua at the time of the quake and Captain Bruns said he say a great section of the cliff slide off and plunge onto the rocks below. He believes that because of the peculiar motion of the ship, that a marine disturbance may have accompanied the earthquake.

  Light quakes at wide intervals were reported from Waimea, Hamakua and Kohala today, and the observatory on Kilauea reported that nothing of consequence had been observed there.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Airplane search for possible lava outbreak

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1, 2

%8 10/01

%K eqs.1929/09.hu, eq.1929/09/30.hu, forecast.eruption

%X [subheads: Jaggar wants navy ship to circle island; Expert scouts theory of eruption at remote point; 2 big shocks felt at Hilo; Average of 29 quakes an hour recorded in Kona]

  Hilo, Hawaii, Sept. 30--An airplane survey of the island of Hawaii, to determine whether there has been an outbreak of lava in some remote part of the mountains, will be sought by Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar, government volcanologist, now observing earthquake shocks in the Kona district.

  While inclined to discredit reports of such a flow, Dr. Jaggar announced tonight that he will request a navy airplane, which is due at Hilo tomorrow, make a survey to make sure that no outbreak has occurred.

  Dr. Jaggar reported from Puuwaawaa that his seismograph had recorded an average of 29 quakes an hour during the past 24 hours. Most of the tremors were light, but distinct, and were felt only near the center of the greatest underground disturbance.

  Two severe shocks were felt in Hilo and Kona today. One of these, occurring at 11:55 a.m. was extremely heavy, destroying several stone fences on the slopes of Hualalai. The other intense tremor was felt at 12:20 p.m.

  From Kealakekua came a report from R.V. Wood that the seismograph there recorded 70 quakes in the 24 hours ending at 8 a.m. today. Many of these were so indistinct that they could not be felt, Wood said.

  L.S. Aungst of the Hawaii Telephone company stated that he counted 105 tremors at Holualoa yesterday, adding that the quakes seemed to increase in intensity as one neared Puuwaawaa.

  The seismograph at the Kilauea observatory continues to register from 50 to 100 shakes daily.

  . . . No sign of a lava flow was visible on either [Mauna Loa or Mauna Kea].





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Jaggar says lava blast plan feasible; Thurston proposal workable if molten flow is slow one

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 10/01

%K hazard.lava flow; hazard mitigation, lava diversion.bombing

%X Jaggar opines that Thurston's plan to disrupt lava channels with explosives would work for an eruption like that of 1881. It would not work for a fast moving flow, like the one that came down the steep slopes of Hualalai in 1801.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Earthquakes diminish on Big Island

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 10/02

%K eqs.1929/10.hu, forecast.eruption

%X [subheads: Apprehension lessens as Hawaii has quiet day; Jaggar still expects lava; Expert says eruption might not occur for a year]

  Hilo, Oct. 1--Hawaii's "earthquake areas" reported all quiet today.

  Reports from all sections of the Big Island said that earthquake shocks, which have been felt for nearly two weeks, had diminished immensely during the last 24 hours.

  However, Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar, government volcanologist, did not interpret this as meaning that the long awaited volcanic eruption would not materialize.

  . . . . 

  There were several distinct earthquake shocks during the day, but they came at wide intervals. Residents of the Kaumana district reported that at 5:55 this morning there occurred the strongest tremor yet experienced there. Other sections of Hilo were without notable shocks, however.

  While the United Press correspondent was talking with Dr. Jaggar this evening by telephone the volcanologist, who is at Puuwaawaa, interrupted the conversation to cry:

  "Here comes another quake right now."

  This was at 7:25. A moment later Dr. Jaggar returned to the telephone and reported that the quake was the heaviest recorded during the day.

  The seismograph at the Kilauea observatory recorded 20 shocks between 6 a.m. and 6 p.m.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Maui woman in Kona during earthquakes

%B Maui News

%P p. 2

%8 10/02

%K eq.1929/09/25.hu

%X A woman reports that the earthquake of Sept. 25, 1929 had the greatest damage in Kona, but was felt very severely, with much consternation of the populace, at Kohala and in Hilo.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Lava breaks may come in 3 volcanoes; Jaggar says prediction of eruption stands despite quiet

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1, 2

%8 10/05

%K eqs.1929/10.hu, forecast.eruption

%X A few earthquake shocks, gradually decreasing in both frequency and intensity, were reported today from the West side of Hawaii, chiefly in the vicinity of Puuwaawaa.

 [Jaggar reaffirms prediction of eruption within a year, more probably within a month, at any one of Hawaii's three volcanoes]

  The seismographs at the observatory were dismantle eleven times by earthquake shocks during the week ending last Wednesday [Sept. 26-Oct. 2].

  [An annunciator connected to the seismographs at the observatory rings a bell to alert the staff when the instruments are dismantled]

  Earthquakes registered. were as follows, by days: September 25, 63; 26, 61; 27, 27; 28, 27; 29, 29; 30, 15; October 1, 19, October 2, 3. September 25 and October 2 are incomplete days coming at the beginning and end of the period covered by this report. It should be stated that many more shocks are felt in West Hawaii, the apparent center of the present seismic disturbance, than are recorded at Kilauea.

  Thirteen shocks give distances of 23 miles, 10 distance 28 miles, 6 distance 30 miles, 7 distance 32 miles, other distances varying from 14 to 46 miles from the observatory.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Earth quake damages Hilo

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1, 2

%8 10/06

%K eqs.1929/10.hu, eq.1929.10/05.hu, forecast.eruption

%X [subheads: All districts report fresh disturbances; Constant series of earthquake shocks experienced; Heavy tremors felt in Waimea; Quakes revive reports of impending eruption]

  Hilo, Oct. 5--Heavy damage is reported to have resulted from a heavy earthquake, the most severe of the recent volcanic disturbances, which rocked the Island of Hawaii between 9:21 and 9:22 last night.

  Indirect reports from the Kona section reported that the tremor was by far the worst yet experienced. Several water tanks were reported to have been damaged. It was rumored that two houses at Puuwaawaa were shaken off their foundations.

  In the Hilo district the quake was heaviest at Puueo. People fled from their houses there, and windows and crockery were broken. Residents said trees swayed as though in a high wind. Plaster was knocked from several walls and many clocks were stopped by the shock.

  The Kohala district was reported to have been severely shaken.

  Hilo, Oct. 5--After several days of quiet, volcanic tremors were shaking the island of Hawaii again today.

  From Waimea, Honokaa and Puuwaawaa came reports that earthquake shocks were almost continuous during the night, giving rise to renewed reports that eruptions were imminent in one of the three volcanoes.

  The Puueo district of Hilo experienced a steady procession of temblors, some of them exceptionally heavy, up until three a.m., and residents of Waiakea reported two severe shocks during the night.

  The same two shocks were felt in the city of Hilo.

  Waimea apparently bore the brunt of the night's volley of tremors, the quakes there being the heaviest felt in the district since the earth disturbances began three weeks ago. Quakes at Honokaa were almost continuous, but lighter than those felt in Waimea.

  The Kona district, dominated by Hualalai, where Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar predicts an eruption, was thrown out of its temporary serenity by the new shakes.

  Puna apparently escaped the tremors, for a report from Mountain View said there was no unusual occurrence during the night.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Quake does little damage

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1, 2

%8 10/07

%K eqs.1929/10.hu, eq.1929.10/05.hu, forecast.eruption

%X [subheads: Big Island gets heaviest shock in twenty years; local temblor harmless; Hawaii volcanoes remain inactive; Oahu quake caused excitement but no damage; tremor felt in Molokai, not in Midway]

  Saturday night's earthquake was generally felt all over Hawaii, in all sections of Oahu and at Kunakakai, Molokai.

  It caused much minor damage in Hawaii, none in Oahu or on Molokai.

  Kauai and Maui sent no reports of any temblors. The cable company reported that Midway Island reported "all serene."

  Yesterday passed without any further tremors [on Oahu].

  A careful, island-wide check of earthquake results indicated that while all sections of Oahu felt Saturday night's quake, and residents were greatly disturbed by it, little damage of any kind was caused by it.

  The city water department reported one waterpipe broken [on Kailua street, between Fort and Nuuanu].

  Rattling dishes were reported literally from every section of the city. Houses rocked and windows clattered in their frames, but beyond this no damage was reported.

  Many people, residents in the Punchbowl, Pacific Heights and Makiki Heights regions felt the shock very forcibly and some went into their gardens to wait for the tremor to subside.

  It is reported that some cows in the Kapahulu district appeared to be frightened by the strange motion of their stalls and made plaintive noises. Dogs are alleged to have barked out of turn.

 . . . .

  People who happened to be at the beach assert that the sea did a strange sort of "shimmy" motion and shot some extra-high waves a few moments after the shock.

  [A fissure in the ground appeared before the quake, evidently exposed by heavy rain and unconnected with the quake]

  The article continues with additional anecdotal description of reactions to the quake.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Hawaii quiet again after shock; No tremors reported from any part of Big Island

%B Honolulu Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 10/08

%K eqs.1929/10.hu, eq.1929.10/05.hu, damage.earthquake

%X Hilo, Oct. 7--In vivid contrast with yesterday's aftermath of excitement following the big shake-up of Saturday night, today has been a practically normal day on Hawaii, with few earth tremors. The people of Hilo and all of the rest of the island have returned to their usual calm.

  Belated reports from interior points say that a large number of road cracks have appeared between Waimea and Holualoa. Repair gangs will be started to work at once to cover them.

  From West Hawaii come reports that a few old houses had been shaken down, but no one was injured. Dishes appear to have been the main casualties. Several old walls and water tanks were also broken as a result of Saturday night's powerful temblor.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Saturday quake is called worst in thirty years

%B Maui News

%P p. 1

%8 10/09

%K eq.1929.10/05.hu

%X Buildings in all parts of Maui swayed and rocked and squeaked and groaned Saturday evening, under the strain put on them by an earthquake which it is generally agreed was the severest felt on this island in many years. By comparison, the one felt on September 25, was little more than a "tremor." so far as reported there was no serious damage to property, however, and no injury to persons. . . .

  It was at 9:22 that the temblor gave Maui its shaking and the estimates as to how long it lasted varies from 20 seconds to two minutes, a conservative one being from 20 to 30 seconds. It was strong enough and lasted long enough to send some folk scurrying out from their homes or the buildings where they chanced to be and for them to reach the street before the movement ceased.

 . . . .

  Some describe the motion as coming from South to North which is probably correct as it undoubtedly had its source in Kona, Hawaii, and say that it was a "swaying" motion. Others say the rocking was from East to West or West to East. The writer had just reached the top of the stairs at the third floor of the Wailuku Hotel and to him the sensation was as if the building were being twisted . . .

  The rest of the article repeats information on effects on Hawaii and Oahu





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Kona district gets its daily temblor quota; slight earthquakes still felt in Holualoa; two jolts Sunday

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 11/18

%K eqs.1929/10.hu

%X Although all other districts of the Big Island are comparatively quiet daily, earthquakes are still felt in the Kona district, according to L.W. Aungst, of Holualoa.

  Most of the shocks are so feeble that they are hardly discernible but there is usually one strong one a day, Aungst told the Tribune Herald today.

  Yesterday afternoon there were two sharp quakes, one occurring at 2:18 p.m. and one at 4:02 p.m.. Slight ones continued during the night, and there was a heavier one at 9:23 a.m. today. All were felt, slightly stronger in the Huehue and Puu Waawaa districts which have been the center of the disturbances for the past two months.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Kona district gets its daily temblor quota; slight earthquakes still felt in Holualoa; two jolts Sunday

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. 1

%8 11/18

%K eqs.1929/10.hu

%X Although all other districts of the Big Island are comparatively quiet daily, earthquakes are still felt in the Kona district, according to L.W. Aungst, of Holualoa.

  Most of the shocks are so feeble that they are hardly discernible but there is usually one strong one a day, Aungst told the Tribune Herald today.

  Yesterday afternoon there were two sharp quakes, one occurring at 2:18 p.m. and one at 4:02 p.m.. Slight ones continued during the night, and there was a heavier one at 9:23 a.m. today. All were felt, slightly stronger in the Huehue and Puu Waawaa districts which have been the center of the disturbances for the past two months.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Earthquake is felt here last night at 8:29; Jolt apparently has base near Kilauea, volcano experts say

%B Hilo Tribune-Herald

%P p. ?

%8 11/21

%K eq.1929/11/20.ksf?

%X A sharp earthquake jarred Hilo at 8:29 p.m. Wednesday, the first shock felt locally in several weeks. . . This shock differed from those of preceding weeks in that it was apparently a local shock. It was not felt in the Kona district . . . .

 . . . the quake was reported as feeble, with origin estimated at 12 miles from the observatory.

 This . . . would indicate that the shock originated in the vicinity of Kilauea, or possible on the northeast ridge of Mauna Loa.





%0 Magazine Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Earthquakes

%B Hawaiian Annual for 1930

%P p. 128

%8 Sept. 27

%K WT, eqs.1929.hu, hc.hu

%X A brief mention of the earthquake swarm in September and October, 1929, associated with Hualalai. Especially strong earthquakes were reported on September 23 and on October 15.





%0 Journal Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Seismological notes

%J Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America

%V v. 19

%N no. 4

%P p. 235-237

%K eq.1929/10/05.hu, eq.1929/10/10.hu, eqs.1929/09.hu

%X Hawaii, October 5, 1929.--Climaxing two weeks of almost constant earthquakes on the island of Hawaii, an earthquake occurred on October 5th which was said to be the most violent shock there in twenty-five years. Dishes were broken in Hilo. Press reports state that furniture was toppled over, water tanks were burst, a stone wall was flung over, and foundations of houses were displaced in Holualoa.

  The town of Puu Waawaa was hit hardest by the shocks. The total damage in the Kona district, on the west side of the island, was estimated at $500,000. The seismograph at the Kilauea Volcano Observatory recorded thirty-five tremors in five hours. Officials at the station reported 244 shocks as being recorded on the seismograph in the week ending October 5th, the instrument being dismantled eleven times by shocks.

  Press reports state that the shock "rocked the entire island for twenty-three seconds."



Hawaii, October 10, 1929.--Earthquake conditions over the island of Hawaii were quieter by October 10th, although one shock was felt all over the island on that date at 6:30 a.m.



Island of Hawaii, October 21, 1929.--Thirty-six earthquakes were felt on the island of Hawaii on October 21st, within one hour and forty-five minutes. The town of Holualoa, eight miles from the extinct volcano, Hualalai, was severely shaken. The shocks were the first heavy ones felt on the island for nearly three weeks.





%0 Journal Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Seismological notes

%J Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America

%V v. 19

%N no. 1

%P p. 57-58

%K eq.1929/02/05.kcaldeep

%X Hilo, Territory of Hawaii, February 5, 1929.--A sharp earthquake was felt at 2:25 p.m. on February 5th on the island of Hawaii. It lasted one minute in the district of Kohala, Kona, and Hilo, but no damage was reported.





%0 Journal Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Seismological notes

%J Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America

%V v. 19

%N no. 2

%P p. 107

%K eq.1929/06/18.kao?, eq.1929/06/18.kfz?

%X Hilo, Island of Hawaii, T.H., June 18, 1929.--Three earthquakes shook Hilo between 8:43 and 9:32 a.m. on June 18th. No damage was done.





%0 Journal Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T Seismological notes

%J Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America

%V v. 19

%N no. 3

%P p. 184-185

%K eqs.1929.hu

%X Volcano Hualalai, Hawaii, September 19, 1929.--Earthquakes rocked the volcano Hualalai throughout the night of September 19th, and caused ranchers in the vicinity to move their cattle and household goods because they feared that, should the shocks continue, the volcano would erupt.



Hilo, Hawaii, September 22, 1929.„Fifty-eight earthquake shocks were felt within three hours„nine o'clock to noon„near the volcano Hualalai on September 22d. The shock of strongest intensity felt in Hilo on September 22d occurred at about 2:00 a.m.



Hilo, Hawaii, September 24,1929.„More earth shocks were felt in Hilo, near the volcano Hualalai on September 24th. Tropical fruits and nuts were shaken from the trees and houses rocked. Several shocks were felt during the day, one just after noon, lasting twenty-five seconds.



Hilo, Hawaii, September 28,1929.„An earthquake rocked the entire city of Hilo, at 7:10 a.m. on September 28th. One of the main streets was badly damaged in two places. The Catholic Church was moved on its foundations, and marred by many cracks. The district of Puu Ooo [sic.], about fifteen miles east of Hilo, appears to be where the shocks are concentrated, and residents were attempting to get away from this place. The Volcano Observatory at Kilauea reported fifty earthquakes in twenty-four hours.



Hawaii, September 29, 1929.„Earthquakes continued to rock the island of Hawaii on September 29th, though with less intensity and at longer intervals than those felt within the past week. At 5:00 a.m. the populace was awakened by a series of shocks lasting half an hour, which were reported strong all over the island. The Volcano Observatory reported twenty-five tremors between noon on September 28th and 8 a.m. on September 29th, one of which dismantled part of the instruments.



Hawaii, September 30,1929.„Seismic activity in Hawaii shifted to the western slope of the island on September 30th, where 480 earthquakes were reported to have occurred in twenty-four hours. At Holualoa the heaviest earthquake since the activity began on September 19th was felt. The shocks, starting just before noon, lasted an hour and a half.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1929

%T New quake warning issued

%B Honolulu Daily Advertiser

%P p. 1

%8 09/27

%K WT, eqs.1929.hu, hc.hu, eruption.earthquake.tsunami.forecast

%X Several news items cover the earthquake swarm on Hualalai and T.A. Jaggar's forecast for a larger earthquake and possible eruption and tsunami similar to the events of 1868. As of September 24, 246 earthquakes had been felt in the Kona district.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1930

%T Earthquake is felt in Kona today as cleanup is started

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 01/28

%K eq.1930/01/28.kona?

%X [subheads: West Hawaii citizens are working busily to bring order to region; girl is recovering; damage to district still unestimated; will reach many thousands]

  An earthquake of some intensity shook Kona about 10:10 a.m. Mrs. Luther Aungst told the Hilo Tribune-Herald today that the tremor was the most severe since the long series of quakes several months ago [the Hualalai series in Sept.-Oct. 1929]. No damage was done.

  A check with the Volcano Observatory shows that the Kona quake had an amplitude of about three quarters of an inch on the seismograph drum [assume Kona seismograph].

  The rest of the article deals with the aftermath of flooding during a heavy storm.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1930

%T Temblor is recorded at observatory; shock similar to quakes last fall felt strongly in kona district

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 05/21

%K eq.1930/05/20.huos?

%X With an earthquake shock occurring at 6:52 p.m. yesterday, two shocks of the characteristics of those which rocked the Big Island last fall, centering on the Hualalai district, have been recorded on the volcano observatory seismograph during a 24 hour period. The first occurred at 2:47 a.m. Tuesday.

   Both shocks were practically of the same character, and correspond to a distance on the far side of Kona in the Hualalai district," Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar, volcanologist, told the Tribune-Herald today. "They had the same general character of the shocks last fall."

  According to Jaggar there is nothing on the seismograph to indicate a rising of lava, and all is quiet at the pit.

  "All we know at present," he said, "is that there have been two quakes which give evidences of distances around 60 or 70 miles, and which have all the characteristics of those which occurred last fall."

  Both shocks were strongly felt in the Hualalai region, at Puu Waawaa and Holualoa, according to Dr. Jaggar. They were noticed in Hilo, particularly in Puueo as was the case last fall. 

  Very few quakes have been recorded on the seismograph during the past few months, according to Dr. Jaggar. Those that have appeared to give evidence originating to the south in the Kau district and were entirely different from those of yesterday.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1930

%T Severe temblor rocks east side of Big Island

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 05/26?

%K eq.1930/05/25.ksf?

%X A sharp earthquake rocked the Big Island at 8:15 last night. The shock was felt in all districts, but apparently was stronger on the eastern side of the island from Hamakua to Kau.

  According to Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar, volcanologist, the shock was entirely local, and as recorded on the seismograph appeared to originate directly beneath the eastern side of the island.

  "The vertical component was strong which is an indication of a local shock," Dr. Jaggar told the Tribune-Herald today. He added that these local shocks have occurred repeatedly when there was no eruption, but that they also came just before an eruption. All is quiet at the pit with no indication of pending eruption.

  Reports from the Kona district, which was the center of the quakes last fall, indicate that the shock was not so severe there as in Hilo. According to Dr. Jaggar, the shock last night was entirely different from those of last week which were of the Hualalai character.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1930

%T Earthquake felt in west Hawaii; Puueo and Hilo; shock throws pen off drum of volcano observatory seismograph

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 07/22

%K eq.1930/07/22.mlnf?

%X What is thought to have been a Hualalai earthquake shock, shook the Kohala, Kona, Hilo, and volcano districts at 1:35 p.m. today. While mild in character at Hilo and at 29 miles, volcano, the shake was more severe at Puu Waawaa and in Kohala. At Kohala objects were shaken off shelves.

  Luther Aungst, at Holualoa, declared that the quake was the most severe felt in that district this year, in fact, since October of last year when the prolonged series of quakes shook the west side of the island. The Kealakekua seismograph recorded the shock distinctly.

  W. Leslie West at Hawi reported the Kohala district shaken generally, with the quake of sufficient strength to knock objects from shelves. No damage was done.

  At Puuwaawaa the tremor was of considerable violence.

  A report from the volcano observatory says that the east-west pen was thrown from the drum. However, no data on the quake can be obtained until the drum is removed from the instrument this evening. The shock was not felt at the Volcano House. However, it was felt at 29 miles, volcano, in Puueo and in Hilo proper, but recorded slightly in these localities.

  In Kohala the quake was said to have lasted from 20 to 30 seconds. It lasted from 10 to 11 in Holualoa.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1930

%T Quake twists Big Island t 8:25 A.M. today; no damage reported after stiff jolt; volcano observatory says tremor had center in pit of Halemaumau

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1, 3

%8 10/20

%K eq.1930/10/20.klcaldeep?

%X Striking Hilo with a stiff but relatively harmless jar at 8:25 a.m. today, and earthquake, reported by the Volcano observatory as centering on Halemaumau, was felt all the way around the island, . . . accompanied by avalanching at the fire pit.

  Several bottles were shaken from the shelf in the Standard Drug Company. The Hilo Memorial Hospital reported a disturbing shock in which some medicine containers toppled. A porch table fell in Puueo.

  . . . .

  The Hilo Tribune Herald building shook with some insistence. Typewriters danced the hula on editorial department desks. Solidly built, as the new County building is, it felt the shock heavily. . . .

  [in one building a previously broken large plate glass window was further damaged by the quake].

  In County Auditor Brown's office, also on the street floor of the County building, the ceiling was cracked in several places by the quake, and plaster was shaken from the walls.

  On the second floor of the County building, however, the shock was sufficient to rock steel cabinets.

  [The shock was felt in Honokaa and quite distinctly in Kohala.] Mrs. Luther Aungst, of Holualoa, reported a shock of several seconds duration in Kona, [beginning like a passing truck and developing into a considerable tremble.]

  Puuwaawaa, too, sustained a good jar. At the Hind ranch fixtures were reported swinging as the quake's result.

  In Kau, H.L. Wilhelm [reported] a cloud of dust rising from the cliffs behind Keauhou at the time the quake was reported elsewhere, evidently a landslide.

  The quake was very severe in Waiohinu. . . There was no damage to amount to anything, but articles fell from the shelves of many of the stores.





%0 Journal Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1930

%T Seismological notes

%J Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America

%V v. 20

%N no. 2

%P p. 101

%K eq.1930/05/20.hu.os?

%X Hilo, Hawaii, May 20, 1930.--A strong earth shock was felt on the island of Hawaii at 6:52 p.m. on May 20th. It was the second shock within twenty-four hours.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1931

%T Tremor felt in all parts of Big Island; Jaggar declares quake had center near Halemaumau; no activity

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 01/30

%K eq.1931/01/29.klcaldeep?

%X The entire island was rocked by an earthquake at 11:35 o'clock last night which, although not severe, was prolonged, lasting approximately 30 seconds.

  No damage was reported in any district.

  Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar, volcanologist, said today that the quake appears to have originated in the vicinity of Halemaumau, apparently closer than the sharp shock felt on the evening of January 16. The pit is quiet, with no indications of immediate activity.

  Luther S. Aungst, of Holualoa, Kona, reported by telephone that the shock was felt throughout Kona, Kohala, Hamakua, and Puna residents also report that the earthquake was experienced in these sections of the island.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1931

%T 3 earthquakes felt on island late Thursday; tremors follow within 24 hours of Dr. Jaggar's "Preparedness" talk

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 06/12

%K eq.1931/06/11.kao?, eq.1931/06/11.mlwf?, eq.1931/06/11.easthawaii

%X . . . three earthquakes visited the Big Island yesterday.

  The quakes yesterday did no damage, according to a check made by the Tribune-Herald. However, one of them, occurring at 6:62 p.m., was felt generally on the island, reaching on into Kona. Reports from Holualoa indicate that the tremor there was pronounced.

  Persons in the Puueo district in Hilo noticed a definite shake.

  Of the other two earthquakes, one occurred early in the afternoon and the other after 9 p.m. While both show on the seismograph at the Volcano observatory, neither created comment in this city.

  Dr. Howard Powers of the observatory declared that the strongest quake centered on the sides of Mauna Loa, 27 miles from the seismograph.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1931

%T Sharp quake rocks Hilo and N. Kona; Dr. T.A. Jaggar declares tremor is deep movement in Mauna Loa

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 08/31

%K eq.1931/08/30.ml

%X Hilo and North kona were rocked by a sharp earthquake at 6:54 a.m. Sunday [Aug. 30], which shock was classified today by Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar, volcanologist, as a Mauna Loa earthquake.

  Dr. Jaggar reports that the shock was very light in the volcano district and Olaa, being hardly perceptible at his home.

  "We estimate the origin as about 15 miles distant from the observatory. The evidence of the distance and the way it was felt in Hilo and North Kona indicate it originated on the north side of Mauna Loa," Dr. Jaggar said. "Indications are that the quake was a rather deep movement under the island [Distance inconsistent with description of location.]

  The pens of the seismograph at the observatory were thrown off at about the first movement of the quake.

  An avalanche occurred at Halemaumau at the time of the earthquake, Dr. Jaggar reports.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1931

%T New fountains play at Kilauea; floor of pit nearly covered

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 1

%8 12/26

%K kl.hm.1931

%X [subheads: Night display of fire draws large crowds; Cars flock to Halemaumau with spectators staying all night at crater; Strength of eruption is undiminished as lava outpouring continues]

 Most of the article concerns renewal of eruption in Halemaumau, starting Dec. 23, 1931.

 . . . .

 Thirty-four seismic disturbances were registered at the observatory, of which 28 were tremors, and six were very feeble earthquakes, of which four indicated origin distances of four, nine, 14 and 18 miles.

 The last, at 10 minutes past midnight the morning of December 16, was felt at Kapapala ranch. Its duration was approximately 15 seconds and its estimated origin distance agrees with the ranch distance within a mile.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1931

%T Lava streams pour from big southwest jet

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 12/31

%K eq.1931/12/30.mlner?, kl.hm.1931

%X [subheads: Activity continues at firepit without letup Today; Madame Pele puts on a brilliant show for visitors Wednesday]

 The article describes the eruption in Halemaumau, including the following:

 "An earthquake was felt in Hilo and in the volcano vicinity about 11:00 o'clock last evening. The quake was recorded on the volcano observatory seismograph as being about 14 miles from the observatory, or on the flank of Mauna Loa.

 "The earthquake of a week ago that preceded the eruption was close to the surface as it was felt only in the immediate vicinity of the volcano. Last night's shock however was more deep seated, being felt at a greater distance from the volcano."





%0 Journal Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1931

%T Seismological notes

%J Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America

%V v. 21

%N no. 3

%P p. 233

%K eq.1931/06/11.mlwf?

%X Hilo, Hawaii, June 11, 1931.--A severe earthquake was felt in Hilo at 5:53 p.m. on June 11th, but no damage was reported.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1932

%T Earth tremor shakes island; severe earthquake recorded at 4:55 a.m. today

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 06/14

%K eq.1932/06/14.kao

%X A severe earthquake was felt here at 4:55 a.m. today.

  The quake dismantled both components of the Bosch seismograph at the volcano observatory and jammed the pen of the verticle [sic] instrument which appears to indicate that the motion at the observatory was a strong verticle [sic] one.

  Records from the observatory show that the distance from the observatory was about 9 miles.

  The quake was felt by practically everyone in Hilo and the volcano, but the quake was not felt on the Kona side of the island.

  No damage has been reported as a cause of the quake.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1932

%T Quake lasts full minute; Hilo shaken during temblor Thursday at 10:29 p.m.

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 07/08

%K eq.1932/07/07.ksf?

%X Hilo was shaken Thursday night by an earthquake which lasted a full minute at 10:29 p.m.

  According to the Volcano observatory, the quake was severely felt at the volcano. Observatory instruments showed that the point of origin was about 15 miles from the observatory in the direction of Hilo.

  No definite explanation for the temblor could be made by volcano authorities. They stated that the quake was about the same intensity of that of three weeks ago and that it was probably caused by a crack in the earth's crust.

  No damage has been reported as the result of the quake.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1932

%T Much steam at volcano calls forth predictions

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 3

%8 12/05

%K eq.1932/12/03.ksfos?

%X . . . .

  . . . There have been the usual number of earthquakes with only one of any intensity. That one occurred Saturday [Dec. 3] at 1:30 p.m. but was not strong enough to be felt in the volcano district. There have been a few landslides [at Halemaumau], but none of any consequence.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1932

%T Slight quakes felt over Hilo; Two small temblors shake city Tuesday afternoon, evening; no pit changes

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 3

%8 12/28

%K eq.1932/12/27.klcaldeep?

%X Two small earthquakes felt in Hilo, one at 1:23 p.m. and the other at 8:54 p.m. Tuesday may or may not signify a movement of lava beneath the firepit of Halemaumau . . . .

 The tremor at 8:54 p.m. was less than half as strong as the one at 1:23 p.m. Few people felt either.

 The distance of the shakes was between 5 and 6 miles from the observatory. Mr. Jones declared they were about as far from Halemaumau as they were from the observatory, signifying that the quakes originated deep under the earth.

 After the tremor Tuesday afternoon, cracks at Halemaumau were measured and other observations were made, but no change was discovered.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1932

%T Puna has series of earthquakes; Kamainas prophesy that Madam Pele will return to firepit soon

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 3

%8 12/29

%K eqs.1932/12.klerz

%X The Puna district has been visited by a series of earthquakes during the past few days, according to Koji Iwasaki of Kamaili. While none of the shocks has been severe, the quakes have been quite frequent, he reports.

 Several shocks have been felt in Hilo recently, but none have been of any moment. . . . kamaainas to prophesy that Madame Pele will soon return to her home in Halemaumau. . . The frequent earthquakes, they say, is another warning of her return.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1933

%T Kilauea report; week ending Jan. 1

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 6

%8 01/06

%K eq.1932/12/27.klcaldeep?

%X  . . . .

 A feeble earthquake was felt at 1:21 p.m. Dec. 27. At the observatory the motion appeared to be largely vertical while at Glenwood 9 miles away trees were seen to be bent and swayed. It was also reported from Hilo and Pahoa. The earthquake occurred about 4 statute miles from the observatory. Investigation of the rim of the pit showed that no cracks had opened that day.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1933

%T Earthquake is felt on Big Island

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 06/23

%K eq.1933/06/22.mk

%X Hilo was rocked by a slight earthquake which occurred about 8:32 p.m. Thursday [June 22]. The quake was felt more sharply in some sections of Hilo than in others.

  At the volcano observatory it was reported that the quake originated about 50 mile from the observatory. Although not felt in the volcano district it was recorded on the seismograph which also recorded several other shocks during the night.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1933

%T Earthquake is felt in Hilo Tuesday night

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 09/27

%K eq.1933/09/26.mlnf

%X A slight earthquake, felt in some parts of Hilo, was recorded at Kilauea observatory at 9:15 p.m. Tuesday [Sept. 26].

  According to A.E. Jones of the observatory staff, the quake originated about 18 to 20 miles from the observatory.

  The shock was felt on Reed's Island, in Puueo, and was recorded at the Brothers' School.

  The rest of the article mentions the weekly summary of seismicity provided by HVO.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1933

%T Quake reminds Hilo that Kilauea is due to erupt

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 10/19

%K eq.1933/10/19.mlnf?

%X A sharp temblor which rocked Hilo at 5:55 this morning awoke citizens to a realization that Professor Zander's widely predicted volcano eruption is about due.

  The earthquake caused no damage but a check-up of the calendar shows that the sixty-day period during which Professor Zander prophesied Kilauea would erupt comes to a close Friday at Midnight.

  The article continues in this vein. [No eruption came.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1933

%T Eruption believed imminent

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 10/21

%K eq.1933/10/21.kao

%X [subheads: Explosions heard after earthquake; Volcano district aroused as mysterious blasts are heard; Two severe shocks occur at 9:10 A.M. today, felt all over island]

   a series of local earthquakes, the two most severe occurring at 9:10 a.m. today, in conjunction with two mysterious explosions heard throughout the Volcano district, led national park officials to believe that volcanic activity is imminent, despite the fact that officials of the volcano observatory refuse to make any predictions.

  . . . .

  A number of local earthquake shocks have been felt during the past few days and on Friday morning, following a heavier earthquake, two muffled explosions were heard in the vicinity of the Chain-of-Craters road.

  [A visit to the site was inconclusive. Inquiries regarding blasting in or near the park eliminated that as a possible source of the noise].

  At 9:10 a.m. today a severe shock was felt throughout the island, followed after a few seconds interval by a second shock, equally as severe, The shocks were felt throughout Hilo and were strongly felt in the business and residential districts. The shocks were particularly severe at Kapapala, Kau, where Mrs. Bradford Sumner recounted that they were the most severe of any since the Hoopuloa flow [1926].

  Officials at Dr. Jaggar's office reported the origin of the shocks as approximately seven miles southeast [southwest?] of the observatory.

  A cloud of dust swept the west wall of the large crater and another flew over the pit following the shocks.

  The developments today bring to mind again the prediction of Prof. Zander, who said there would be volcanic activity within 60 days, which period ended at midnight last night.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1933

%T Eruption of Mauna Loa, Kilauea, or both, now expected at any time

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1, 3

%8 10/23

%K eq.1933/10/21.kao, forecast.eruption

%X An article discussing the possibility of forthcoming eruption.

  "Saturday's seismic disturbances which caused much excitement throughout the Big Island were Mauna Loa quakes, according to Mr. Wingate. Two sharp quakes felt about 9:10 a.m. Saturday [Oct. 21] were followed by a 12-hour period of tremors of diminishing intensity. On Sunday and Monday everything was fairly quiet."





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1933

%T Recent quakes identical with those in 1926

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 10/25

%K eq.1933/10/21.kao, forecast.eruption

%X [subheads: Dr. Jaggar makes this statement after further study of Saturday's quakes; Soldiers from Kilauea Military Camp to climb Mauna Loa late this week]

  Further study of the record of last Saturday's earthquake has resulted in the announcement from the office of Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar, Jr., volcanologist in charge of the volcano observatory, that those quakes were practically identical in motive and location with the quakes that immediately preceded the Hoopuloa flow of 1926.

  "Keep your eyes on Mauna Loa," advised E.G. Wingate, assistant to Dr. Jaggar, and cast a casual eye now and then in the direction of the Puna rift. Another thing which is believed to have an influence in causing the scientist to expect an early eruption is a feeling of tenseness and expectancy on the part of natives of the islands. This feeling in the past has been remarkably active in preceding eruptions on a number of occasions. The volcanologist of course will not give this as a reason for anticipating an early eruption by [sic] others not bound by science confess that their hunches are strengthened by it. A number of reports received at the volcano observatory from Kona and other locations on the slopes of Mauna Loa will have to substitute statements by the natives that an early eruption is due.

  . . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1933

%T Mokuaweoweo pit erupts

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1, 3

%8 12/02

%K eq.1933/12/02.mlmok, eq.1933/12/02.mlwf, ml.mok.1933, precursor.eruption.seismicity

%X [Reports indicate lava is pouring out Kona side; 3 vents erupting; Tremors precede violent activity atop of Mauna Loa at 6:00 A.M. today; three vents send huge smoke clouds 5000 to 6000 feet into the sky; Professor Jaggar and party leave for summit to make scientific observations; telephone reports from McCandless Ranch indicate lava has overflowed]  

Simultaneously with three severe earthquakes Mauna Loa, ancient Hawaiian volcanic mountain, erupted at 6 a.m. today at three separate vents in the summit crater of Mokuaweoweo, pouring out huge clouds of white smoke easily visible from Hilo and other sections of the Big Island.

  . . . .

  First information on the eruption was received by phone from the Mauna Loa rest house from a party of soldiers . . . on their way back to the military camp from the summit.

  The men reported that they were awakened shortly before 6 by three quakes of such severity that they were almost thrown from their beds.

  According to Dr. Jaggar the earthquake at 6 a.m. today occurred after a day of unusual quiet for the seismograph. Immediately following the quake the harmonic tremor, which is recorded whenever there is volcanic activity on the Big Island, commenced, indicating that the eruption occurred simultaneously.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1933

%T Four quakes rock Hilo in early hours

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1, 3

%8 12/27

%K eq.1933/12/27.mk

%X A series of four earthquakes rocked Hilo between 3 and 6 a.m. today, with the sharpest shock occurring at 3:45 a.m.

  Reports from the volcano observatory indicate that the shocks were closer to Hilo than to the volcano area, although the point of origin had not been definitely determined.

  No damage was reported from the quakes.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1934

%T Temblor hits Hilo but no damage done; earthquake last night said to have originated ten miles from Kilauea

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 03/02

%K eq.1934/03/01.mlnf

%X An earthquake, the strongest felt in Hilo in many months, rocked a section of the Big Island at 10:25 p.m. last night. No damage was reported from any districts.

  According to reports from the volcano observatory the quake apparently originated about 10 miles away from the observatory, and occurred during a period of exceptional quiet as far as earthquakes are concerned. No change occurred at Halemaumau and there is no indication of any approaching volcanic activity, the observatory reports.

  Telephone reports from various sections of the island indicate that the quake was most strongly felt in the vicinity of Hilo than in any other sections.

  It was felt in the naval camp [KMC] and other sections of the volcano district, and was reported as slight at Puuwaawaa and Kapoho. 

  In Kohala, the Hamakua district and Kau, the shock apparently was not felt.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1934

%T Quake gives island good shake today; paint falls from walls of County building; Kilauea is being watched; Instruments at observatory dismantled by heavy earth temblor

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 05/10

%K eq.1934/05/10.ksf?, eq.1934/05/10.mlnf?

%X Three new quakes were felt at Kapapala today . . . subsequent to the major tremor at 10:09. . .

  The heaviest of the three occurred at 12:35 and was quite noticeable. Halemaumau pit, after inspection by officials, was reported quiet and later indications were that the quakes were associated with eastern Mauna Loa rather than Kilauea.

  A strong, slow earthquake, felt severely in Hilo, causing people to run from buildings and homes into the streets, rocked the east side of the Big island at 10:09 today.

  In the opinion of Thomas A. Jaggar, volcanologist, the shock apparently has some relation to Kilauea due to the fact that it was only slightly felt in the kona district, and was felt much less severely at Kapapala Ranch than in Hilo and the immediate volcano district.

  . . . 

  In Hilo the shock was severe enough to cause some alarm, and at the County building the white ceiling paint cracked in several places, showering the offices. At the Hilo armory three small cracks appeared.

  The shock was recorded on the seismograph at St. Mary's school in Hilo where the instruments were all dismantled. Brother Lawrence reported the shock as lasting for approximately two minutes. At 10:41 a.m. another minor shock was recorded on the local seismograph.

  Telephone messages from Puuwaawaa ranch indicated that while the shock was felt there it was not severe. L.S. Aungst at Holualoa reported that the shock was hardly perceptible there.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1934

%T Quake felt on Maui

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin?

%P p. ?

%8 05/11 or 12?

%K eq.1934/05/10.mlnf?

%X Wailuku, Maui, May 11.--A slight earthquake, barely perceptible but lasting about six seconds, was felt in 

Wailuku at 10:10 a.m. Thursday . . .

  . . . a filing cabinet rattled during the duration of the quake, but no damage was done.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1934

%T Earthquakes are felt in Hilo Sunday

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 05/14

%K eq.1934/05/13.kao, eq.1934/05/13.hil

%X [subheads: shock less severe than big tremor Thursday but are generally felt; No signs of activity seen as sharp lookout kept at Kilauea and Mauna Loa]

  Hilo was rocked by two earthquake shocks Sunday afternoon [May 13], the first at 3:23 p.m. followed three minutes later by a second and more feeble shock. While generally felt neither tremor was as severe as the one which caused some alarm Thursday morning.

  Reports from the volcano observatory indicate that the tremors were probably more severe in that vicinity than they were right in Hilo.

  . . . .

 North Kohala, May 14--Minor damages were reported by householders as the result of a heavy tremblor [sic] felt here at 10:10 a.m. Thursday. The tremor lasted 26 seconds, starting as  a light movement and ending with a sharp shock. The quake was even felt by agricultural workers in the fields. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1934

%T Damages by quake

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin?

%P p. ?

%8 05/14 or 15?

%K eq.1934/05/10.mlnf?

%X North Kohala, Hawaii, May 14.--Minor damages were reported by householders as a result of a heavy tremblor felt here at 10:10 a.m. Thursday [May 10]. The tremor lasted 26 seconds, starting as a light movement and ending with a sharp shock. The quake was felt even by agricultural laborers working in the fields.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1934

%T Temblor rocks Hilo at night; Record study being made to determine direction of quake's origin

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 06/16?

%K eq.1934/06/15.mk

%X   An earthquake, estimated to have originated about 18 miles from the observatory at Kilauea, rocked Hilo last night at 10:45.

  Reports indicate that the shock was more severely felt in Hilo than in the volcano area.

  A study of the records was being made today to determine the direction of the quake's origin.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1934

%T Temblor gives island shaking

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 06/27

%K eq.1934/06/26.ksfos?

%X   An earthquake shock, strongly felt in some sections of Hilo, was recorded on the seismograph at Kilauea Observatory at 7:12 p.m. Tuesday [June 26]. The shock was not hard enough to cause any damage, however, although it was generally felt.

  According to A.E. Jones, seismologist at the observatory, it is estimated that the quake originated about 15 miles from the observatory, and possible [sic] on the south east rift of Mauna Loa.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1934

%T Early morning temblor rocks sleepers here; Jones estimates origin of quake about 20 miles from observatory

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 08/16

%K eq.1934/08/16.hilo

%X  An earthquake recorded on the volcano seismograph shortly after 2 a.m. today was strong enough to awaken sleepers in some sections of Hilo. the shock was reported felt by a number of residents in the Puueo district.

  . . . It was strong enough to dismantle instruments and was felt by only a few people in the volcano district.

  This was the first shock to be felt to be recorded for several weeks, according to Mr. Jones who said that there has been a period of unusual quiet in earth movements.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1934

%T Entire island is rocked by long temblor; Observatory officials say origin of quake centers in direction of Hualalai

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 10/15

%K eq.1934/10/13.mldeep

%X The entire island was rocked by an earthquake Saturday [Oct. 13] at 7:14 p.m. which lasted for fully half a minute but did no damage. Officials at the observatory estimate that the origin of the shock was 25 miles from the observatory in the direction of Hualalai mountain.

  The shock was more of a gentle swaying motion rather than a sudden sharp shake which characterizes the majority of the quakes felt here. The movement was in two waves with an interval of quiet separating the two motions, and was said by kamaainas to be one of the longest earthquakes ever felt here.

  The quake was felt throughout the Kona district, even down at the beach where they are seldom noticed. No damage of any kind was reported in that section, however, according to Mrs. L.S. Aungst, who said that the shock was the strongest felt there in a long time.

  The quake was also strongly felt in Waimea and in Honokaa, and along the Hamakua coast.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1934

%T Island rocked by earthquake at early hour

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 10/19

%K eq.1934/10/19.mldeep

%X An earthquake of moderate intensity, rocked the Big island at 12:21 a.m. today. The shock was hard enough in Hilo to awaken sleepers, but did no damage. 

  E. A. [sic] Jones, seismologist, reported that the quake apparently had originated about 45 miles from the observatory. It was of about the same intensity, although not as long, as the one last Saturday evening [Oct. 13], which was felt throughout the island, and was estimated to have originated in the Hualalai vicinity.

  Three sharp quakes were felt around Waimea at the same time they were felt in Hilo. The three sharp temblors were followed by several of slighter intensity.





%0 Journal Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1934

%T Seismological notes

%J Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America

%V v. 24

%N no. 3

%P p. 330

%K eq.1934/05/10.mlnf?

%X Hilo, Hawaii, May 10, 1934.--The entire eastern part of the island of Hawaii was shaken by an earthquake at 10:09 a.m. on May 10th. No damage was done.





%0 Journal Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1934

%T Seismological notes

%J Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America

%V v. 24

%N no. 4

%P p. 426

%K kl.cal.1934, eq.1934/10/06.klcal, eruption.precursor.seismicity

%X Kilauea, Hawaii, September 6, 1934.--An earthquake at 2 a.m. preceded the eruption of Kilauea Volcano on september 6th. No damage was reported.





%0 Journal Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1934

%T Seismological notes

%J Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America

%V v. 24

%N no. 1

%P p. 73, 76

%K eq.1933/10/21.kao, eqs.1933/12.mlmok

%X Hawaiian Islands, October 21, 1933.--An earthquake was felt on the Hawaiian Islands 200 miles south of Honolulu on October 21st. No damage was caused.



Mauna Loa, Hawaii, December 2, 1933.--Sharp earthquakes accompanied the eruption of Mount Mauna Loa on December 2d.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1935

%T Heavy quake rocks Hawaii

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 01/02

%K eq.1935/01/2.klcaldeep

%X [subheads: Shock center is five miles from Kilauea; Little damage reported from temblor but sleep is lost by hundreds; Shock is felt in every part of island; Dr. Jaggar is checking at pit]

  A strong earthquake, registering 2 or 3 in the intensity scale, rocked the entire island at 6:46 a.m. today, causing minor damage and shaking things generally. While there is nothing yet to indicate volcanic activity, a close watch is being kept at Kilauea volcano and also along Chain-of-Craters road in which vicinity the shock appeared to originate, according to estimates of volcanologists.

  A large land slide, caused by the earthquake, occurred on the Hilo side of Hakalau gulch blocking the roadway there. . . .

  At the local drug stores many bottles were knocked from shelves and broken while broken dishes and pictures were reported in some homes.

  Several kamaaina residents of Hilo claim that the shock was one of the most severe, if not the severest, they have ever felt on this island.

  The quake was felt in all sections of the Big Island but more particularly in the southern section and the vicinity of Kilauea. A.E, Jones, seismologist, said that the instruments at the observatory were dismantled by the shock, but it is estimated that the quake originated about 5 miles southeast of the observatory.

  . . .

  The shock was apparently in two separate waves, the first being a slight one, the second a heavy rocking motion. It was felt strongly in all sections of Hilo and even along the shore area where shocks are least felt of any place in Hilo.

  The shock was reported to be very strong in Kona where it was also felt in two distinct waves. In Kau it was reported that the shock was preceded by a deep rumbling sound, followed a few seconds later by the earthquake.

  The Puna district also felt the shock sharply, but in Waimea and Kohala it was reported that the shock was less severe, more particularly so in Kohala.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1935

%T Quake rocks Waimea during the night

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 01/21

%K eq.1935/01/21.mk

%X [subheads: Dr. Jaggar reports number of tremblors being felt north of Mauna Kea; Volcanologist is surprised at strength of shock as reported from Waimea]

  A earthquake, recorded on the seismograph at the volcano observatory as very feeble, was strongly felt at Waimea, and at Waikii, the Hawaiian Telephone System station on the slope of Mauna Kea, shortly past midnight this morning.

  No reports of the quake being felt in Hilo or other sections of the island were received and Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar, volcanologist, said that the shock was centralized on the north side of Mauna Kea.

  He estimated the origin of the quake at about 37 miles distant from the observatory and reported that frequent have been felt recently on the north side of Mauna Kea.

  In Waimea residents reported that the shock was very sharp while at Waikii it was also reported to have been sharply felt. . . .





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1935

%T Slight earthquake shocks felt at Hilo

%B Honolulu Star-Bulletin

%P p. 8

%8 06/12

%K eq.1935/06/10.mlner??

%X Hilo, Hawaii, June 11--A small earthquake was felt in Hilo at 12:29 p.m. Monday [June 10]. It was reported that the temblor was more pronounced in the Halai Hill than at other points in Hilo.

  The shock was very small in the volcano district where the seismograph recorded a very weak shock at 12:29 p.m. According to Austin E. Jones of the volcano observatory, the earthquake was much stronger toward the Hilo section.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1935

%T Hilo damaged in sharp quake

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1, 5

%8 06/28

%K eq.1935/06/28.ksf?, eqs.1907.mlswr, precursor.eruption.seismicity, eq.1908.ksf

%X Two articles are included under one headline

    Whole island is rocked by sharp shock

Origin of shock believed to be under Puna rift, Hilo is worst hit of all areas

Slides occur at pit, sulphur fumes rise but no sure indication of eruption seen

  With the origin of the quake estimated at about 12 miles from the observatory in an area under the Puna rift, the Big Island was rocked on its foundations at a few seconds after 9 a.m. today. While the shock was generally felt throughout the island, it apparently was strongest in Hilo where considerable damage was suffered.

  While numerous slides occurred at the firepit simultaneously with the quake, and sulphur fumes were seen rising in the pit, there was nothing unusual at the crater, according to A.E. Jones, seismologist.

  Mr. Jones reported that the shock in the volcano district itself was not severe, being about moderate intensity. He said however that from reports from Hilo it was much more severely felt here. The seismographs at the observatory and the pit were both dismantled by the shock, Mr. Jones said.

  Mr. Jones declared that he could not say if the shock this morning portends an eruption or the appearance of lava in the firepit.

  While the Kona district yesterday morning experienced one of the worst quakes in the past six years, the entire district being rocked, the shock this morning was not nearly so hard, according to a report from Mrs. L.S. Aungst.

  She reported that yesterday's quake knocked down dishes in the homes, but otherwise did no damage. However all residents agreed that it was one of the heaviest shocks within the past six years, during the period of the Hualalai shocks.

  At Puuwaawaa yesterday's shock was reported as very hard, but today's was less strongly felt although it lasted for a longer period of time.

  In Kohala, Miss Cal Achilles, tribune Herald special correspondent, reported that the shock, although somewhat heavier than the usual tremors, was not hard enough to cause any damage.

  In Honokaa Joseph Pritchard declared that the shock was felt generally but was not considered especially hard.

  At Kapoho, in the Puna district the shock was reported to have been unusually hard. Residents ran from their homes and gathered in the streets, but no damage was reported.

  Mrs. J.B. Campbell of Kapoho said the shock was very hard at first and then lasted for a few seconds afterward as a slight rocking motion.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1935

%T Big Island is rocked by quake

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 10/01

%K eq.1935/09/30.mlnf.mlswr.mlner.mlmok

%X [subheads: Close watch being kept at firepit; Seismograph records almost continuous tremor from 10:35 p.m. to 3 a.m.; Strongest shock occurs just before midnight, no damage reported on island; Tremors were continuing this morning, with a number of feeble shocks recorded on the seismograph at the volcano observatory. A larger one, recorded at 10:37 a.m. was strong enough to dismantle one of the instruments. It was felt in Hilo and the volcano district.]

  Hilo and the Big Island in general were rocked by a series of earthquakes, four of which were strongly felt, between 10:35 p.m. yesterday and 3 a.m. today, with the largest tremor occurring two minutes before midnight, and continuing for nearly 10 seconds. No damage was reported in any districts.

  . . . .

  According to Dr. Jaggar the tremors were almost continuous, as recorded on the seismograph, between 10:35 p.m. and 3 a.m. The two largest shocks occurred at 10:35 p.m. and just before midnight. All were of a long swaying motion rather than the sharp sudden shock which usually causes some damage.

  Dr. Jaggar estimates the distance of the shocks anywhere from 5 to 30 miles, and said that while he has not yet received sufficient data to definitely determine direction it would appear that the shocks originated on the east slope of Mauna Loa, due to the fact that they were less strongly felt at Puuwaawaa and in the Kohala district.

  The shock at midnight caused considerable falling of rocks in the pit. None of the tremors were sufficiently hard to dismantle the seismograph instruments.

  Hilo people generally felt the 10:35 and the midnight shocks, while a number reported feeling several smaller tremors and one about 1 a.m. which was fairly large. Four shocks were reported felt in the volcano district.

  From Kona Mrs. L.S. Aungst reported by telephone that the midnight shock was quite strong and appeared to be a series of tremors. Mrs. George Krause, correspondent for the Hilo Tribune Herald at Honokaa, reported that six distinct shocks were felt there and that all were of the long swaying type. The midnight shock was reported to be the strongest there.

  The shocks were also felt in the Kau district with the one at midnight being the hardest.





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1935

%T Quake series ends, origin to southeast; total of 30 shocks recorded during 12 hours, believe originated off Puna

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1

%8 10/02

%K eq.1935/09/30.mlnf.mlswr.mlner.mlmok

%X Earthquake activity ceased last night and all was reported quiet this morning following a series of earthquakes which rocked the island Monday night and early Tuesday.

  According to Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar, volcanologist, 30 earthquakes were recorded between 10:30 p.m. Monday and 10:37 a.m. Tuesday, five of them hard enough to dismantle the seismograph instruments at the volcano observatory. In addition an almost continuous tremor was recorded.

  Present indications are that the quakes originated off the Puna coast, definitely away and to the southeast of Kilauea, rather than between Mauna Loa and Hualalai as first indicted, Dr. Jaggar said. this would mean, he said, that some of the big cracks and cliffs between Kilauea and the Puna shore were moving slightly, thus accounting for the slow, swaying motion type of quake. [This type of motion is associated with deep events, not with movement of surface fractures.]

  Dr. Jaggar emphasized that the exact origin of the earthquakes has not been determined definitely and will not until further study is made, but at present indications as judged by the instruments and reports from various parts of the islands, indicate that the origin was to the southeast.

  [This article contradicts the felt reports summarized in the Tribune-Herald the day before. The final locations as reported in The Volcano Letter were beneath Mauna Loa, precursory to the eruption that began on November 21.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1935

%T Island rocked by quake

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1, 4

%8 11/21

%K eq.1935/11/21.mlner, precursor.eruption.seismicity

%X [subheads: Sharp watch is kept for eruption; Shock is felt in all districts of island but no damage is reported; Jaggar says quake was moderate, ordinary Mauna Loa shock]

  Honolulu, Nov. 21--Slight tremors were felt in various sections of Honolulu between 1:10 a.m. and 1:20 a.m. today, but no damage was reported. Windows rattled in Waikiki and residents in higher sections said that the shocks were sufficiently strong to awaken them.

  With the origin of the earthquake which rocked the Big Island at 1:20 a.m. today estimated at 18.6 miles from the observatory or about five miles from the summit crater of Mokuaweoweo on Mauna Loa, a close watch is being maintained today for signs of volcanic activity on the mountain.

  H.R. Waesche, assistant to Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar, at the volcano observatory, reported that the shock originated on the north east rift of Mauna Loa in a west-northwest direction, at practically the same location as the September 30 series of quakes.

  The mountain was clear today and there were no signs of smoke or steam from the summit, and there was no indication on the instruments of volcanic activity.

  The quake appeared to be more strongly felt in the northern sections of the island, with Kona, Kohala and Hamakua reporting the shock to be very strong. It was more moderately felt in Hilo, but was strong enough to awaken many.

  According to Waesche the intensity of the quake was intermediate in size between the heaviest shock and the slightest of the September 30 series.

  The entire Kona district reported feeling the quake, from Puuwaawaa down to the beach at Kailua where it is not generally felt. It awakened residents throughout Kohala and in the Hamakua area. Kau also reported the shock strongly felt there. No damage was reported in any districts.

  Dr. Jaggar termed the shock as an ordinary, moderate Mauna Loa quake. Due to the fact that it was felt all over the island and even as far away as Honolulu it was thought to be of deeper origin than some.

  Due to the fact that an eruption from Mauna Loa or Kilauea is long overdue the earthquake is being considered with special interest in the light of indicating possible activity in the near future. Dr. Jaggar has expected for some time that the next outbreak will be from Mauna Loa.

  [Eruption on Mauna Loa began at 6:35 p.m. on this day.]





%0 Newspaper Article

%A Anonymous

%D 1935

%T Pele angry! Old natives express fear of bombing

%B Hilo Tribune Herald

%P p. 1, 3

%8 12/28

%K ml.ner.1935, lava diversion.bombing, legend.pele

%X An account of